markdown:
![doc](http://idoc.vn/public/idocv3/assets/img/docs/doc.gif)
**Chia sẻ iDoc.vn với bạn bè để nhận tiền thưởng với mỗi lượt click vào link Bạn được:** **20 đ**vào tài khoản thưởng **100 đ**vào tài khoản thưởng cho mỗi lượt đăng ký thành viên mới **Chia sẻ iDoc.vn qua các mạng xã hội** **Chia sẻ iDoc.vn với bạn bè để nhận tiền thưởng với mỗi lượt click vào link Bạn được:** **20 đ**vào tài khoản thưởng **100 đ**vào tài khoản thưởng cho mỗi lượt đăng ký thành viên mới **Chia sẻ iDoc.vn qua các mạng xã hội** ![ Thành viên idoc2012](http://cdn.idoc.vn/images/accounts/default_thumb.jpg)
# Giáo án tiếng anh lớp 6 trọn bộ
[idoc2012](/idoc2012)- 12 tháng trước *Báo lỗi*
Tài liệu tham khảo giáo án tiếng anh THCS - tiếng anh lớp 6.
Trường THCS Thọ Diên GV: Chung Thị Đạo
Date: 15/08/2010
Period. 1 Introduce the lesson.
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge:
Tell Ss how to learn English 6 and methods to learn
b. Skill:
Ss know how to learn English
c. Behavior:
After lesson Ss can apprehend ways to learn English
2. Preparation:
a. T: Syllabus, Teaching aids.
b. Ss:. Learning aids.
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test:
* Warm up: (5’) Greetings.
T: Ask some questions.
- What’s your name?
- How old are you?
- Where are you from?
- Do you like to learn English?
b. New lesson: (35’)
T tell how to learn English
Consists of 16 units and each unit consit of many sections devide in many period such as: You and me; Education; Community; Health; Recreation; The world around us. After three unit has grammar practice apply for doing exercise
* Work book:
It’s useful and good for you, it usually goes long with the text book, do all the exercises each lesson or each unit
* Note book:
It use for writing the important target language items (vocabulary, grammar, structure …..)
Write clearly and scientifically
* Some other school things: Pen, pencil, ruler, eraser
* Activities in class: - pay attention to the T’s explanation
- follow the T’s requirements
- Keep silent and involve in all the activities when the T requires
* Work at home:
- Learn by heat vocabulary, grammar, structure, practice reading, writing, speaking, listening, do the exercises in the work book
c. summery: (3’)
d. Homework: (2’) Prepare for new lesson
………………………………………………………….
Date of planning: 22/8/2009 Date of teaching: 6a:26/8/2009
6b: 28/8/2009
6c: 25/8/2009
Unit1:GREETING
Period 2: A. HELLO(A1, 2, 3, 4)
Objectives:
a. Knowledge:
- Greet, introduce the name.
- The number from 1 to 5.
b. skill:
Litening, writing, speaking and reading
behavior:
Ss know how to greet and like to study English
Preparations
T: Teaching aids; syllabus; textbook; cassette; board; picture; chalk
Ss: Learning aids
Procedure:
Oral test:
Warm up:(5’)
Greetings.
T: Ask some questions.
What’s your name?
My name....
How old are you?
I’m...
Where are you from?
I’m...
Do you like to learn English?
Yes, I do.
New lesson:(35’)
Teacher and student’s active.
Contents
T: Ask the P to Look at the picture and ask
? what do we do when we first meet?
Ss: Look and say ‘greeting’
T: Can say the greet in Vietnamese
T: In English they say ‘hello’( read 2 time)
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Ask the P to Look at the book and linten to the radio.
Ss: Listen
T: Call some P read again.
*The way to use Hello and Hi.
Ss: Look , listen and read.
T: Tell about the different of Hi and Hello
T: Request the Ss to Work in groups. Greet together.
Ss: Work in groups and greet together.
T: Ask the Ss about the things they usually introduce about themself when they meet others.
T: Intoduce the way to intrduce the name
T: Open the tape.
Ss: Listen and repeat.
T: Say “ Hello I’m…..”
T: Call some Ss to say about their name
T: Ask Ss Work in groups and introduce themself.
Ss: Work in groups and introduce themself
Ss: Some groups say aloud.
S1: Hello! I’m Nam
S2: Hi! My name is Hoa
10’
15’
10’
1. greeting
Hello: xin chào
Hi:
cả 2 cỏch chào đều thõn mật nhưng ‘hi’ dung để chào ban bố cựng trang lứa
2. The way to intrduce the name
* Newwords:
Name (n): Tờn
I (n): Tụi
My (n): Của tụi
- I am + name.
- My name is + name.
- I am = I’m.
- My name is = my name is
3. Practice
Hello I’m Lan / My name is lan
c. Summery: (3’)
- T retell the content of the lesson
- Retell about the different between Hi and Hello
d. Home work: (2’)
- Learn the lesson
- Do ex in the workbook
- Prepare for the next period
……………………………………………………………….
Date of planning: 25/8/2009 Date of teaching: 6a:28/8/2009
6b: 29/8/2009
6c: 28/8/2009
Unit1: GREETING (cont)
Period 3: A. HELLO ( A 5, 6, 7).
1. Objectives:
Knowledge:
“ How are you”; “ I’m fine. Thanks” to greet each other
skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
Behavior:
Help Ss to have a good habit of communication
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. procedure:
a. Oral test:(3’).
T: Call 1 s goes to the Bb in troduce themselves
S1: Hello I’m…..
S2: Hi my name is…..
T: request some Ss give commend and give mark
* warm up(2’)
T: ? What do people often ask after greeting and introduce name ?
Ss: can use Vietnamese to say: they ask about healh
b. New lesson: (37’)
Teacher and student’s activite
Contents
T: Ask the P to Look at the picture A5.
T: Ask the P to guess what the P in the picture say?
Ss: Look and say.
Ss: Can say in Vietnamese.
T: Introdude the way to ask about the heath
T: Read “ How are you?”
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Say the Thank speeches.” I’m fine thanks"
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: explain khi ko muốn nhắc lai câu hỏi mà trước ta đó đề cập ta có thể dựng “ And you?”
T: Ask the Ss to Look at the book and linten to the radio.
T: Open the tape.
T: Call some Ss to read again.
Ss: Read the text.
Write on board a misorder dialogue
(1) Lan : Hello, Ba. How are you?
(2) Lan : I’m fine , thanks.
(3) Ba : I’m fine thanks. And you ?
(4)Ba: Hi , Lan
T: Ask students to close their books
Ss: Close their book
T: Play the tape or read dialogue twice then ask students to rerrange the dialogue in corrcect order
T: Play the tape again
Ss: Listen
T: call students give out the answer
key: 4, 1, 3, 2
T: ? Which questions does Lan ask about Ba health ?
T: ? How about the answer ?
Ss: answer
T: Open the tape again and request Ss find the true answer. Request the Ss to Work in pairs( Ask and answer about the heath).
S1: How are you?
S2: I’m fine, thanks.
T: Ask the Ss to Work in pairs. Call some Ss read aloud.
15’
12’
10’
1. How are you?
How are you?: bạn cú khoẻ khụng
I’m fine thanks: cỏm ơn tụi khoẻ
And you? thế cũn bạn
2. Practice
A: hello.Mr Hung
B: Hello, miss Hoa, How are you?
A: I’m fine, thanks and you?
B: Fine , thanhs.
3. Further practice:
* Put the words in the blank
Hoa: ...... My .....is Hoa.
Nga: .... .... am Nga. How are ....?
Hoa: I’m ....., thanks. .....you?
Nga: I’m fine, .......
c. Summery:(2’)
T: Retell about the content of the lesson.
Ss : Listen and remember.
d. HomeWork:(1’)
Learn the lesson.
Prepare new lesson.
- Do the exercise
………………………………………………………………………..
Date of planning: 28/8/2009 Date of teaching: 6a: 1/9/2009
6b: 1/9/2009
6c: 31/8/2009
Unit1: GREETING ( cont)
Period 4: B. GOODMORNING (B: 1,2,3,4,5)
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge:
‘Good morning / goodafternoon …’ to greet each other; say good buy. We’re….. to talk about ’us’
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c . Behavior:
Help Ss to have a good habit of communication
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. procedure:
a. Oral test:(3’).
T: Call 2 pairs make a conversation with content about greeting and asking about health
Students come board and make conversation in pairs
* Key
S1: Hello Lan . How are you ?
S2: Hi, Ha , Im fine . And you ?
S1:I’m fine , thanks
* Remark : Right spelling .and pronunciation : 10 points
Teacher listen and correct their mistakes
* Warm up (2’)
T: ? When you meet someone how do you salute ?
S1: Hello , Hi Mr / Miss + name
T: To day we will study how to salute people more politely
New lesson :(35’)
Teacher and students’s actives
Contents
* Presentation :
Ask students to look at the picture part B1 page 14
T point at the first picture : When is it ? if you meet somebody in the morning you should salute “
Ss: Look at the picture and answer
Ss: đây là buổi sáng
T: show picture 2 : When is it ?
Ss: đây là buổi chiều
T: picture 3: When is it ?
Ss: đây là buổi tối
Do the same …
Explain : if you meet someone in the morning you can salute “Goodmorning”
Ss: Listen and r repeat
T: Let students read in chorus (twice )
T: Call students read individually and correct their mistakes
Ss: Listen and Copy and read.
T: guide Ss practice in pairs to greet each other
Ss: practice in pairs
T: check and correct
20’
15’
1. Newords
- Goodmorning : 6- 12 Am
- Good afternoon :12- 6 p.m
- Good evening : after 6p.m-10p.m
- Goodnight : before bed time
- Goodbye = bye: tạm biệt
2. practice
S1: Good morning
S2: Good morning
S1: Good afternoon
S2: Good afternoon
c. Summery(3’)
T: Retell about the content of the lesson
d. HomeWork:(2’)
- Pactice greeting in many ways
- Learn by heart all content
- Learn by heart the dialogue part B4
- Prepare for new lesson
Date of planning: 1/9/2009 Date of teaching: 6a: 4/9/2009
6b: 4/9/2009
6c: 4/9/2009
Unit1: GREETINGS
Period 5: C. HOW OLD ARE YOU?( C1, 2)
1. Objectives
a. Knowledge:
The number from 1 to 20.
“How old are you?” to talk about age and contract with “how are you?”
b. skill:
Litening, writing, speaking and reading.
c . Behavior:
- Help Ss to have a good habit of communication
- Educate students like learning everyday English
2. Preparations:
a.T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids.
3. Steps of teaching:
a. Oral test: (5’)
T: call 1s go to the board answer the question
Ss: Go to the board
Question:
Retell some greetings
How are you?
Key:
Hello, hi, good morning, good afternoon, good everning, good night …
I am fine thank you
T: Check and give mark
* Warm up: (2’)
T: Use the numbers and ask? Do you know how to say all these number in English?
Ss: Answer
T: In this lesson I will help you to know how to say all these number in English
b. New lesson: (35’)
Teacher and student’ s active
Contents
T: Ask the Ss to Look at the book and listen to the radio or teacher reads.
T: Open the tape or read the number from 1 to 20.
Ss: Look. Listen and repeat.
T: Call some Ss to read again
Ss: Read aloud.
T: Ask the Ss to count from 1 to 20
Some Ss read individually before the class
T: check and correct their pronuciation
Pelmanism
T: Use 10 cards. 5 cards are numbers 11, 13, 12, 15, 20 and 5 cards are: Eleven, twelve, thirteen, fifteen, tweenty.
T: Call some Ss to read aloud
T: request the Ss to work in pairs and go to the board find the correct cards
Ss: Work in pairs and go to the board to do
Eg: card 11 with eleven etc…
T: check and correct
T: ask Ss to write the number
Ss: Write the number
Ss: Work individual
Example: a, thirteen
15’
12’
8’
1. The number:
One: 1 Eleven: 11
Two: 2 Twelve: 12
Three: 3 Thirteen: 13
Four: 4 Fourteen: 14
Five: 5 Fifteen: 15
Six: 6 Sixteen: 16
Seven: 7 Seventeen: 17
Eight: 8 Eighteen: 18
Nine: 9 Nineteen: 19
Ten: 10 Tweenty: 20
2. Practice:
Eleven: 11
Twelve: 12
Fifteen: 15
Thirteen: 13
Tweenty: 20
3. Further practice.
Write the number:
a, 13 + 3 =
b, 3 + 9 =
c, 7 + 13 =
d, 10 + 9 =
c. Consolidation: (2’)
T: Retell the content of the lesson.The number from 1 to 20.
d. HomeWork: (1’)
Learn the lesson.
Prepare new lesson.
- Do exercise in the book
Date of planning: 4/9/2009 Date of teaching: 6a: 8/9/2009
6b: 8/9/2009
6c: 7/9/2009
Unit1: GREETINGS
Period 6: C. HOW OLD ARE YOU? (C3, 4, 5)
1. Objectives:
a. knowledge:
- Further practice in number from 1 to 20 to count and give telephone numbers
- “How old are you?” to talk about age. “This is …” to introduce some ones
b. skill:
Litening, writing, speaking and reading.
c . Behavior:
- Help Ss to have a good habit of communication
- Educate students like learning everyday English
2. Preparations:
a.T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids.
3. Steps of teaching:
a. Oral test: (5’)
T: call 1s go to the board
Questions:
Count the numbers from 1 to 20
Read these numbers: 11, 15, 20, 5, 12 (T write on the board)
Ss: Go to the board to do
Key:
one, two, three etc….
eleven, fifteen, twenty, five, twelve
T: Check and give mark
* Warm up: (2’)
T: guide the Ss play “jumble words” game
Ss: play the game
T: write on the board the jumbled words: eevsn, ntreeouf, vefi, etc ...and ask Ss rewrite the correct words
Ss: Work individually to rewrite the correct words
T: check and correct
b. New lesson: (35’)
Teacher and student’ active
Contents
T: Call some Ss read aloud the number in the book.
Ss: Read aloud the number in the book
T: This is Miss Hoa
T: Ask the Ss look at the book and tell what are they talking about.
Ss: Look at the book and tell what are they talking about.
T: Ask the Ss look at the book and listen to the tape or T reads
Ss: Listen
T: Call 3 Ss read the text.
Ss: Practice
T: Introduce the new form: - “How old are you?
Ss: Listen and copy
T; Request the Ss to Work in pairs to ask and answer
Ss: Work in pairs.
Eg: - S1: How old are you?
- S2: I’m eleven years old
T: Check and correct
Ss: some pairs practice before the class
T: Ask the Ss to read the picture 2
Ss: read the picture 2
T: Ask the Ss practice the picture 2
Ss: practice
*Practice:
T: ask the Ss practice with your class mate. Devide the Ss in to groups to make a dialogue.
Ss: Devide in to groups to make a dialogue.
Model:
An: Good afternoon, Binh.
This is Nam
- Binh: Good afternoon, Nam.
How old are you?
Nam: I’m 11
T: Call some Ss read aloud.
T: check and correct
T: Write 0123556726 on the board and say this is my telephone number. ? Can you read
Ss: Read the phone number on the board.
T: ask ?What is your telephone number
Ss: answer
T: guide the Ss practice to go to the board and write the numbers then read
Ss: Go to the board and write the numbers.
T: check and correct
1. How old are you?
How old are you?:
I’m +number + years old
Eg: How old are you?
I’m eleven years old
2. practice
further practice
The telephone number
c. Consolidation:(2’)
Retell about the content of the lesson.
Introduce the name.
Ask about the years old.
d. Homework:(1’)
Learn the lesson.
Prepare new lesson.
Do exercise in the work book
Date of planning: 5/9/2009 Date of teaching: 6a: 10/9/2009
6b: 12/9/2009
6c: 8/9/2009
Unit 2: AT SCHOOL
Period 7: A. COME IN.(A1, 2, 3, 4)
1. Objectives:
a. knowledge:
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to understand classroom imperatives by the
T's commands.
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c . Behavior:
Student like studying the subject and realize that it is an interesting subject
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture, chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids.
3. Steps of teaching:
a. Oral test: (5’)
T: call 1s go to the board and ask
Questions:
Count the numbers from 1 to 20
How old are you?
Key:
one, two, three etc…
I’m … years old
* Warm up: (2’)
T: ask Ss to look at the book and guess.
?Who are they?
What does the teacher do?
Ss: Look at the A1 and guess.
Ss: Answer by Vietnamese
T: Introduce the lesson
b. New lesson: (32’)
Teacher and student’ s active
Comments
T: Ask the Ss to Look at the book and listen to the radio.
T: Open the tape or read
Ss: Look, listen and repeat.
T: introduce the new words
T: Read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Call 3 Ss read the text.
Ss: Work in group to read the text
T: Ask the Ss to practice with a partner.
Ss: Listen and do.
T: Says: Stand up, sit down,
Ss: Listen and do
T: Open your book....
Ss: Listen and do
T: Ask the Ss Look at the picture in the book and match.
T: Call each s say and match each sentence.
Ss: say and match each sentence with each picture
Ss: All the class correct.
T: check and correct
12’
10’
10’
1. The imperatives
Come in: mời vào
Sitdown > < Stand up: ngồi xuống > < đứng lờn
Open your book >< Close your book: mở sỏch ra > < gấp sỏch vào
2. Practice.
Stand up, sit down, Open your book....
3. Match and write:
Open the book.
Sitdown.
Come in
Close the book
Stand up.
c. Summery: (5’)
Retell about the content of the lesson.
Play game:
T: say aloud the imperatives in the lesson and ask Ss do
Ss: listen and do
T: Say Stand up!
Ss: Stand up
Etc….
d. Homework:(1’)
Learn the lesson.
Prepare new lesson.
Do exercise in the work book
Date of planning: 9/9/2009 Date of teaching: 6a: 15/9/2009
6b: 12/9/2009
6c: 15/9/2009
Unit 2: AT SCHOOL
Period 8: B. WHERE DO YOU LIVE? (B1, 2)
1. Objectives:
a. knowledge:
- Ask and answer about name; Ask and answer about the place you live with ‘where do you live’ questions
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c . Behavior:
Student like studying the subject and realize that it is an interesting subject
Students proud of their country
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture, chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids.
3. Steps of teaching:
a. Oral test: (3’)
T: call 1s go to the board and ask
Questions:
? Retell the imperatives?
Key:
Open the book; Sit down; Come in; Close the book; Stand up
* Warm up: (2’)
T: ask Ss to look at the picture in the book
?Where is it?
?What do you say when you first meet another?
Ss: Look at the book and answer
Ss: Answer by Vietnamese
T: Introduce the lesson
New lesson: (35’)
Teacher and student’ s active
Contents
T: Use the picture to introduce the new words
( T shows the picture of the street)
? What is this?
Ss: Look and answer
T: read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Ask the Ss to look at the book and listen to the tape or T reads.
T: Open the tape or T reads.
Ss: Listen
T: Ask the Ss to look at the book and find the new words.
T: Write the new words on the board.
T: read
Ss: Listen and repeat
Some Ss read before the class
T: check and correct
T: Introduce the structure to ask about the name, years old, address.
Ss: Look, listen and copy
T: Ask the Ss to practice the dialogue with a partner.
Ss: practice the dialogue with a partner
T: check and correct
T: Ask the Ss to practice in pairs to ask and answer
Ss: practice in pairs
S1: Where do you live?
S2: I live in Bac yen
Etc…
All the class correct.
8’
10’
10’
7’
1. New words
Live: sống
Street: đường phố
What: cỏi gỡ, gỡ
Where: ở đõu
2. Where do you live?
Ask about the name:
What is your name?: Bạn tờn là gi?
My name is + tờn: Tờn của tụi là…
I’m + tờn: Tụi là…
E.g.: - My name is Lan
- I’m Lan
Ask about the address.
Where do you live?: Bạn sống ở đõu?
I live in + place (nơi chốn)
E.g.: I live in Bac yen.
3. Practice the dialogue.
4. further practice
Where do you live?
I live on Ha Nhan Nghia street.
c. Summery: (4’)
T: retell the contents of the lesson
T write on the board the exercise and ask the Ss to fill the missing words
1. what ‘s.....name?
2. My... … Lan.
3. Where … you … ?
4. I … in … Bac Yen
d. Homework:(1’)
Learn the lesson.
Prepare new lesson.
Do exercise in the work book
Date of planning: 12/9/2009 Date of teaching: 6a: 16/9/2009
6b: 15/9/2009
6c: 17/9/2009
Unit 2: AT SCHOOL
Period 9: B. WHERE DO YOU LIVE?( B3, 4, 5, 6)
1. Objectives:
a. knowledge:
- Ask and answer about name and ‘how do you spell it?’ with the alphabet to talk about the name
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c . Behavior:
Student like studying the subject and realize that it is an interesting subject
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture, chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids.
3. Steps of teaching:
a. Oral test: (3’)
T: call 1s go to the board and ask
Questions:
What is your name?
Where do you live?
How old are you?
Key:
1) My name is …
2) I live in …
3) I’m … years old
T: check and correct
* Warm up: (2’)
T: ask Ss to look at the picture in the book
?What is it?
Ss: Look at the book and answer
Ss: Answer by Vietnamese
T: Introduce the lesson
d. New lesson: (37’)
Teacher and student’ s active
Contents
T: Introduce the alphabet.
T: Ask the Ss to look at the book and listen to the radio.
T: Open the tape and sing the alphabet song.
Ss: Listen
T: Ask the Ss to Sing the alphabet song.
T: Write on the board.
Ss: Copy and read
T: Ask the Ss to practice to sing the alphabet song.
Ss: practice by singing the alphabet song.
T: Introduce how to spell the name
How do you spell your name?
e.g: L-A-N
T: ask Ss to spell their name
Ss: spell their name
T: check and correct
T: ask Ss practice in pairs the b5 in the book then write the answer in the book
Ss: practice in pairs to ask and answer then write the answer in the book
S1: what is your name?
S2: My name is…
Etc…
15’
12’
10’
1.The alphabet.
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z.
Nguyờn õm: A E I O U.
Phụ õm: B C D....
2. How do you spell your name?
Spell(v): đỏnh vần
How do you spell your name?
Bạn đỏnh vần tờn mỡnh như thế nào?
3. Practice
a) What is your name?
b) How old are you?
c)Where do you live?
d) How do you spell your name?
c. Summery: (2’)
T: retell the contents of the lesson
- Retell the alphabet
d. Homework:(1’)
Learn the lesson.
Prepare new lesson.
Do exercise in the work book
Date of planning: 14/9/2009 Date of teaching: 6a: 19/9/2009
6b: 17/9/2009
6c: 17/9/2009
Unit2: AT SCHOOL.
Period 10: C. MY SCHOOL( C1)
1. Objectives:
a. knowledge:
Introduce the things.
This/that to ask and answer about the things and the people at school.
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c . Behavior:
Student like studying the subject and realize that it is an interesting subject
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture, chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids.
3. Steps of teaching:
a. Oral test: (3’)
T: call 1s go to the board and ask
Questions:
Sing the alphabet song.
How do you spell your name?
Key:
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X and Y and Z.
Ss answer
Other S giving the opinions.
T: check and correct
* Warm up: (3’)
T: request Ss sing the alphabet song.
Ss: Sing the alphabet song.
T: use a picture with a famous singer or player and ask Ss to spell his or her name
Ss: spell
d. New lesson: (32’)
Teacher and student’ s active
Contents
T: ask Ss to look at the picture in the book
?What is it?
Ss: Look at the book and answer by Vietnamese
Ss: Answer ‘ trường học’
T: can you say ‘ trường học’ in English?
Ss: answer
T: read
Ss: Listen and repeat
? What does school have?
? Who are in the school?
? What does the class have?
Ss: answer
T: Introduce the other new word (do the same)
T: Call the Ss read the new words.
Ss: Read the new words.
T: Ask the Ss to look at the book and linten to the tape or T reads
T: Open the tape.
Ss: Look, listen and repeat.
T: check and correct
T: introduce this/ that
T: Point 2 things 1 is near, 1 is far and say: This is my desk; That is your desk
Ss: Look, listen and copy
T: Read
Ss: listen and repeat.
T: ask Ss practice the dialogue with a partner
Ss: practice the dialogue with a partner
T: check and correct
T: Ask the Ss to practice by introducing about the name of the things and people in the class
Ss: practice in pairs
T: check and correct
T: Ask the Ss to ask and answer
Ss: practice in pairs to ask and answer
S1: is this your teacher?
S2: Yes, This is my teacher
Etc…
T: check and correct
15’
17’
1. The school
School(n): trường học
Class(n): lớp học
Classroom(n): phũng học
Desk(n): cỏi bàn
Teacher(n): giỏo viờn
Student(n): học sinh
My(n): của tụi
Your(n): của bạn
2. This and that
This: Đõy. chỉ vật ở gần
That: Kia. chỉ vật ở xa
Usage: Dựng để giới thiệu về người và vật
This/that + is + N
Is + This/that + N?
Yes. This/that/it + is
No. This/that/it + is + not
E.g: This is my teacher
Is this your teacher?
Yes, this is
or No, this is’nt
c. Summery: (6’)
T: retell the contents of the lesson
The way to introduce the things and the person.
Change these sentence in to the questions:
This is a desk
That is my school
This is my class
This is my teacher
Key:
Is this a desk?
Is that your school?
Is is your class?
Is this your teacher?
T: check and correct
d. Homework:(1’)
Learn the lesson.
Prepare new lesson.
Do exercise in the work book
Date of planning: 15/9/2009 Date of teaching: 6a: 22/9/2009
6b: 18/9/2009
6c: 19/9/2009
Unit2: AT SCHOOL.
Period 11: C. MY SCHOOL( C2, 3, 4)
1. Objectives:
a. knowledge:
Introduce the things.
This/that to ask and answer about the things and the people at school.
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c . Behavior:
Student like studying the subject and realize that it is an interesting subject
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture, chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids.
3. Steps of teaching:
a. Oral test: (3’)
T: call 1s go to the board and ask
Questions:
Is this your teacher?
What is this? (T takes a book and show something in the class or a picture to ask)
Key:
Yes, this is
It’s a book, a desk, etc …
Other Ss giving the opinions.
T: check and correct
* Warm up: (2’)
T: Change the sentence?
That is my classroom.
Ss: answer.
Is that your classroom?
Yes, it is .
No, it isn’t.
d. New lesson: (35’)
Teacher and student’ s active
Contents
T: Show the pictures and ask
? What is this?
Ss: Look at the picture and answer in Vietnamese
T: Introduce the new word
T: Read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Teach the same the other words
T: Ask the Ss to look at the book and linten to the radio.
T: Open the tape.
Ss: Look at the book and linten to the tape.
T: Ask the Ss to read
Ss: read
T: Ask Ss use What is this/that? To ask and answer
Ss: practice in pairs to ask and answer
S1: What is this ?
S2: It’s a pen.
Etc…
T: Introduce the way to use a and an
Ss: Listen and copy
T: Ask the Ss to practice give the example with a and an.
T: Request the Ss to work in pairs.
Ss: Work in pairs.
T: check and correct
T: Show the thing in the class and ask
? What is this?
? What is that?
Ss: look and answer with it’s…
10’
8’
10’
7’
1.The thing around us.
*Newwords:
A door: cỏi cửa
A window: Cửa sổ
A board: Cỏi bảng
a clock: Cỏi đồng hồ
A waste basket: Thựng rỏc
A school bag: Cặp sỏch hs
A pencil: Bỳt chỡ
A pen: Cỏi bỳt
A ruler: Cỏi thước
An eraser: Cục tẩy
2. What is this/that
What is this ?
It’s a pen.
What is that?
It’s a ruler.
3. The way to use a and an:
*A: Đứng trước danh từ đếm được số ít bắt đầu bằng phụ âm.
*An: Đứng trước danh từ đếm được số ít bắt đầu bằng nguyên âm.
e.g. This is a book.
That is an eraser.
What is that?
It is a/ an...
( +) That is your pencil.
( + )That is a student.
( ? ) Is that an eraser?
Yes, it is.
No, it is not= It isn’t.
4. practice
c. Summery: (4’)
T: retell the contents of the lesson
The way to introduce the things and the person.
The way to use a and an
Guide the Ss to do ex
d. Homework:(1’)
Learn the lesson.
Prepare new lesson.
Do exercise in the work book
Date of planning: 20/9/2009 Date of teaching: 6a: 23/9/2009
6b: 22/9/2009
6c: 22/9/2009
Unit 3: AT HOME
Period 12: A. MY HOUSE (A 1, 2)
1. Objectives:
a. knowledge:
Introduce the things.
‘Wh’ question with this/that and living room vocabulary to talk about the things in the house.
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c . Behavior:
Student like studying the subject and fell pround of their house
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture, chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids.
3. Steps of teaching:
a. Oral test: (3’)
T: call 1s go to the board and ask some questions about things in the class
Questions:
What is this?
What is that?
Key:
It’s a book/pen/clock …
It’s a desk/school bag …
Other Ss giving the opinions.
T: check and correct
* Warm up: (4’)
T: Guide Ss play game wordsquare to find words they have learnt in last lesson
W
P
E
N
S
C
E
X
O
E
D
D
C
L
R
D
D
N
E
O
H
O
A
R
N
C
S
O
O
C
S
A
T
I
R
R
O
K
E
O
W
L
R
U
L
E
R
B
Ss: Play game
T: Check and correct
Key:
→ Pen, ruler
↓ Window, pencil, school, clock, eraser
↑ Board
d. New lesson: (35’)
Teacher and student’ s active
T: Introduce the house in the picture and ask
What is in the house?
Ss: Look and answer in Vietnamese
T: Introduce the new words (use picture in the book) by asking some questions
Example: T shows a picture of TV and ask
? What is this?
Ss: Cỏi Tivi
? Can you say it in English? (em cú thể núi từ Tivi trong tiếng Anh ko?)
Ss: Answer
T: Now listen to me Television (T reads 2 times and ask Ss repeat)
T: Write the new word on the board and ask Ss to read again
Ss: Listen, repead and copy
T: Teach the same other words
T: Correct the Ss’s pronunciation
T: Take a pen and says: This is a pencil.
T: Take 2 pens and says: These are pencils.
T: Ask the Ss to think about the diferrent of 2 sentences.
Ss: Look and answer the diferrent of 2 sentences.
T: Say the diferrent of 2 sentences and
introduce these and those
Ss: Look, listen and copy.
T: Take the things and put it on the table then point and say
?What is/ that/ this/ it?
Ss: That/ This/ it +is + a ruler/ an eraser.
? What are these/those ?
Ss: They/ those/ these are pens, rulers
T: Request the Ss to work in pairs. Use the picture A1 ask and answer.
Ss: Look, listen and practice in pairs
S1: What is this?
S2: it’s a ruler
S1: What are those?
What are those?
Etc…
T: Check and correct
13’
17’
5’
Contents
1. Things in the house
Television (n): Cỏi Tivi
Chair (n): Cỏi ghế
Stereo (n): đài
Bookshelf (n): Cỏi giỏ sỏch
Lamp (n): bóng đèn
Table (n): Cỏi bàn
Couch (n): Cỏi ghế dài
Telephone (n): Máy điện thoại
Armchair (n): Ghế cú tay cầm
Livingroom (n): Phũng khỏch
2.These and those
These là số nhiều của This
Those là số nhiều của that
a. Danh từ số có ít số đơn vị là 1
What is/ that/ this/ it?
That/ This/ it + is + a/ an + N.
E.g. What is/ that/ this/ it?
That/ This/ it +is + a ruler/ an eraser.
b. Danh từ số nhiều có số đơn vị lớn hơn 1
What are these ?
They are...
What are those?
They are...
=>They/ those/ these+ are + N
c. Cỏch chuyển từ số ớt sang số nhiều
Thông thường ta thêm ‘s’ vào sau danh từ
E.g. Book = > books.
Cỏc danh từ cú từ tận cựng là x, o, s, sh, ch. Ta thờm ‘es’ vào sau danh từ
E.g. Box = > boxes.
3. Practice
What is that?
→That is a ruler.
What are those?
→Those are rulers.
c. Summery: (2’)
T: retell the contents of the lesson
The way to introduce the things
Guide the Ss to do ex
d. Homework:(1’)
Learn the lesson.
Prepare new lesson.
Do exercise in the work book
Date of planning: 23/9/2009 Date of teaching: 6a: 26/9/2009
6b: 24/9/2009
6c: 24/9/2009
Unit 3: AT HOME
Period 13: A. MY HOUSE (A 3, 4, 5*)
1. Objectives:
a. knowledge:
Family vocabulary, possessive pronouns: my, your, her, his and ‘who is this/that?’ questions to talk about family member
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c . Behavior:
Student like studying the subject and fell pound of their families
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture, chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids.
3. Steps of teaching:
a. Oral test: (4’)
T: call 1s go to the board and ask some questions about things in the class or house
Questions:
What is this?
What are these?
What is that?
What are those?
Key:
It’s a/an …
They/these are …
It’s a/an …
They/these are …
Other Ss giving the opinions.
T: check and correct
* Warm up: (1’)
T: Ask Ss look at the picture of a family
? Who are they
Ss: Look and answer
T: Today we will study some vocabulary about the members in a family
d. New lesson: (37’)
Teacher and student’s active.
Contents
T: Ask the Ss to look at the book and listen to the
radio
T: Open the tape.
T: Ask the Ss to look at the book and find the new words.
Ss: Look at the book and find the new words
T: Introduce the new words
T: Read
Ss: Look, listen and repeat
T: Request the Ss to read the text after listen to the radio or T reads
T: Call the Ss read.
T: Take the things and say
This is my book.
This is your pencil.
It’s her ruler.
It’s his pen.
T: Introduce the question with ‘ who’
Ss: Listen and copy
T: Introduce the question with ‘how many’
Ss: Listen and copy
T: Request the Ss to work in pairs to ask and answer
Ss: Work in pairs to ask and answer
S1: How many people are there in your family?
S2: There are 6
Etc …
T: Ask Ss to work in pairs. Ask and answer.
Ss: practice in pairs to ask and answer
T: Check and correct
10’
10’
10’
7’
1. Ba’s family
Family (n):Gia đỡnh
Sister (n):Chị, em gỏi
Brother (n):anh, em trai
People (n):Người( số nhiều).
2. Tớnh từ sở hữu
Her (n):Của chị, cụ ấy
His (n):Của anh, ụng ấy
Too: Đứng cuối câu biểu thị sự đồng tỡnh giống nhau
e.g. I’m a teacher
She’s a teacher, too
Who: ai
Who is this/that?
This/that is + N
*E.g.: Who is that?
That’s my teacher.
3. Cõu hỏi về số lượng
How many: Bao nhờu
Structure:
How many + Ns + are there...
there are + Ns.
There is an / an + N
E.g. How many students are there in your class?
There are 34 students in my class.
How many people are there in your family?
There are 4
4. Practice:
a. What is your name?
b. How old are you?
c. How many people in your family?
c. Summery: (2’)
T: retell the contents of the lesson
The way to introduce the people in the family and in the class
Guide the Ss to do ex
d. Homework:(1’)
Learn the lesson.
Prepare new lesson.
Do exercise in the work book
Date of planning: 26/9/2009 Date of teaching: 6a: 29/9/2009
6b: 1/10/2009
6c: 29/9/2009
Unit 3: AT HOME
Period 14: B. NUMBERS (B 1, 2)
1. Objectives:
a. knowledge:
Numbers from 21 to 100.
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c . Behavior:
Student like studying the subject
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture, chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids.
3. Steps of teaching:
a. Oral test: (4’)
T: call 1s go to the board and ask some questions about things, people in the class or house
Questions:
What is this?/ What is that?
What are these?/What are those?
Who is this?/that?
Key:
It’s a/an …
They/these are …
It’s a/an …
They/these are …
This is/ that is …
Other Ss giving the opinions.
T: check and correct
* Warm up: (1’)
T: Ask Ss to retell the numbers from 1 to 20
Ss: Retell the numbers from 1 to 20
T: Today we will study numbers from 21 to 100
d. New lesson: (37’)
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Ask Ss look in the book listen and repeat
T: Read or open the tape
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Write the numbers on the board
Ss: Copy
T: Ask some Ss to read the numbers
Ss: Read
T: Guide Ss to make numbers
e.g Tweenty- one = 21.
Ss: Practice
T: introduce plural nouns
Ss: listen and copy
T: Point some people in the class and ask Ss to count
Ss: count
T: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss to count thing in the picture in the book(page 36)
Ss: Practice to count
1. Numbers
Tweenty: 20
Thirty: 30
Fourty: 40
Fifty: 50
Sixty: 60
Seventy: 70
Eighty: 80
Ninety: 90
One hundred: 100
Tweenty- one = 21.
Số chẵn hàng chục + số đếm
2. Danh từ số nhiều
Danh từ số nhiều có số đơn vị lớn hơn 1
What are these ?
They are...
What are those?
They are...
=>They/ those/ these+ are + N
Cỏch chuyển từ số it sang số nhiều
Thông thường ta thêm ‘s’ vào sau danh từ
E.g. Book = > books.
Cỏc danh từ cú từ tận cựng là x, o, s, sh, ch. Ta thờm ‘es’ vào sau danh từ
E.g. Box = > boxes.
Conch = > couches
c. Summery: (2’)
T: retell the contents of the lesson
The way to count the thing in the house and in the class
Guide the Ss to do ex
d. Guide to do Homework:(1’)
Learn the lesson.
Prepare new lesson.
Do exercise in the work book
Date of planning: 2/10/2009 Date of teaching: 6a: 6/10/2009
6b: 6/10/2009
6c: 5/10/2009
Unit 3: AT HOME
Period 15: B. NUMBERS (B3,4,5)
1. Objectives:
a. knowledge:
Make questions and talk about things in the classroom/ family.
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c . Behavior:
Student like studying the subject and fell pound of their class and house
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture, chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids.
3. Steps of teaching:
a. Oral test: (3’)
T: call 1s go to the board and ask some questions
Questions:
1) Read some numbers
77, 80, 54, 36, 69, 90, 23…
2) Count the things in the class
Key:
seventy-seven …
1 board, 15 desks …
Other Ss giving the opinions.
T: check and correct
* Warm up: (2’)
T: Ask Ss to retell the form of how many
Ss: Retell
How many + N(s,es) + are there + in …?
There is + N
There are N(s,es)
T: Today we will practice with how many question
d. New lesson: (37’)
Teacher and student’s active.
Contents.
T: retell the question with how many
Ss: listen and copy
T: Read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Ask Ss to give some example
Ss: give example
How many doors are there ?
There is 1 door.
How many windows are there ?
There are 3 windows.
T: Ask Ss practice with a partner ask and answer things in the class with how namy
Ss: Practice in pairs
S1: How many windows are there ?
S2: there are 2
Etc …
T: Check and correct
T: Request the Ss count the amount of the things on the picture.
Ss: Practice
T: Ask Ss to put the sentences with the structure :
How many...
Ss: Practice
S1: How many teachers are there in the class?
S2: There is one.
S3: How many students are there in my class?
S4: There are 34.
17’
10’
10’
1.Câu hỏi về số lượng.
- How many + N + are there?
Dùng để hỏi có bao nhiêu cái gỡ (ở đâu.)
There is and there are…cú
There is + a/an + N(dt số ớt)
There are N(s,es) dt số nhiều
There is / there are + N
Example:
- How many doors are there ?
There is 1 door.
- How many windows are there ?
There are 3 windows.
2. Practice:
How many...... are there?
There is / there are...
3. Further Practice:
1. Couch; 2. Armchairs Etc…
- How/ teacher/ our class?
-there/ one.
- How/ student/ your/ class?
There / 34.
Etc…
c. Summery: (2’)
T: retell the contents of the lesson
T: Ask some Ss to practice infront of the class.
- Check grammar and pronunciation of phlural nouns.
- Write some sentences to discribe their house and classroom.
- Guide the Ss to do ex
d. Guide to do Home work:(1’)
- Learn the lesson.
- Prepare new lesson.
- Do exercise in the work book
Date of planning: 3/10/2009 Date of teaching: 6a: 7/10/2009
6b: 6/10/2009
6c: 7/10/2009
Unit 3: AT HOME
Period 16: C. FAMILIES
1. Objectives:
a. knowledge:
Make questions and talk about the family.( name, age, job).
Possessive adjective: My, your, his, her, our their.
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c . Behavior:
Student like studying the subject and fell pound of their families
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture, chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids.
3. Steps of teaching:
a. Oral test: (3’)
T: call 1s go to the board and ask some questions
Questions:
Says about Ba’s family.
Key:
There are 4 people in Ba’s family. this this his father, he is a teacher…
Other Ss giving the opinions.
T: check and correct
* Warm up: (2’)
T: This is a family to day we will learn a lesson about the family.( name, age, job).
members in a family
b. New lesson: (37’)
Teacher and student’s active.
Contents
T: Ask the Ss look at the book and listen to the radio.
T: Open the tape or T reads
T uses pictures to introduce the new words
Who always repairs machine ?
Who always take care of sick people ?
Guide studenst read new words
T: Read the new words
Ss: Look, listen and repeat.
T: Call the Ss read the text.
Ss: Read
T: Introduce the structures asking and answering about one’s job
Eg : She is a nurse
He is an engineer
We are students
What do you do ? – I’m a student
What does she do ? – she is a nurse
Get students give example
Ss: give example
T: Ask Ss to read the passage
Some Ss read before the class
T: Ask Ss to read again then complete the table
Ss: Read again then complete the table
T: Ask students to read insilent (twice) and then answer the questions
Ss: work in pair or in group
T: Control and give out the correct answers
T: Request the Ss use the information about Song’s family.
T: Ask about song’s family.
How old is Song?
Who is this?( Point the picture)....
Ss: practice to write about Song’s family
T: Check and correct
Let students ask and answer about your family
S1 come board and answer classmate’s questions
Ss: What is your name
S1: My name is An
Ss: How many people are there in your family ?
S1: There are 4 people in my family
Ss: What is your mother name ?
S1: My mother name is Anh
Ss: What is your father name ?
S1: His name is Hung
Do the same
T: Check and correct
20’
10’
7’
1. Family
a. Newwords:
Engineer: Kỹ sư
Doctor: bỏc sĩ
Nure: y tỏ.
b. Grammar:
* Structures
Ask and answer about one’s job
What do /does + S + do ?
What does he/she do? Hỏi về nghề nghiệp
S + is /are am + (a/an) +N(jobs)
Note :
S ( I) – am
S (you ,we they ) – are
S ( he, she ,it ) – is
Dùng trợ động từ
Do cho cỏc chủ ngữ : I / you /we/ they
Does cho cỏc chủ ngữ : he ,she. it
Where: Ở đõu
Where are they?
c. Complete the table
Old
jobs
Father
Mother
Brother
Lan
11
A students
d. Answer the questions
There are 4.
He’s forty.
He’s an engineer.
She’s thirty- five.
She’s a teacher.
He’s eight.
He’s a student.
They are in their living room.
2. Song’s family.
There are 4 people in Song’s family.
His father is a dotor. He’s 40 years old. His mother is a nurse, she’s 35 years old …
3. Futher practice
c. Consolidation:(2’)
Retell about the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do HomeWork: (1’)
Learn the lesson.Write about your family.
Prepare new lesson.
Exercise: 1,2 (23,24).
Date of planning: 9/10/2009 Date of teaching: 6a: 12/10/2009
6b: 13/10/2009
6c: 13/10/2009
Period 17: Grammar practice.
1. Objectives:
a. knowledge:
Verb “tobe” imperative ( commands) , questions – words, greetings and demonstrative pronound , suplly the structures in doing English
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c . Behavior:
Student like studying the subject and use English correctly to do the test
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture, chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids.
3. Steps of teaching:
a. Oral test: (3’)
T: call 1s go to the board and ask some questions
Questions:
Talk about your family
Key:
There are 4 people in my family. this this my father, he is a teacher…
Other Ss giving the opinions.
T: check and correct
* Warm up: (1’)
T: Ask students to remind the form of verb “be”
How many forms does tobe have ?
b. New lesson: (38’)
Teacher and student’s active.
Contents.
T: say about to be
Ss: listen and copy
T: Ask Ss give example
Ss: practice
T: Guide Ss do ex 1, 2, 3
Ss: Do ex
How to use commands?
Who can take out of the form ?
T: Ask students to remind some commands they’ ve learnt
Ss: remind
T: Ask Ss do exercise 4
Ss: Do ex
? What how many used for ?
? Who can take out the structure?
T: Ask students to remind how many question they’ ve learnt
Ss: remind
? Ask and answer the quality of people or things in the pictures
T: Ask Ss do exercise 5
Ss: Do ex in pairs to ask and answer
S1: How many people are there ?
S2: There are three people
S1: How many gooks are there ?
S2: There are six books
T: check and correct
T: Ask students to remind some question words
Ss: remind
T: Ask Ss do exercise 6
Ss: Do ex
T: Ask students to remind
Ss: remind
T: Ask Ss do exercise 7
Ss: Do ex
T: Ask students to remind this/that; these/those
Ss: remind
T: Ask Ss do exercise 9
Ss: Do ex
T: guide Ss do a picture quiz depend on picture in he book
Ss: do ex
10’
5’
5’
5’
3’
3’
7’
1.To be:
To be: Am, is, are: thỡ, là, ở
I am...
we are...
you are...
They are...
He/ she/ it is...
* Form: +) S + tobe + N
?) Tobe + S + N?
Yes. S + tobe / No, S + tobe not
- ) S + tobe not + N
Ex: She is a teacher
Is she a teacher?
Yes, She is / No. She is not
She is not a teacher
Is not = isn’t
Are not = aren’t
* Exercise 1
Am, am, are, is, are
* Exercise 2
Am, is, is, are, are
* Exercise 3
a. Are, am; b. is, is; c. is, isn’t; c. is, is
2. Imperative ( commands).
a. Come ... in
b. sit... down
c. T: Open... book. your
d.close...book. Your
e. Stand... up
3. How many?
How many + Ns + are there?
There is/ are + N.
How many people are there ?
There are three people
4. Questions words
What: Hỏi tên người hoặc vật
Where: Hỏi địa điểm
Who: Hỏi tên người
5. Number
1: one.
2: two.
3: three.....
6. Đại từ chỉ định.
- This = > These.
- That = > those.
is = > are.
7. A picture quiz:
c. Consolidation:(2’)
Retell about the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do HomeWork: (1’)
Learn the lesson.Write about your family.
Preparefor the test.
Do exercise again
Date of planning: 11/10/2009 Date of teaching: 6a: 14/10/2009
6b: 15/10/2009
6c: 15/10/2009
Period 18: A FORTY-FIVE MINUTE TEST
1. Objectives
a. Knowledge:
All the language items from unit 1 to 3
b. Skill:
Reading, listening, writing, language focus
c. Behavior:
Educate students use English correctly to do the test
2. Questions
Class: 6a
A. Listening: Listen and fill in the gap the suitable word
1. There are … in my family
a. 4 b. 5 c. 3 d. six
2. This is … pen
a. Her b. His c. My d. Your
3. ……are in …… living room
a. They/their b. We/our c. I/my d. She/her
4. My father is … years old
a. Fifteen b. Fifty c. Thirty d. Fivety
B. Reading: Read the passage
This is Toan’s family. There are three people in his family: His father, his mother and Toan. His father is a doctor, he is forty-two. His mother is a teacher, she is forty. Toan is a student, he is sixteen.
a. Answer the question
1. How old is Toan?
……………………………………………………………………………….
2. How many people are in his family?
……………………………………………………………………………….
b. Choose the best answer
1. His father is …..............................
a. a doctor b. an engineer c. a teacher d. a student
2. His mother is ……………………
a. Forty-two b. forty c. fourteen d. thirty-five
C. Language focus: Complete the dialogue between Hung and Thanh
Hung : (1) ……………………………………………….?
Thanh: My name is Thanh
Hung : (2) ……………………………………………….?
Thanh: I’m 12 years old
Hung : (3) ……………………………………………….?
Thanh: I live in Bac Yen
Hung : (4) ……………………………………………….?
Thanh: There are 4 people in my family
D. Writing: Write about Linh’s family with suggestions below
This/Linh’sfamily
There/4people/her family
Her father/a doctor
He/40
Her mother/teacher
She/thirty
Class: 6b
A. Listening: Listen and fill in the gap the suitable word
1. There are … in my class
a. 24 b. 25 c. 23 d. 35
2. This is … pen
a. Her b. His c. My d. Your
3. ……are in …… living room
a. They/their b. We/our c. I/my d. She/her
4. My father is … years old
a. Fifteen b. Fifty c. Thirty d. Fivety
B. Reading: Read the passage
This is Toan’s family. There are three people in his family: His father, his mother and Toan. His father is a doctor, he is forty-two. His mother is a teacher, she is forty. Toan is a student, he is sixteen.
a. Answer the question
1. How old is Toan?
……………………………………………………………………………….
2. How many people are in his family?
……………………………………………………………………………….
b. Choose the best answer
1. His father is …..............................
a. a doctor b. an engineer c. a teacher d. a student
2. His mother is ……………………
a. Forty-two b. forty c. fourteen d. thirty-five
C. Language focus: Complete the dialogue between Hung and Thanh
Hung : (1) ……………………………………………….?
Thanh: I’m fine thank
Hung : (2) ……………………………………………….?
Thanh: I’m 13 years old
Hung : (3) ……………………………………………….?
Thanh: This is Lan
Hung : (4) ……………………………………………….?
Thanh: There are 4 people in my family
D. Writing: Write about Linh’s family with suggestions below
This/Loan’s family
There/4people/her family
Her father/a doctor
He/40
Her mother/teacher
She/thirty
Class: 6c
A. Listening: Listen and fill in the gap the suitable word
1. There are … in my class
a. 24 b. 25 c. 23 d. 35
2. This is … pen
a. Her b. His c. My d. Your
3. ……are in …… living room
a. They/their b. We/our c. I/my d. She/her
4. My father is … years old
a. Fifteen b. Fifty c. Thirty d. Fivety
B. Reading: Read the passage
This is Toan’s family. There are three people in his family: His father, his mother and Toan. His father is a doctor, he is forty-two. His mother is a teacher, she is forty. Toan is a student, he is sixteen.
a. Answer the question
1. How old is Toan?
……………………………………………………………………………….
2. How many people are in his family?
……………………………………………………………………………….
b. Choose the best answer
1. His father is …..............................
a. a doctor b. an engineer c. a teacher d. a student
2. His mother is ……………………
a. Forty-two b. forty c. fourteen d. thirty-five
C. Language focus: Complete the dialogue between Hung and Thanh
Hung : (1) ……………………………………………….?
Thanh: I’m a student
Hung : (2) ……………………………………………….?
Thanh: My name is Thanh
Hung : (3) ……………………………………………….?
Thanh: This is my pen
Hung : (4) ……………………………………………….?
Thanh: There are 4 people in my family
D. Writing: Write about Linh’s family with suggestions below
This/Loan’s family
There/4people/her family
Her father/a doctor
He/40
Her mother/teacher
She/thirty
3. Answer and mark guide
Class: 6a
A. Listening: Listen and fill in the gap the suitable word (each correct answer get 0,5 mark )
1. b; 2. a; 3. b; 4. c
B. Reading: Read the passage
a. Answer the question(each correct answer get 1 mark )
1. He is 16
2. There are 3
b. Choose the best answer(each correct answer get 0,5 mark )
1. a; 2.b
C. Language focus: Complete the dialogue between Hung and Thanh
1. What’s your name?
2. How old are you?
3. Where do you live?
4. How many people are there in your family?
D. Writing: Write about Linh’s family with suggestions below
This is Linh’s family. There are 4 people in her family. Her father is a doctor, he is 40. Her mother is a teacher, she is 30
Class: 6b
A. Listening: Listen and fill in the gap the suitable word (each correct answer get 0,5 mark )
1. d; 2. b; 3. b; 4. b
B. Reading: Read the passage
a. Answer the question(each correct answer get 1 mark )
1. He is 16
2. There are 3
b. Choose the best answer(each correct answer get 0,5 mark )
1. a; 2.b
C. Language focus: Complete the dialogue between Hung and Thanh
1. How are you?
2. How old are you?
3. Who is this?
4. How many people are there in your family?
D. Writing: Write about Linh’s family with suggestions below
This is Loan’s family. There are 4 people in her family. Her father is a doctor, he is 40. Her mother is a teacher, she is 30
Class: 6c
A. Listening: Listen and fill in the gap the suitable word (each correct answer get 0,5 mark )
1. d; 2. b; 3. b; 4. b
B. Reading: Read the passage
a. Answer the question(each correct answer get 1 mark )
1. He is 16
2. There are 3
b. Choose the best answer(each correct answer get 0,5 mark )
1. a; 2.b
C. Language focus: Complete the dialogue between Hung and Thanh
1. What do you do?
2. What is your name?
3. What is this?
4. How many people are there in your family?
D. Writing: Write about Linh’s family with suggestions below
This is Loan’s family. There are 4 people in her family. Her father is a doctor, he is 40. Her mother is a teacher, she is 30
4. Comment
* Knowledge:
* Skill:
- Listening:
- Reading:
- Language focus:
- Writing:
Date of planning: 16/10/2009 Date of teaching: 6a: 20/10/2009
6b: 20/10/2009
6c: 19/10/2009
Period 19: CORRECT THE TEST
1. Objectives
a. Knowledge:
Help Ss correct the mistakes in their test, Ss will know mistake and correct them, Ss can get more experiment for next tests
b. Skill:
Reading, listening, writing, language focus
c. Behavior:
Educate students use English correctly and get more experiment for next tests
2. Correction
T: Give test to Ss and get Ss pairs compare
Ss: Compare in pairs
T: Ask Ss go to the boasd to do the 4 questions
Ss: go to do exercise
T: Check and correct
*Keys
Class: 6a
A. Listening: Listen and fill in the gap the suitable word (each correct answer get 0,5 mark )
1. b; 2. a; 3. b; 4. c
B. Reading: Read the passage
a. Answer the question(each correct answer get 1 mark )
1. He is 16
2. There are 3
b. Choose the best answer(each correct answer get 0,5 mark )
1. a; 2.b
C. Language focus: Complete the dialogue between Hung and Thanh
1. What’s your name?
2. How old are you?
3. Where do you live?
4. How many people are there in your family?
D. Writing: Write about Linh’s family with suggestions below
This is Linh’s family. There are 4 people in her family. Her father is a doctor, he is 40. Her mother is a teacher, she is 30
Class: 6b
A. Listening: Listen and fill in the gap the suitable word (each correct answer get 0,5 mark )
1. d; 2. b; 3. b; 4. b
B. Reading: Read the passage
a. Answer the question(each correct answer get 1 mark )
1. He is 16
2. There are 3
b. Choose the best answer(each correct answer get 0,5 mark )
1. a; 2.b
C. Language focus: Complete the dialogue between Hung and Thanh
1. How are you?
2. How old are you?
3. Who is this?
4. How many people are there in your family?
D. Writing: Write about Linh’s family with suggestions below
This is Loan’s family. There are 4 people in her family. Her father is a doctor, he is 40. Her mother is a teacher, she is 30
Class: 6c
A. Listening: Listen and fill in the gap the suitable word (each correct answer get 0,5 mark )
1. d; 2. b; 3. b; 4. b
B. Reading: Read the passage
a. Answer the question(each correct answer get 1 mark )
1. He is 16
2. There are 3
b. Choose the best answer(each correct answer get 0,5 mark )
1. a; 2.b
C. Language focus: Complete the dialogue between Hung and Thanh
1. What do you do?
2. What is your name?
3. What is this?
4. How many people are there in your family?
D. Writing: Write about Linh’s family with suggestions below
This is Loan’s family. There are 4 people in her family. Her father is a doctor, he is 40. Her mother is a teacher, she is 30
3. Guide to do home work
Prepare for unit 4
Date of planning: 17/10/2009 Date of teaching: 6a: 21/10/2009
6b: 22/10/2009
6c: 20/10/2009
Unit 4: Big or small.
Period 20: A.Where is your school? (A1,2)
Objectives:
Knowledge: Reading a description of a school with practice in possessive ‘s’ to talk about possession. Ask and answer about the place, positions, character of a thing.
Skill: listening, speaking, reading, writing.
Behavior: Ss use English in correctly to talk about school
Preparation:
T: Teaching aids, syllabus, board.
Ss: Old lesson, learning aids, copybook.
Procedure:
Oral test: (5’)
* Warm up: T revises the possessive adjective and introduces possession.
Ss listen and tell the pronouns.
I – my; he - his; you - your; she - her; we - our.
New lesson: (35’)
Activities
Contents
T
Ss
T
Ss
T
Ss
T
Ss
T
Ss
T
Ss
T
Ss
T
Ss
T
Ss
T
Ss
T
Ss
T
Ss
T
T
Ss
T
Ss
T
Ss
T
Ss
T
Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to the tape
Listen
Use the picture to introduce the new words.
? How do you think of the two Schools? ( T uses 2 pictures 1 is a small school 1 is a big school)
1 is big and 1 is small.
Read.
Listen and repeat.
Use the picture? Where is the big school?
ở thành phố.
? Where is the small school?
ở vựng nụng thụn.
Read.
Listen and repeat.
Ask some Ss to read before the class.
Read before the class.
Introduce the possessive ‘s’
Listen and copy
Ask Ss to give some egs
Huy’s book
Guide Ss to read the text
Read the text
Ask some Ss to read before the class
Some Ss read before the class
Ask Ss to read the text again then match
Read then match
Check and correct
Remind the ‘Yes, No’ question with to be
Listen
Ask Ss play game lucky numbers
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
2, 3, 7, 10 are lucky numbers
Play game
Is Phong’s school small?
Yes it is
Etc ……
? Where is your school?
It is in the country
It is in the town
Ask Ss to complete the table
Complete the table
Check and correct
10’
15’
10’
I. New words
Big(adj): to
Small(adj): nhỏ
In the city: ở thành phố
In the country: ở nụng thụn
II. Listen and repeat
1. Grammar
* Possessive ‘s’
s’: của
Name’s + N
Eg: Lan’s pen: bỳt của Lan
2. Matching
A. Phong’s school a. Big
B. Thu’s school b. Small
c. In the city
d. In the country
A: b,d
B: a,c
3. Answer the questions
Lucky numbers
a. is Phong’ s school small?
b. is Thu’s school small?
c. where is Phong’s school?
d. is Thu’s school in the country?
Etc
III. Practice
1. Talk about you school
In the town: ở thị trấn
Where is your school?
It’s in the town
Is’s big or small?
It’s small
2. Complete the table
Name
Where
Big or Small
Thu
Phong
You
Summary: (3’)
- T retells the content of the lesson.
- The possessive with ’S’
d. Guide to do Homework: (2’)
- learn the lesson. Write about your school
- Prepare new lesson
Date of planning: 23/10/2009 Date of teaching: 6a: 27/10/2009
6b: 27/10/2009
6c: 26/10/2009
Unit 4: Big or small.
Period 21: A.Where is your school? (A3, 4)
Objectives:
Knowledge:
Reading a description of a school Ask and answer about amount of a thing.
How many
b. Skill:
listening, speaking, reading, writing.
Behavior:
Ss use English in correctly to talk about school
Preparation:
T: Teaching aids, syllabus, board.
Ss: Old lesson, learning aids, copybook.
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: (4’)
T: call 1s go to the board and ask
Questions:
Where is Phong’s school?
Is it big?
Where is your school?
Is it big?
Key:
1) It’s in the coutry
2) No, it isn’t
3) It’s in the coutry
4) Yes, it is
T: check and correct
* Warm up: (2’)
T: ask Ss to look at the picture in the book
?What is it?
Ss: Look at the book and answer
Ss: Answer by Vietnamese
T: Introduce the lesson
d. New lesson: (35’)
Teacher and student’s active.
Contents.
T: Ask Ss look at the book and read
Ss: Read
Some Ss read before the class
T: Ask Ss read again then answer the questions
Ss: practice in pairs to ask and answer
S1: How many classrooms are there in Phong’s school
S2: There are …..
Etc …
T: Ask Ss look at the tex and complete
Ss: Look at the text and complete.
Ss: Work individual
T: Ask Ss practice answer about your shool
Ss: Practice
T: ask Ss write about your school
Ss: Write
T: Check and correct
20’
15’
I. Read
1. Answer the questions
2. Gap fill:
Phong’ s school is in the ... It is ... there are... classroom. There are....students in the school.
Thu’s school is in the ... It’s ....there are... classroom. There are...students in the school.
II. Practice
My school is in ...
There are...classroom.
There are ...students.
c. Summary: (2’)
- T retells the content of the lesson.
- Ask the Ss amount of the things How many.
d. Guide to do Homework: (2’)
- learn the lesson. Write about your school
- do exercise
- Prepare new lesson
Date of planning: 25/10/2009 Date of teaching: 6a: 28/10/2009
6b: 29/10/2009
6c: 27/10/2009
Unit 4: Big or small.
Period 22: B. My class
1. Objectives:
Knowledge:
Ask and answer about the class, grade Which.
Describe the school.
Practice ordinal numbers.
skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
Behavior:
Help Ss to have a good habit of communication and love their school
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test:(3’).
T: call 1s go to the board and ask
Questions:
1. How many classes are there in your school?
2. How many students are there in your school?
Key:
1. There are 9
2. There are 273 students
T: check and correct
* Warm up: (2’)
T: ask Ss to look at the picture in the book
?What is it?
? How many floors does it have?
Ss: Look at the book and answer
Ss: Answer by Vietnamese
T: Introduce the lesson
T: request some Ss give commend and give mark
b. New lesson: (37’)
Teacher and student’s active.
Contents.
T: Ask the Ss to look at the book and listen to the radio.
T: Open the tape.
Ss: Look at the text listen and repeat.
T: Write the ordinal numbers on the board.
Ss: Write down.
T: Read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Ask the Ss to look at the picture in the book and answer the questions.
? Howmany floors are there in this school?
Ss: There are 3.
? Which floor is the class 6A in?
Ss: It’s on the second floor.
Ss can answer in Vietnamese
T: Ask the Ss to look at the book and find the
new words.
Ss: Find the new words.
T: Call some Ss read the text and translate.
Ss: Read inpairs and translate in to VN.
T: Ask Ss complete the table
Ss: Complete the table
T: Guide Ss do ex in the book
Ss: Do ex
T checks and correct
10’
17’
10’
I. Ordinal number
First, second, third, …
1,2,3....
II. Thu and Phong’s school
1. New words
Grade: Khối
Floor: Tầng
Which grade/ class are you in?
Bạn học khối nào/lớp nào
How many+N+does it have? = How many+N+are there?
It has = there are
2. Complete the table.
Name
Thu.
Phong
You.
Grade.
7.
6.
6.
Class.
7A.
6A.
6.
Classroom floor.
2nd.
1st.
1st.
3. practice.
Hello,...grade...you in?Which/ are
I...in...6. am/grade
Which class are...in? you
I’m in...6A. class.
How many classes...your school have? does
IV. Exercise
c. Summary: (2’)
- T retells the content of the lesson.
- Ask the Ss Ordinal number.
d. Guide to do Homework: (1’)
- learn the lesson. Write about your school
- do exercise
- Prepare new lesson
Date of planning: 27/10/2009 Date of teaching: 6a: 31/10/2009
6b: 30/10/2009
6c: 31/10/2009
Unit 4: Big or small.
Period 23: C. Getting ready for school (C1,2,3)
1. Objectives:
Knowledge:
- Use the simple presentense, positive statements with she, he to talk about habital action
- Ask and answer about time
skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test:(3’).
T: call 1s go to the board and ask
Questions:
Talk about your school
Key:
My school is big, it’s in the town. I’m in grade 6, I’m in class 6a … my class is on the first floor
T: request some Ss give commend and give mark
T: check and correct
* Warm up: (2’)
T: ask Ss to look at the picture in the book
?What is he doing?
Ss: Look at the book and answer
Ss: Answer by Vietnamese
T: Introduce the lesson
New lesson: (37’)
Teacher and students’s .
Contents.
T: Request the Ss look at C1.
T: Open the tape.
Ss: Listen and read.
T: Request the Ss look at C1 and find the new words.
T: Introduce the new words
T: read
Ss: Listen, repeat and write down.
T: In troduce The simple tense
Ss: write down.
T: Ask Ss give example
Ss: give example
S1: What do you do everymorning ?
S2: I get up . then I get dress . I brush my teeth . I wash my face . I have breakfast . I go to school .
S1: What does Ba do every morning ?
S2: Ba gets up . Then he gets dresses
…
S (I/you /we / they) S ( He /she /it )
I get up He gets up
I get dress He gets dresses
I brush my teeth He brushes his teeth
I wash my face He washes his face
I have breakfast He has breakfast
I go to shool He goes to school
Call ps to read these sentences
Compare the verbs conjugated ?
T: Ask the Ss to look at the book and answer the questions about them.
T: Call some Ss read the sentences that they have written.
T: Ask the Ss to look at the book and answer the questions about Ba.
T: Call some Ss read the sentences that they have written.
Ss: Work in pairs do Ex. and role play.
Answer the similar paragraph.
T: Read and correct answers.
Ss: Write 5 sentences begin with:
Every morning he gets up and gets dress........
10’
15’
6’
6’
1. What do you do every morning?
Get up: thưc dậy
Dressed: măc quần áo
Brush the teeth: đánh răng
Wash the face: Rửa mặt
have breakfast: ăn sáng
Go to school: Di học
2. The simple tense
Là những từ chỉ hoạt động của người hoặc vật, sự vật, sự việc.
*Cách chia động từ thường theo các đại từ nhân xưng.
+) I, you, we, they + V + N
Eg: I brush my teeth.
+) She, he, it + V(s,es) + N
Thông thường thêm “s” vào sau đt đối với ngôi thứ 3 số ít
Động từ tận cùng = Ch, sh, x, s + es vào sau ĐT.
Eg: She brushes her teeth.
I brush my teeth.
?) Do I/ we/ you/ they + V...
Does he/ she/ it + V...?
+ Yes, S + do / does.
+ No, S + do/ does + not.
*Eg: What do you do every morning?
I get up.
3. Practice
What do you do every morning?
I get up and get dress after that I brush my teeth and wash my face after that I have breakfast and I Go to school.
4. Practice to write
Every morning he gets up and gets dress after that he brushes his teeth and washes his face after that he has breakfast and at last he Goes to school.
c. Summary: (2’)
- T retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: (1’)
- learn the lesson.
- do exercise
- Prepare new lesson
Date of planning: 30/10/2009 Date of teaching: 6a: 3/11/2009
6b: 3/11/2009
6c: 2/11/2009
Unit 4: Big or small.
Period 24: C. Getting ready for school (C4,5,6)
1. Objectives:
Knowledge:
- Use the simple presentense, positive statements with she, he to talk about habital action
- Ask and answer about time
skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test:(3’).
T: call 1s go to the board and ask
Questions:
What do you do every morning?
Key:
I get up, I get dressed …….
T: request some Ss give commend and give mark
T: check and correct
* Warm up: (2’)
T: ask Ss to look at the picture in the book
?What is this?
Ss: Look at the book and answer
Ss: It’s a clock
T: Introduce the lesson
Today we will learn how to ask and answer about time
New lesson: (37’
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Request the Ss look at C4.
T: Open the tape or T read
Ss: Listen and read.
Request the Ss look at C4 and find the new words.
T: Introduce the new words
Ss: write down.
T: Introduce how to ask and answer about time
Ss: Listen and copy
T: Ask Ss listen and repeat the time in the C5
T: Ask the Ss to look at the book and listen to the tape.
T: Open the tape.
Ss: Look at the book and listen to the tape.
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Shows the picture 2.
?What time is it?
Ss: It is 10.15
? What time is it?
Ss: It is 12.30
T: Ask Ss give example
Ss: Practice in pairs to ask and answer
S1: What time is it?
S2: It’s ten to eight
Etc…
Ss: Work in pairs do Ex. and role play. Answer.
T: Ask the P to Look at the book and read about Ba’s actives
Ss: Read
Some Ss read before the class
T: Ask Ss to read again then answer the questions
T: Ask
Ss: Answer
? What time does Ba get up?
Ss: He gtes up at 6 o’clock.
? What time does Ba have breakfast?
Ss: He has breakfast at ...
T: Ask Ss practice in pairs
Ss: Practice in pairs
T: Read and correct answers.
T: Ask the Ss to look at the book and answer the questions about themselves.
Look at the book, read and answer the questions about you.
Ss: Write their answer in the book
T: Call some Ss read the sentences that they have
written.
Ss: Read aloud the sentences that they have written.
T: Ask Ss practice in pairs to ask and answer
Ss: Practice in pairs
S1: what time do you get up?
S2: I get up at 6.00.
S1: what time do you have breakfast?
S2: I have breakfast at 6.30
S1: what time do you Go to school?
S2: I go to the school at 700.
15’
6’
10’
6’
1.What time is it?
we are late for school:Chỳng mỡnh muộn học
What time is it? Bõy giờ là mấy giờ
Giờ chẵn:
It’s + số giờ + o’clock
e.g. What time is it:
It’s eight o’clock.
Giờ lẻ: Có giờ hơn và giờ kém
Giờ hơn: Có 2 cách
+ Cỏch 1:
It’s + số giờ + số phỳt
e.g. What time is it:
It’s eight thirty.
+ Cỏch 2:
It’s + số phỳt + past + số giờ
e.g. What time is it:
It’s thirty past eight
Giờ kộm:
It’s + số phỳt + to + số giờ
e.g. What time is it:
It’s ten to eight
* Note: a quarter = fifteen: 15’
Half = thirty: 30’
e.g. What time is it:
It’s a quarter to eight
2. Practice
What time is it?
It’s ten o’clock.
3. Read
He gets up at 6 o’clock.
He has breakfast at six thirty.
He Goes to school at seven fifteen.
4. Practice about you.
c. Summary: (2’)
- T retells the content of the lesson.
- The structure about the time.
d. Guide to do Homework: (1’)
- Learn the lesson. Write about yourself ‘ what do you do in the morning’
- Do exercise
- Prepare new lesson
Date of planning: 1/11/2009 Date of teaching: 6a: 4/11/2009
6b: 5/11/2009
6c: 4/11/2009
Unit 5: Things I do
Period 25: A. My day (A1,2)
1. Objectives:
Knowledge:
- Talk about daily routines using the simple tense with he, she, it, I.
skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test:(5’).
T: call 1s go to the board and ask
Questions:
What time do you get up?
What time do you have breakfast?
What time do you go to school?
Key:
I get up at …
T: request some Ss give commend and give mark
T: check and correct
* Warm up: (2’)
T: ask Ss to look at the picture in the book
?What is she doing?
Ss: Look at the book and answer
T: Introduce the lesson
New lesson: (35’
Teacher and student’s active.
Contents.
T: Request the Ss look at the A1.
T: Open the tape.
Ss: Listen and repeat.
T: Request the Ss look at A1 and find the new words.
Ss: Look at A1 and find the newwords.
T: Introduce the newords
Ss: Write down.
T: Call the Ss to read.
Ss: Read
T: Ask Ss read A1 in the book
Ss: Read
T: Ask Ss retell The simple tense
Ss: Retell
T: Write on the board
T: Ask the Ss to look at the book and answer the questions.
Ss: Answer
T: Ask Ss practice in pairs
Ss: Work in pairs to ask and answer
T: Check and correct
20’
15’
1.My day
a. Newwords:
Play: Chơi
Play game: Chơi trũ chơi
Do: Làm
Homework: Bài tập về nhà.
b. Grammar
The simple tense
+) I, you, we, they + V + N
+) She, he, it + V(s,es) + N
Thông thường thêm “s” vào sau đt đối với ngôi thứ 3 số ít
Động từ tận cùng = Ch, sh, x, s + es vào sau ĐT.
Eg: She brushes her teeth.
I brush my teeth.
?) Do I/ we/ you/ they + V...
Does he/ she/ it + V...?
+ Yes, S + do / does.
+ No, S + do/ does + not.
2. Answer the question
She gets up at six.
She Goes to school.
She plays game.
She does her homeWork.
c. Summary: (2’)
- T retells the content of the lesson.
- The structure about the simple tense
d. Guide to do Homework: (1’)
- Learn the lesson. Write about yourself ‘ what do you do every day’
- Do exercise
- Prepare new lesson
Date of planning: 3/11/2009 Date of teaching: 6a: 7/11/2009
6b: 6/11/2009
6c: 7/11/2009
Unit 5: Things I do
Period 26: A. My day (A3,4)
1. Objectives:
Knowledge:
Talk about daily routines using the simple tense with he, she, it, I.
“ Wh” question daily routines.
skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test:(5’).
T: call 1s go to the board and ask
Questions:
What does Nga do every day?
What does Nga do every morning?
What does Nga do every afternoon?
What does Nga do every evening?
Key:
She gets up at …
She goes to school
Etc…
T: request some Ss give commend and give mark
T: check and correct
* Warm up: (2’)
T: ask Ss to look at the picture in the book
?What is she doing?
Ss: Look at the book and answer
T: Introduce the lesson
c. New lesson: (35’)
Teacher and’s actives.
Contents.
T: Request the Ss look at the picture in the book
T: ? What are they doing?
Ss: Answer
T: Introduce the new words
T; Read
Ss: Listen and write down.
T: Read os open the tape
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Ask Ss to read
Ss: Read before the class
T: Ask Ss to read again then answer
Ss: Work in pairs to answer
S1: What does Lan do after school?
S2: She does the housework
Etc…
Others Ss giving the opinions.
T: Correct the answers.
T: Ask
What do you do after school?
Ss: I play game
Etc …
15’
10’
10’
1. What do you do after school?
After school: Sau giờ học
Watch: Xem
House Work: Cụng việc nhà
Listen: Nghe
Listen to music: Nghe nhạc
Read: Đọc
2. Answer the questions
She does the houseWork.
She watch TV.
She read.
She listen to music.
3. Practice
What do you do after school?
I read
c. Summary: (2’)
- T retells the content of the lesson.
- The structure about the simple tense
d. Guide to do Homework: (1’)
- Learn the lesson. Write about yourself ‘ what do you do after school?’
- Do exercise
- Prepare new lesson
Date of planning: 6/11/2009 Date of teaching: 6a: 10/11/2009
6b: 10/11/2009
6c: 9/11/2009
Unit 5: Things I do
Period 27: A. My day (A5,6)
1. Objectives:
Knowledge:
Talk about daily routines using the simple tense with he, she, it, I.
“ Wh” question daily routines.
skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test:(5’).
T: call 1s go to the board and ask
Questions:
What does Lan do after school?
What does Ba do after school?
What does Thu do after school?
What does Nam do after school?
What do you do after school?
Key:
She does the house work
He watches TV
She reads
He listens to music
Etc…
T: request some Ss give commend and give mark
T: check and correct
* Warm up: (2’)
T: ask Ss to look at the picture in the book
?What are they doing?
Ss: Look at the book and answer
T: Introduce the lesson
c. New lesson: (35’
Teacher and’s actives.
Contents.
T: Request the Ss look at the picture in the book
T: ? What are they doing?
Ss: Answer
T: Introduce the new words
T; Read
Ss: Listen and write down.
T: Read os open the tape
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Ask Ss to read
Ss: Read before the class
T: Ask Ss to read
Ss: Work in pairs to read before the class
Others Ss giving the opinions.
T: Correct
T: Remind the short answer with yes/no questions
SS: Listen and coppy
T: Ask Ss to practice the A6 in the book
Ss: Work in pairs to ask and answer
S1: Do you play sport?
S2/ Yes, I do
Etc …
15’
10’
10’
1. Listen and read
Volley ball:
Soccer:
Sport:
2. Answer the questions with Yes/no questions
?) Do I/ we/ you/ they + V...
Does he/ she/ it + V...?
+ Yes, S + do / does.
+ No, S + do/ does + not
Example:
(+) They listen to music.
(?) Do they listen to music?
Yes, they do.
No, they don’t.
(+) She listens to music.
(?) Does she listen to music?
Yes, she does.
3. Practice
c. Summary: (2’)
- T retells the content of the lesson.
- The structure about the simple tense
d. Guide to do Homework: (1’)
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
Date of planning: 7/11/2009 Date of teaching: 6a: 11/11/2009
6b: 12/11/2009
6c: 10/11/2009
Unit 5: Things I do
Period 28: B. My routine (B1,2,3)
1. Objectives:
Knowledge:
Say about the things she usually do everyday.
skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject and want to talk about their routine
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test:(5’).
T: call 1s go to the board and ask
Questions:
What does Lan do after school?
Does Ba play sports after school?
Does Thu read after school?
Does Nam lớten to music after school?
What do you do after school?
Do you play sports?
Key:
She does the house work
No, he desn’t
Yes, she does
Yes, He does
Etc…
T: request some Ss give commend and give mark
T: check and correct
* Warm up: (2’)
T: ask Ss to look at the picture in the book
?What is he doing?
Ss: Look at the book and answer
T: Introduce the lesson
c. New lesson: (35’
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Use pictures to introduce the new words
T: ? What is he doing
Ss: Look at the picture and answer
T: Read the new words
Ss: Listen and repeat
Some Ss read before the class
T: Read the text
T: Guide Ss to read
T: Call each S read each picture.
Ss: Read before the class
T: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss to read again then answer the questions
Ss: Look at the book and answer the questions follow the picture about Ba’s activities.
Ss: Answer
He gets up at six.
Yes, he does.
He gets up at aquater to seven.
Yes, he does.
T: Correct the answers.
T: Ask Ss look at the table in the book then complete
Ss: Complete the table
T: Ask Ss practice in pairs to ask and answer about Ba and themselves
Ss: Practice in pairs
S1: What time does Ba get up?
S2: He gets up at six
Etc…
S3: What time do you get up?
S4: I get up at 5.30
Etc
10’
10’
5’
10’
1. New words
To take a shower: Tắm
Eat breakfast: ăn sáng
From … to….: Từ … đến …
Have lunch: Ăn trưa
Go home: Về nhà
Go to bed: Đi ngủ
2. Answer the questions.
What time does Ba get up?
Does he take a shower?
What time does he get up?
Does he have lunch at 11.30?
3. Complete the table
Start = begin: Bắt đầu
Finish = end: Kết thỳc
ACTION
TIME
Ba
Me
Get up
6.00
Go to school
6.45
Classes start
7.00
Classes end
11.15
Have lunch
11.30
Go home
5.00
Go to bed
10.00
4. Practice
a. What time does Ba get up/go to school/have lunch …..?
b. What time do you get up/go to school/have lunch …..?
c. Summary: (2’)
- T retells the content of the lesson.
T: Ask the Ss to say by heart about their activities in 1 day from morning to night with the time.
d. Guide to do Homework: (1’)
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: 11/11/2009 Date of teaching: 6a: 13/11/2009
6b: 13/11/2009
6c: 14/11/2009
Unit 5: Things I do
Period 29: C. Classes (C1)
1. Objectives:
Knowledge:
- Practice the school subject vocabulary.
- Use have, don’t have to talk about the school time table.
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject and want to talk about their routine
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test:(5’).
T: call 1s go to the board and ask
Questions:
a. What time does Ba get up/go to school/have lunch …..?
b. What time do you get up/go to school/have lunch …..?
Key:
a. He gets up at six
Etc…
b. I get up at 5.30
Etc…
T: request some Ss give commend and give mark
T: check and correct
* Warm up: (2’)
T: Ask Ss to look at the picture in the book
? What is this?
Ss: Look at the book and answer
T: Introduce the lesson
c. New lesson: (35’)
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Introduce Subject at school
Hold the time table and say
? What is this ?
T: Show the book of some subjects and say. It is an English book, It is Math ….
What does it mean ?
T: Giude students read new words (2-3t)
Ss: Read new words
Have students play games names “ slap the board”
Can you predict What the girl and boy are talking about ?
T: Ask students give example
Let students practice in pairs
Ss: Practice in pairs
T: Giude students practice folow
Hang on board a time table
Saturday
Mon day
Tuesday
Time
Geography
Math
History
7.15
History
History
English
8.5
Math
English
Geography
9.5
English
Geography
Literature
10
Literature
11.15
Let Ss do themselves follow these
S1: I don’t have my time table .
What do we have to day ?
S2: We have Geography , History , Math and English .
S1: What time does Geography start ?
S2: It starts at 7.15
S1: What time does History start ?
S2: It starts at 8.5
T: Call some pairs to practice
T: Ask students to do exrcise “ fill in the blanks with suitable words”
Ss: Do exercise
10’
15’
10’
1. Subject at school
Time table : Thời khoỏ biểu
Math: Mụn toỏn
Literature: Văn
History: Sử
Geography: Địa
2. Listen and read
Eg : I have English today
I don’t have English to day
* The negative form of “have”
AE: S + don’t / doesn’t + have +N .?
We don’t have history to day
Practice : Ps work in pairs
3. Futher practice
“ Fill in the blanks with suitable words”
S1: What ……..we have to day ?
S2: ………….. History .
S1: What time ………… it start ?
S2:……….. at 10.15 .
S1: Do we ……… English on Monday ?
S2: No, we …… .
Key: time; we have; does; it start; have; don’t
c. Summary: (2’)
T: retells the content of the lesson.
T: Ask the Ss to say all contents
(+ ) I have I have
(-) I don’t have I haven’t
(? ) Do you have Have you …?
d. Guide to do Homework: (1’)
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: 13/11/2009 Date of teaching: 6a: 17/11/2009
6b: 16/11/2009
6c: 17/11/2009
Unit 5: Things I do
Period 30: C. Classes (C2,3,4)
1. Objectives:
Knowledge:
- Practice the school subject vocabulary.
- Use have, don’t have to talk about the school time table.
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject and want to talk about their routine
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test:(5’).
T: call 1s go to the board and ask
Questions:
a. What time do you go to school ?
b. What time do you have classes start ?
c. What time do you have classes finish ?
d. What do you have on Moday ?
e. What time does English start ?
f. What time does it finish ?
Key:
a. I go to school at …
b. I have classes start at …
etc…
T: request some Ss give commend and give mark
T: check and correct
* Warm up: (2’)
T: Ask Ss to look at the picture in the book
? What is this?
Ss: Look at the book and answer
T: Introduce the lesson
c. New lesson: (35’)
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Present new words through the canlendar
? What day is it?
Ss: Anwer
T: Introduce the days of the week
T: Guide students read new words
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Play the tape ask students to listen and repeat
Ss: Listen and repeat
Ss: Read insilent (one)
T: Call some students stand up and read out
Present new structure
T: Give Model sentences
Let studenst practice with other subjects
Ss: Practice in pairs
S1: When do we have english ?
S2: We have english on Tuesday, Thursday and Saturday
Etc …
Teacher listen and correct their mistakes
T: Ask students look at the diologue then listen and repeat
Ss: Look at the diologue then listen and repeat
Ss: Practice the dialouge in pairs
T: Ask students look at the diologue and answer the questions and let studenst listen and answer
Ss: Listen and answer
Ss: Practice in pairs
S1: When do they have history ?
S2: They have history on Tuesday and Thursday
Etc..
T: Ask Ss practice to ask about their timetable in a week make similar diologue
Ss: Practice in pairs
A : When do we have geography ?
B: We have it on Friday
A: Do we have English on Monday ?
B: No, we doesn’t
Teacher listen and correct their mistakes
15’
10’
10’
1.The days in the week
a. Newworsds
Monday(n): Thứ hai.
Tuesday(n): Thứ 3
Wednesday(n): Thứ 4
Thursday(n): Thứ 5
Friday(n): Thứ 6
Saturday(n): Thứ 7
Sunday(n): Chủ nhật
b. Model sentences
When do we have + subject?
We’ve it on + day in the week.
Does/ do + S + on + ....
Eg : When do we have english ?
We have english on Tuesday, Thursday and Saturday
2. Dialogue
a. When do they have history ?
b. When do they have math ?
c. Do they have math on Thursday?
d. Do they have history on Monday ?
e. Do they have history on Tuesday?
4. Furthe practice
When do we have literature ?
- We have it on Monday, Wednesday and Thursday .
c. Summary: (2’)
T: retells the content of the lesson.
T: Ask the Ss to learn by hart about the days in a week.
d. Guide to do Homework: (1’)
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: 15/11/2009 Date of teaching: 6a: 19/11/2009
6b: 18/11/2009
6c: 19/11/2009
Period 31. Grammar practice
1. Objectives:
a. knowledge:
Verb “tobe” imperative ( commands) , questions – words, greetings and demonstrative pronound , suplly the structures in doing English
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c . Behavior:
Student like studying the subject and use English correctly
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture, chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids.
3. Steps of teaching:
a. Oral test: (3’)
T: call 1s go to the board and ask some questions
Questions:
1. When do you have english ?
2. When do you have math ?
3. When do you have history ?
4. When do you have literature ?
5. When do you have geography ?
Key:
1. We have E in Monday, Thursday and Saturday etc …
Other Ss giving the opinions.
T: check and correct
* Warm up: (1’)
T: Ask students to remind the form of the Present simple
Ss: Retell
b. New lesson: (38’)
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Ask the Ss retell the Present simple
Ss: Retell
T: Write on the board
T: Ask Ss give example
Ss: do
T: Ask Ss practice to do exercise in the work book
Ss: practice to do exercise 1(page 60) in the book
Some Ss go to the board to do ex
T: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss to work in pairs to ask and answer (do ex 6 page 61)
Ss: Work in pairs
S1: What time do you get up?
S2: I get up at 5.45
Etc …
T: Ask Ss to work in pairs to do (ex 7 page 61)
Ss: Work in pairs then compare the result with a partner
Some Ss go to the board to do ex
T: Check and correct
T: Ask the Ss retell the time
Ss: Retell
T: Write on the board
T: Ask Ss give example
Ss: do
T: Ask Ss practice to do exercise in the work book
T: Ask Ss to work in pairs to ask and answer (do ex 2 page 60)
Ss: Work in pairs
S1: What time is it?
S2: It’s 7 o’clock
Etc …
T: Ask the Ss retell the ajectives
Ss: Retell
T: Write on the board
T: Ask Ss practice to do exercise
Ss: Do exercise in pairs
S1: Is your house big?
S2: Yes, it is big / no it is small.
Etc…
T: Ask the Ss retell the question words
Ss: Retell
T: Write on the board
T: Ask Ss practice to do exercise
Ss: Do exercise work in pairs do the exercise.
T: Correct the answers
T: Call some Ss read the sentences that they have written.
T: Ask the Ss retell the question to ask about classes
Ss: Retell
T: Write on the board
T: Ask Ss practice to do exercise
Ss: Do exercise work in pairs do the exercise.
S1: When do you have literature?
S2: I have it on Monday, Wednesday and Friday
Etc…
Other Ss do the same
T: Correct the answers
12’
10’
4’
5’
7’
I. The simple tense
1. Grammar
Là những từ chỉ hoạt động của người hoặc vật, sự vật, sự việc.
*Cách chia động từ thường theo các đại từ nhân xưng.
+) I, you, we, they + V + N
Eg: I brush my teeth.
+) She, he, it + V(s,es) + N
Thông thường thêm “s” vào sau đt đối với ngôi thứ 3 số ít
Động từ tận cùng = Ch, sh, x, s + es vào sau ĐT.
Eg: She brushes her teeth.
I brush my teeth.
?) Do I/ we/ you/ they + V...
Does he/ she/ it + V...?
+ Yes, S + do / does.
+ No, S + do/ does + not.
*Eg: What do you do every morning?
I get up.
2. Exercise 1
a. Get up
get; get; get; gets; get; get
b. have
do, have; have; does, she; has; do, have; have
c. go
do, go; go; do, go; go; does, go; go
d. Wash
do, wash; wash; does, wash; washes
3. Exercise 6
a. I get up at 6
b. I go to school at 6.45
etc…
4. Exercise 7
a. gets b. takes
c. Brushes d. has
e. goes
II. Time
1. Grammar
What time is it? Bõy giờ là mấy giờ
Giờ chẵn:
It’s + số giờ + o’clock
e.g. What time is it:
It’s eight o’clock.
Giờ lẻ: Có giờ hơn và giờ kém
Giờ hơn: Cú 2 cỏch
+ Cỏch 1: It’s + số giờ + số phỳt
e.g. What time is it:
It’s eight thirty.
+ Cỏch 2: It’s + số phỳt + past + số giờ
e.g. What time is it:
It’s thirty past eight
Giờ kộm: It’s + số phỳt + to + số giờ
e.g. What time is it:
It’s ten to eight
* Note: a quarter = fifteen: 15’
Half = thirty: 30’
e.g. What time is it:
It’s a quarter to eight
What time does Ba get up?
He gets up at 6 o’clock.
2. Exercise 2
a. What time is it?
It’s 7 o’clock
b. It’s 7 o’clock
past nine
c. It’s half past four
d. It’s 12 o’clock
e. It’s aquater to two
f. It’s ten to nine
III. Ajectives
Dùng để chỉ T/C , đ đ của người hoặc vật
- Is your house big?
- yes , it is big / no it is small.
- Is your school big ?
- yes , it is big / no it is small
IV. Question words
Where; how; what; who; which; when
Exercise 4
a. where e. which / what
b. how f. which
c. what
d. how
V. Classes
Geography, History, Math and English etc…
When do we have + subject?
We’ve it on + day in the week.
Does/ do + S + on + ....
Eg : When do we have english ?
We have english on Tuesday, Thursday and Saturday
c. Summary: (2’)
T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: (1’)
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: 20/11/2009 Date of teaching: 6a: 24/11/2009
6b: 24/11/2009
6c: 23/11/2009
Unit 6: Places
Period 32: A. Our house (A1,2,3)
1. Objectives:
a. knowledge:
At the end of the lesson students willl be able to describle places and tell about personal information
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c . Behavior:
Student like studying the subject and use English correctly
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture, chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids.
3. Steps of teaching:
a. Oral test: (4’)
* Warm up:
T: Ask students to look at a picture a lake ...
T: Hang a big picture on the board
Present the new words through the picture
- Point at a lake , and say “ it is a lake . What does it mean ? do the same
Ss: Answer
b. New lesson: (38’)
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Introduce the new words
“Near” em cú nhận xột gỡ từ nhà Thuy tới hồ ?
T: Guide students how to read new words
T: Read
Ss: Listen and repeat
Some Ss read the new words before the class
T: Check and correct
T: Ask students to play a game “ What and where”
Ss: Play a game
T: ? What things are near Thuy’s house ?
Use: There is a lake near her house …
? Can you gues what there is in the park ?
Ss: Guess
S1: There is a river near Thuy’s house
There is a hotel near her house
There is a river
S2: There are a flowers, trees …
T: Ask Ss to look at the picture. Play the tape or read the text part A1 page 62 ( twice ). Then ask them to check their prediction
T: Ask Ss to read in chorus ( once )
Ss: Read in chorus
T: Ask Ss read the text
Some students read out
T: Ask studenst to read a gain and answer the questions
Ss: Answer the questions
Ss: Work is pairs to ask and answer
a)
S1: How old is Thuy ?
S2: She is twelve years old
Etc…
T: Ask Ss look at A3 Write to complete the sentences
Ss: Look at A3 Write to complete the sentences
Ss: Work individual to complete
T: Ask Ss to read their write
Some Ss read before the class
T: Use the picture A1.3 to prcatice to ask about names of the things
T: Ask Ss work in pairs to practice
Ss: Work in pairs
S1: What is this / that ?
What are these / those ?
S2: It is a …
They are …
e.g.
S1: Point at the lake “ What is this?”
S2: It is a lake
S1: Point at the trees “ What are these ?
S2: They are trees
Do the same
T: Correct their mistakes of pronuciation
10’
10’
10’
8’
1. New words
Lake (n) : Hồ
River (n); Sụng
Yard (n) Cỏi sõn
Hotel (n): Khỏch sạn
Park (n): Cụng viờn
Rice paddy (n): Cánh đồng lúa
Flower (n): Hoa
Tree (n): Cõy
Near: Gần cạnh
2. Listen and read
b) She is a students
c) Her brother name is Minh
d) He is twenty years old
e) Thuy lives in a house near a lake
f) There is a river , a lake , a hotel , a rice paddy
3. Write then read :
a) Our house has a yard . It is near a rice paddy
b) There is a hotel near the lake
c) There is a river and a hotel
d) There are trees and flowers in the park .
4. Futher practice
What is this / that ? It is a …
What are these / those ? They are...
Notice :
- single N goes with this / that
- Flural N goes with these /those
What is this?
It is a lake
c. Summary: (2’)
T: retells the content of the lesson. Retell all content there + be + N1 + near + N2
d. Guide to do Homework: (1’)
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: 22/11/2009 Date of teaching: 6a: 25/11/2009
6b: 26/11/2009
6c: 24/11/2009
Unit 6: Places
Period 33: A. Our house (A4,5)
1. Objectives:
a. knowledge:
At the end of the lesson students willl be able to describle places and tell about personal information
- Preposition of place.
- Discribe about the place where they live.
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c . Behavior:
Student like studying the subject and use English correctly
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture, chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids.
3. Steps of teaching:
a. Oral test: (4’)
T: Ask Ss go to the board to write the new words
Cỏi hồ.
Khỏch sạn.
Dũng sụng.
Cụng viờn.
Cánh đồng.
Gần.
Ss: Go to the board and write the new words
A lake
A hotel
A river
A park
A Rice paddy
Near
Others S giving the opinions.
T: Correct the answers and give mark
* Warm up: (3)
T: Ask students to play net words write the words concern to the city and the country
Ss: Play net words write the words concern to the city and the country ( Ss can answer in Vietnamese)
* Country * City
- river - park
- rice paddy - flower
- village - restaurant
- yard - hotel
- mountain
- lake
Ss: There are flowers and trees etc…
b. New lesson: (35’)
Teacher and student’s active.
Contents
T: Introduce new word
T: Read the new word
Ss: Listen and repeat
Some Ss read the new word before the class
T: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss to wrork in apairs listen and write the wrords you hear
T: play the tape ( twice times ) then call some students read out
Tape scripts
a. There’s a hotel near the park
b. They live in the country
c. The rice paddy is on the mekong river
T: Let Ss listen the last time.
Ss: Listen and check their answer
T: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss look at pictures in A5 and describle their living places
? Which of these are near your house? There is a hotel near your house
Ss: practice in pair to describe places around the house
Some pairs practice before the class
T: Listen correct their mistakes
T: Ask Ss to decrible your living place
Ss: Describe
T: Help Ss to do then call some Ss to read out
eg : My house is near the the school
It has a yard and a garden
There is a market near my house
There is mountain behind my house
There are trees near my house
10’
15’
10’
1. Listen
Village : làng
The city >< The country
a) hotel
b) country
c) rice paddy, river
2. Write about your place
a) There a Hotel near our house
b) There are trees near our house
c) There is a river near our house
d) There is a lake near our house
e) There is school near our house
f) There is a rice paddy near our house
etc…
3. Futher practice
e.g. My house is near the the school
It has a yard and a garden
There is a market near my house
Etc…
c. Summary: (2’)
T: Retells the content of the lesson
- Retell all content there + be + N1 + near + N2
- The structure: There is, there are.
d. Guide to do Homework: (1’)
Learn the lesson.
Prepare new lesson.
Write the sentences about your house.
Exercise: 3 (32).
Date of planning: 25/11/2009 Date of teaching: 6a: 28/11/2009
6b: 27/11/2009
6c: 28/11/2009
Unit 6: Places
Period 34: B. In the city (B1,2,3)
1. Objectives:
a. knowledge:
At the end of the lesson students willl be able to describle places using town vocabularies and preposition of place. Discribe about the street’s suroundings.
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c . Behavior:
Student like studying the subject and use English correctly
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture, chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids.
3. Steps of teaching:
a. Oral test: (4’)
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer the T’questoins
Ss: Go to the board and answer
Questions:
Decrible your living place
Key:
There is a river near our house
There is a lake near our house
There is school near our house
There is a rice paddy near our house
Etc…
Others S giving the opinions.
T: Correct the answers and give mark
* Warm up: (3)
T: Use the picture about the city and ask
Where is this?
What are these?
Ss: Look at the picture and answer
T: To know more about the city to day we learn this lessson
b. New lesson: (35’)
Teacher and students’s actives
Contents
T: Request the Ss look at the book and ask
? What is this?
Ss: Asnwer in Vietnamese
T: Introduce the new words
T: Read the new words
Ss: Listen and repeat in chorus
Some Ss read before the class
T: Play the tape or read part 1 ( twice). Then ask Ss to read again the text in single
Ss: Read
T: Let studenst answer all questions part B1,2 then ask them to give out their answer then correct
Ss: Answer
T: Ask Ss to make T/F
Ss: Do exercise
Ss: Discuss in groups or in pairs
T: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss look at B2. Let Ss write to complete the sentence then get Ss to read out
Ss: Read B1 again then complete the sentence then Ss to read out
T: Check and correct
T: Ask the Ss to write the words they hear in part B3
T: Open the tape or read
Get students give the answer
Ss: Answer
T: Check and correct
30’
5’
I. Minh’s house.
1. New words
Book store:
store: Cửa hàng
restaurant: Nhà hàng
hospital:
factory:
museum:
temple:
Next to: sỏt cạnh
Neighborhood: Khu vực, hàng xúm
Work(v):
2. Answer true or false
a) F; b) T; c) F
d) T; e) F; f) F
3. Complete the sentenses
a. city
b. restaurant, bookstore, temple
c. hospital
d. house … store
e. factory
II. Listen
a) museum
b) book store
c) river
d) street
c. Summary: (2’)
T: Retells the content of the lesson
The structure: There is, there are.
d. Guide to do Homework: (1’)
Learn the lesson.
Prepare new lesson.
Write the sentences about your neighborhood.
Do exercise in your work book
Date of planning: 27/11/2009 Date of teaching: 6a: 30/11/2009
6b: 30/11/2009
6c: 30/11/2009
Unit 6: Places
Period 35: C. Around the house (C1,2)
1. Objectives:
a. knowledge:
Understant about the way to discribe about the possition of the house, the things around the house.
Preposition of place.
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c . Behavior:
Student like studying the subject and use English correctly
Educate students to have the love of living places
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture, chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids.
3. Steps of teaching:
a. Oral test: (4’)
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer the T’questoins
Ss: Go to the board and write the new words
Questions:
Retell the new words in the last lesson
Key:
Book store: store: restaurant: hospital: factory: museum: temple: Next to: Neighborhood: Work
Others S giving the opinions
T: Correct the answers and give mark
* Warm up: (3)
T: Use the picture about the house T points the things around the house and say ‘look at the picture and tell me where are these thing: Trees; flowers; mountains …
Ss: Look at the picture and answer in Vietnamese
T: To know about the preposition of place day we’ll learn this lessson
b. New lesson: (35’)
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Introduce the new words by showing the place of things in the picture
? Where are the trees?
Ss: Say ‘phớa sau’
T: Say the word ‘phớa sau’ in English then write on the board
Ss: Look, listen and copy
T: Read
Ss: Listen and repeat
Some Ss read before the class
T: Teach other words the same
T: Ask Ss to make sentences with preposition of places
Ss: Make sentences with preposition of places
S1: there is a well next to the house
S2: To the left of the house there is a window
Etc…
T: Open the tape or read the text. Then ask students to repeat
Ss: Listen and repeat
Some Ss read individually
T: Check and correct their pronunciation
T: Give the structure question with where
Ss: Listen and copy
T: Ask Ss give e.g
Ss: give e.g
S1: Where is the well ?
S2: It is to the left of the house
T: Ask Ss to read the text again then answer the questons below
Ss: Read the text again then answer the questons
Ss: Work in pairs to ask and answer
a) S1: Where is the yard ?
S2: It is in front of the house
Other Ss do the same
T: Control, check and correct their mistakes
T: Open the tape or read part C2. Look at these houses and choose which house is whose, Ba, Lan and Tuan
T: Play the tape or read twice then ask Ss to choose
Ss: Listen and choose
T: Call Ss to give out the answer
Ss: Answer
Others Ss giving the opinions.
T: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss to practice speaking. Describle the houses in the picture C1
Ss: Practice speaking.
S1: piont at picture and say “ there is a yard is in front of the house”
S2: Point at picture and say “ There are tall trees behind the house”
Do the same
T: Check and correct their pronunciation
20’
15’
I. Around the house
1. Newwords:
Mountain: Nỳi
A well: giếng
Infront of: Trước, phía trước
To the left: phớa bờn trỏi
To the right: phớa bờn phải
Tall: Cao
Behind: Sau, phớa sau.
e.g. There is a well next to the house
To the left of the board there are windows.
To the right of the board there is a door.
2. Listen and read
Cỏch hỏi cỏi gỡ ở đâu
* Where is + N?
It’s + pre of place + of +N
* Where are + Ns?
They + pre of place + of +N
e.g. Where is the well ?
It is to the left of the house
3. Answer the questions
b) It is to the left of the house
c) They’re behind the tall trees
d) It is to the left of the house
e) They are to the right of the house
f) The house is in front of the tall trees
II. Listen and find the right picture
1. Listen
Ba- A
Lan – A
Tuan –B
2. Practice
There is a yard is in front of the house
Etc…
c. Summary: (2’)
T: Retells the content of the lesson
The structure: There is, there are and the prepositions
d. Guide to do Homework: (1’)
Learn the lesson.
Prepare new lesson.
Write the sentences about your house
Do exercise in your work book
Date of planning: 28/11/2009 Date of teaching: 6a: 2/12/2009
6b: 3/12/2009
6c: 1/12/2009
Unit 6: Places
Period 36: C. Around the house (C3,4)
1. Objectives:
a. knowledge:
Understant about the way to discribe about the possition of the house, the things around the house.
Preposition of place.
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c . Behavior:
Student like studying the subject and use English correctly
Educate students to have the love of living places
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture, chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids.
3. Steps of teaching:
a. Oral test: (4’)
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer the T’questoins
Ss: Go to the board and answer
Questions:
Desrcible the suroundings of your house
Key:
There are the tall trees behind my house …
Others S giving the opinions
T: Correct the answers and give mark
* Warm up: (3)
T: To know more about the preposition of place to day we’ll learn this lessson
b. New lesson: (35’)
Teacher and students ’s actives.
Contents.
T: Use the picture to introduce the new words and the preposition of place
? What is this?
? Where is it?
T: Say the words in English then write on the board
Ss: Look, listen and copy
T: Read
Ss: Listen and repeat
Some Ss read before the class
T: Teach other words the same
T: Open the tape or read the text. Then ask students to repeat
Ss: Listen and repeat
Some Ss read individually
T: Check and correct their pronunciation
T: Ask Ss to do exrcise C4(page 70) use the picture of the text
Ss: Work in pairs to ask and answer questions
S1: Where is the toystore ?
S2: It is between the police station and the bookstore
S1: Where is the restaurant ?
S2: It is opposite the drugstore
S1: Where is the drugstore ?
S2: It is next to the movie theater
Do the same
T: Ask Ss Look at the picture and practice playing the guessing game
Ss: Work in pairs to play the guessing game
S1: It is between the police station and the book store. What is it?
S2: It is the toy store
S1: Yes, that is right
S1: It is next to the movie theater and opposite the restaurant. What is it ?
S2: It is the drugstore
S1: Yes. That is right .
T: Guide Ss practice in pairs to ask and answer questions about themselves
Ss: Practice
S1: What is in front of your house ?
S2: In front of my house there is a big yard .
15’
10’
10’
1. New words
The bakery: Tiệm bỏnh mỡ
The movie theatre:
The drugstore:
Photocopy store:
The police station:
The toystore:
Oppsite: Đối diện.
Between: ở giữa
2. Practice with a partner:
a) Ask and answer questions
Where is the toystore ?
It is between the police station and the bookstore
Etc…
b) Play the guessing game.
+ It is between the police station and the book store. What is it?
It is the toy store
+ It is opposite the movie theatre. What is it?
It’s a police station.
3. Futher practice
a) What is in front of your house ?
b) What is behind your house ?
c) What is to the left of your house ?
d) What is to the right of your house ?
e.g.
S1:What is behind your house ?
S2: There are mountains behind my house .
S1: What is to the left of your house?
S2: To the left of my house, there is a kitchen
S1: What is to the right of your house?
S2: To the right of my house. there is a well .
c. Summary: (2’)
T: Retells the content of the lesson (the preposition of place)
d. Guide to do Homework: (1’)
Learn the lesson; Do exercise in your work book.
Prepare for the text
Date of planning: 1/12/2009 Date of teaching: 6a: 5/12/2009
6b: 4/12/2009
6c: 5/12/2009
Period 37: A FORTY-FIVE MINUTE TEST
1. Objectives
a. Knowledge:
All the language items from unit 4 to 6
b. Skill:
Reading, listening, writing, language focus
c. Behavior:
Educate students use English correctly to do the test
2. Questions
Class: 6a
A, Listening (2ps)
Listen to the passage and tick the best option a, b or c
1.There is ……….. and two windows.
a. a door b. a board c. a pen
2.There is a chair and …….. in my classroom.
a. ten desks b. a table c. a ruler
3. We ………English on Monday, Wednesday and Friday morning
a. has b. have c . live
4. I usually play soccer with my friends ………….school?
a. after b. at c. in
B, Reading (3ps)
Her name is Thu. She is eleven years old. she is in grade six, class 6b. She lives in Bac yen town. She lives in a small house with her father, her mother and her sister, Near her house there is a lake. Behind the house there are tall trees, infronr of the house there is a yard. Every mornig she goes to school at six. In the afternoon she plays volleyball and in the evening she does the homeworks
1, Complete the sentences
a. Her name is …………
b. She lives ………… ……………………… town
c. Near the house there is ……………
d. Every moring she …………………………
2. Answer the questions
a. How old is she?
b. What does Thu do every morning?
C. Language focus (3ps)
1, Reorder these sentences
a, do/ you/ when/ have/ literature?
b, you/ what/ time/ do/ to/ school/ go?
2, Put the verbs in the correct form
1, What time do you (get)………… up? - I get up at 6.00.
2, She (wash)………… her face in the morning.
3, What time does he (have)…………… breakfast?
4, Lan has breakfast at 6.00 and (go)……….. to school at 6.45
D. Writing (2ps)Write about your house
Class: 6b
A, Listening (2ps)
Listen to the passage and tick the best option a, b or c
1.There is ……….. and two windows.
a. a door b. a chair c. a pen
2.There is a chair and …….. in my classroom.
a. ten desks b. a desk c. a ruler
3. We ………English on Monday, Wednesday and Friday morning
a. has b. have c . live
4. I usually play soccer with my friends ………….Sunday
a. on b. at c. in
B, Reading (3ps)
Her name is Thu Ha. She is eleven years old. she is in grade six, class 6b. She lives in the country. She lives in a small house with her father, her mother and her brother, Near her house there is a lake. Behind the house there are tall trees, infronr of the house there is a yard. Every mornig she goes to school at six. In the afternoon she plays volleyball and in the evening she does the homeworks
1, Complete the sentences
a. Her name is …………
b. She lives ………………….father, ……………………………………..
c. Near the house there is ……………
d. Every moring she …………………………
2. Answer the questions
a. How old is she?
b. What does Ha do in the afternoon?
C. Language focus (3ps)
1, Reorder these sentences
a, do/ you/ when/ have/ English?
b, you/ what/ time/ do/ to/ school/ go?
2, Put the verbs in the correct form
1, What time do you (get)………… up? - I get up at 6.00.
2, She (brush)………… her teeth in the morning.
3, What time does he (have)…………… breakfast?
4, Lan has breakfast at 6.00 and (go)……….. to school at 6.45
D. Writing (2ps)Write about your house
Class: 6c
A, Listening (2ps)
Listen to the passage and tick the best option a, b or c
1.There is ……….. and two windows.
a. a door b. a board c. a pen
2.There is a chair and …….. in my classroom.
a. ten desks b. a table c. a ruler
3. We ………English on Monday, Wednesday and Friday morning
a. has b. have c . live
4. I usually play soccer with my friends ………….school?
a. after b. at c. in
B, Reading (3ps)
Her name is Thu. She is eleven years old. she is in grade six, class 6b. She lives in Bac yen town. She lives in a small house with her father, her mother and her sister, Near her house there is a lake. Behind the house there are tall trees, infronr of the house there is a yard. Every mornig she goes to school at six. In the afternoon she plays volleyball and in the evening she does the homeworks
1, Complete the sentences
a. Her name is …………
b. She lives ………… ……………………… town
c. Near the house there is ……………
d. Every moring she …………………………
2. Answer the questions
a. How old is she?
b. What does Thu do every morning?
C. Language focus (3ps)
1, Reorder these sentences
a, do/ you/ when/ have/ literature?
b, you/ what/ time/ do/ to/ school/ go?
2, Put the verbs in the correct form
a, What time do you (get)………… up? - I get up at 6.00.
b, She (wash)………… her face in the morning.
c, What time does he (have)…………… breakfast?
d, Lan has breakfast at 6.00 and (go)……….. to school at 6.45
D. Writing (2ps)Write about your house
3. Answer and mark guide
Class: 6a
A. Listening: (each correct answer get 0,5 mark )
1. a; 2. b; 3. b; 4. a
B. Reading: Read the passage
1. Answer the question(each correct answer get 1 mark )
a. Her name is Thu
b. She lives in Bac yen town
c. Near her house there is a lake
d. Every mornig she goes to school at six
2. Choose the best answer(each correct answer get 0,5 mark )
a. She is eleven years old
b. Every mornig she goes to school at six
C. Language focus:
1, Reorder these sentences (each correct answer get 0,5 mark)
a. when do we have Litterature?
b. what time do you go to school?
2, Put the verbs in the correct form (each correct answer get 0,5 mark)
a. get ; b. washes ; c. have ; d. goes
D. Writing: (2ps)Write about your house
Give mark depend on Ss’s writing
Class: 6b
A. Listening: (each correct answer get 0,5 mark )
1. a; 2. b; 3. b; 4. a
B. Reading: Read the passage
1. Answer the question(each correct answer get 1 mark )
a. Her name is Thu Ha
b. She lives in Bac yen town
c. Near her house there is a lake
d. Every mornig she goes to school at six
2. Choose the best answer(each correct answer get 0,5 mark )
a. She is eleven years old
b. Every mornig she goes to school at six
C. Language focus:
1, Reorder these sentences (each correct answer get 0,5 mark)
a. when do we have English?
b. what time do you go to school?
2, Put the verbs in the correct form (each correct answer get 0,5 mark)
a. get ; b. brushes ; c. have ; d. goes
D. Writing: (2ps)Write about your house
Give mark depend on Ss’s writing
Class: 6c
A. Listening: (each correct answer get 0,5 mark )
1. a; 2. b; 3. b; 4. a
B. Reading: Read the passage
1. Answer the question(each correct answer get 1 mark )
a. Her name is Thu
b. She lives in Bac yen town
c. Near her house there is a lake
d. Every mornig she goes to school at six
2. Choose the best answer(each correct answer get 0,5 mark )
a. She is eleven years old
b. Every mornig she goes to school at six
C. Language focus:
1, Reorder these sentences (each correct answer get 0,5 mark)
a. when do we have Litterature?
b. what time do you go to school?
2, Put the verbs in the correct form (each correct answer get 0,5 mark)
a. get ; b. washes ; c. have ; d. goes
D. Writing: (2ps)Write about your house
Give mark depend on Ss’s writing
4. Comment
* Knowledge:
* Skill:
- Listening:
- Reading:
- Language focus:
- Writing:
Date of planning: ……………. Date of teaching: 6a: ……………….
6b: ……………….
6c: ………………..
Period 38: CORRECT THE TEST
1. Objectives
a. Knowledge:
Help Ss correct the mistakes in their test, Ss will know mistake and correct them, Ss can get more experiment for next tests
b. Skill:
Reading, listening, writing, language focus
c. Behavior:
Educate students use English correctly and get more experiment for next tests
2. Correction
T: Give test to Ss and get Ss pairs compare
Ss: Compare in pairs
T: Ask Ss go to the boasd to do the 4 questions
Ss: go to do exercise
T: Check and correct
*Keys
Class: 6a
A. Listening: (each correct answer get 0,5 mark )
1. a; 2. b; 3. b; 4. a
B. Reading: Read the passage
1. Answer the question(each correct answer get 1 mark )
a. Her name is Thu
b. She lives in Bac yen town
c. Near her house there is a lake
d. Every mornig she goes to school at six
2. Choose the best answer(each correct answer get 0,5 mark )
a. She is eleven years old
b. Every mornig she goes to school at six
C. Language focus:
1, Reorder these sentences (each correct answer get 0,5 mark)
a. when do we have Litterature?
b. what time do you go to school?
2, Put the verbs in the correct form (each correct answer get 0,5 mark)
a. get ; b. washes ; c. have ; d. goes
D. Writing: (2ps)Write about your house
Give mark depend on Ss’s writing
Class: 6b
A. Listening: (each correct answer get 0,5 mark )
1. a; 2. b; 3. b; 4. a
B. Reading: Read the passage
1. Answer the question(each correct answer get 1 mark )
a. Her name is Thu Ha
b. She lives in Bac yen town
c. Near her house there is a lake
d. Every mornig she goes to school at six
2. Choose the best answer(each correct answer get 0,5 mark )
a. She is eleven years old
b. Every mornig she goes to school at six
C. Language focus:
1, Reorder these sentences (each correct answer get 0,5 mark)
a. when do we have English?
b. what time do you go to school?
2, Put the verbs in the correct form (each correct answer get 0,5 mark)
a. get ; b. brushes ; c. have ; d. goes
D. Writing: (2ps)Write about your house
Give mark depend on Ss’s writing
Class: 6c
A. Listening: (each correct answer get 0,5 mark )
1. a; 2. b; 3. b; 4. a
B. Reading: Read the passage
1. Answer the question(each correct answer get 1 mark )
a. Her name is Thu
b. She lives in Bac yen town
c. Near her house there is a lake
d. Every mornig she goes to school at six
2. Choose the best answer(each correct answer get 0,5 mark )
a. She is eleven years old
b. Every mornig she goes to school at six
C. Language focus:
1, Reorder these sentences (each correct answer get 0,5 mark)
a. when do we have Litterature?
b. what time do you go to school?
2, Put the verbs in the correct form (each correct answer get 0,5 mark)
a. get ; b. washes ; c. have ; d. goes
D. Writing: (2ps)Write about your house
Give mark depend on Ss’s writing
3. Home Work
Prepare for unit 4
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 7:YOUR HOUSEPeriod 39: A. Is your house big? (A1,2)
1. Objectives:
a. knowledge:
By the end of the lesson Ss can undersand the conversation make question and answer about things arout the house. Describe the house and it’s surroundings
Structures: review is there …? /are there….?
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c . Behavior:
Student like studying the subject and use English correctly
Educate students to have the love of living places
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture, chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids.
3. Steps of teaching:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer the T’questions
Ss: Go to the board and answer
Questions:
Desrcible the suroundings of your house
Key:
There are the tall trees behind my house …
Others S giving the opinions
T: Correct the answers and give mark
* Warm up: (3)
T: To know more about the things around the house and discribe the house and it’s surroundings
to day we’ll learn this lessson
b. New lesson: (35’)
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Ask the Ss to look at the picture A1
T: Open the tape or read
Ss: Look and listen.
T: Ask ss look at the table then check yes/no by answer some questions
?Is Hoa's house big?
Small?
Old?
?Is there a yard? / well?
?are there fowers?
? are there trees?
Ss: listen check the table
Others Ss giving the opinions.
T: check and correct
T: Ask the Ss to look at the book, listen to the tape.Then find the newwords.
Ss: Listen to the tape.Then find the newwords.
T: Ask the Ss read the letter and choose.
Ss: Work in pairs do the ex.
Others Ss giving the opinions.
T: Correct the answers.
T: Call some pairs read aloud the sentences that they have done.
15’
20’
1, Is your house big?
….big?
….small?
….old?
…a yard?
….awell?
….flouwers?
…..trees?
Yes
v
v
No
v
2. Nga’s letter.
a. Newwords
A gadern: Vườn
Vegetable: Rau
A photo: Tấm ảnh
b. Macth the sentences.
D.
A.
E.
B.
C.
c. Summary: 2’
T: Retells the content of the lesson
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
Learn the lesson
Do exercise in your work book.
Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 7:YOUR HOUSEPeriod 40: A. Is your house big? (A3,4,5)
1. Objectives:
a. knowledge:
By the end of the lesson Ss can undersand the conversation make question and answer about things arout the house. Describe the house and it’s surroundings
Structures: review is there …? /are there….?
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c . Behavior:
Student like studying the subject and use English correctly
Educate students to have the love of living places
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture, chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids.
3. Steps of teaching:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer the T’questions
Ss: Go to the board and answer
Questions:
Desrcible the suroundings of your house
Key:
There are the tall trees behind my house …
Others S giving the opinions
T: Correct the answers and give mark
* Warm up: (3)
T: To know more about the things around the house and discribe the house and it’s surroundings
to day we’ll learn this lessson
b. New lesson: (35’)
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Ask the Ss to look at the picture A3 and ask
? What is this?
Ss: Look, listen and answer
T: Introduce some new words
Ss: Listen and copy
T: Ask practice in pairs to ask and answer
Ss: Practice in pairs
S1: What is that
S2: That is a hotel
S3: What are these?
S4: They are hotels
Etc…
Others Ss giving the opinions.
T: check and correct
T: Ask Ss practice to answer the questions
Ss: Practice in pairs
S1: Is there a hotel near your house?
S2: No there isn’t
Etc….
T: check and correct
T: Ask the Ss to look at the book, listen to the tape choose one of the house (2 times)
Ss: Listen to the tape then choose
T: Ask the Ss read the answer
Ss: Read the answer
Others Ss giving the opinions.
T: Let the Ss listen again to check their answer
T: Correct the answers
20’
15’
1, Practice with a partner
a. New words
A bank:Ngõn hàng
Post office:Bưu diện
Super market: Sieu thi
b. Practice
What is that? It’s a hotel
What are thoes? They are flowers
Is there a lake near your house? Yes there is
Etc….
Any: Nào, tí nào.( Dùng trong câu phủ định).
2. Listen
Key: a
c. Summary: 2’
T: Retells the content of the lesson
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
Learn the lesson
Do exercise in your work book.
Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 7:YOUR HOUSEPeriod 41: B. Town or country? (B1,2,3)
1. Objectives:
a. knowledge:
by the end of the lesson Ss can use more words to describe their house and other's house.
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c . Behavior:
Student like studying the subject and use English correctly
Educate students to have the love of living places
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture, chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids.
3. Steps of teaching:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer the T’questions
Ss: Go to the board and answer
Questions:
Desrcible the suroundings of your house
Key:
There are the tall trees behind my house …
Others S giving the opinions
T: Correct the answers and give mark
* Warm up: (3)
T: have 2 Ss play game slap the board"
Ss: Play game
House old.
garden
Big yard small.
flowers tree
tall well.
b. New lesson: (35’)
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Ask the Ss to look at the picture B1 and ask
? What is this?
Ss: Look, listen and answer
T: Introduce some new words
Ss: Listen and copy
T: Read the new words
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Guide Ss to read the text
Ss: Read
T: check and correct their pronunciation
T: Ask the Ss to choose the right answer
Ss: Answer
Others Ss giving the opinions.
T: Correct the answers
T: Ask Ss to read about Ba then write about Chi’ house
Ss; Write about Chi’ house
Some Ss read their write
T: Check and correct
20’
15’
1, Listen and read
a. New words
An apartment:
A market: Chợ
A zoo: Vườn bach thú
Clinic:
Noisy > < Quite: ồn ào > < yờn tĩnh
b. Practice
Yes. He does
No. He doesn’t
Yes. It’s
No. She doesn’t
No. There aren’t
Yes. It’s
2. Read about Ba then Write about Chi’ house
Chi live in a house in the country
Near her house, there is a river
It is very quite here
c. Summary: 2’
T: Retells the content of the lesson
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
Learn the lesson
Do exercise in your work book.
Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 7:YOUR HOUSEPeriod 42: C. On the move (C1,2,3)
1. Objectives:
a. knowledge:
By the end of the lesson Ss can talk about transposts and ask answer about transposts
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c . Behavior:
Student like studying the subject and use English correctly
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture, chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids.
3. Steps of teaching:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer the T’questions
Ss: Go to the board and answer
Questions:
Desrcible the suroundings of Ba’ house or Chi house
Key:
Chi live in a house in the country
Near her house, there is a river
It is very quite here
Others S giving the opinions
T: Correct the answers and give mark
* Warm up: (3)
T: Ask the Ss to look at the picture and ask
? What kind of this transport?
Ss: Look at the picture and answer in Vietnammese
T: Today we’ll learn about transports
b. New lesson: (35’)
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Ask the Ss to look at the picture C1 and ask ? What is this?
Ss: Look, listen and answer
T: Introduce some new words
Ss: Listen and copy
T: Read the new words
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Guide Ss to read the text
Ss: Read
T: check and correct their pronunciation
T: Introduce the srtucture to ask and answer about transport
Ss: Listen and copy
T: Ask Ss give example
Ss; Give example
T: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss look at the picture in the book to ask and answer about people in the picture
Ss: Practice
S1: How does Thu go to school?
S2: She goes to school by motobike
Etc…
T: Ask Ss look at the picture in C2 practice in pairs to ask and answer about people in the picture
Ss: Practice
S1: How does Ba travel to work?
S2: He travels by bike
Etc…
T; Check and correct
T: Ask Ss Listen and write short answer
Ss: Listen and write
15’
10’
10’
1, Listen and read
a. New words
Bike: xe đạp
Motorbike: xe mỏy
Bus: Xe buýt
Car: Xe hơi
Plane: Mỏy bay
Train: Tàu hoả
b.Grammar
How do/does + S + go/travel to…?
S + go/travel to… + by + transport
Ex: How do you go to school?
I go to school by bike
How does she travel to Hanoi?
She travel by car
c. Practice
How does Lien go to school?
She goes to school by bike
Etc…
2. Listen
How does Ba travel to work?
He travels by bike
3. Listen and write short answer
Ba: By Motorbike.
Lan: By train.
Nam: By bus.
Nga: By bike.
Tuan: By bus.
Mrs Huong: By car.
Mr Ha: By train.
Mrs Chi: Walk = Go on foot.
c. Summary: 2’
T: Retells the content of the lesson
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
Learn the lesson
Do exercise in your work book.
Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 7:YOUR HOUSEPeriod 43: C. On the move (C4,5)
1. Objectives:
a. knowledge:
By the end of the lesson Ss can talk about transposts and ask answer about transposts
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c . Behavior:
Student like studying the subject and use English correctly
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture, chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids.
3. Steps of teaching:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer the T’questions and do ex
Ss: Go to the board and answer
Questions:
a. How do you go to school?
b. How does Mr Hai travel to work?
Exercise:
a. How ...he travel to work?
b. How ... they travle to work?
c. He ... to work by train.
d. I ... to market by bike.
Key:
a. I go to school by bike
b. He travels to work by train
Exercise:
a. does; b. do; c. travels/goes; d. travel/go
Others S giving the opinions
T: Correct the answers and give mark
* Warm up: (3)
T: Ask the Ss to look at the picture and ask
? Who is this?
? How does he go to school?
Ss: Look at the picture and answer
He’s Nam
He walks to school
T: To know more information about him to day we learn this lesson
b. New lesson: (35’)
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Ask the Ss to look at the picture C4 and ask Ss to read the passage in slience to find the new words
Ss: Look, read and find the new words
T: Introduce some new words
Ss: Listen and copy
T: Read the new words
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Ask Ss practice reading
Ss: Read
T: check and correct their pronunciation
T: Ask Ss to answer the questions in pairs
Ss: Answer
S1: What time does Hoang get up?
S2: He gets up at half past five
Etc…
T: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss to write about themselsves depend on passage about Hoang
Ss: Write
T: Ask Ss to read theirs reading
T: Check and correct
20’
15’
I. Listen and read
1. New words
Leave(v): Rời khỏi
So: vỡ vậy, vỡ thế
2. Answer the questions
He gets up at 5.30.
He Goes to school at 6.30.
No he doesn’t.
Yes, he does.
They start at 7.
They end at 11.30.
II. Practice
Hi My name is….I’m a student. I get up at six
Etc…
c. Summary: 2’
T: Retells the content of the lesson
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
Learn the lesson
Do exercise in your work book.
Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 8:OUT AND ABOUTPeriod 44: A. What are you doing? (A1,2,3)
1. Objectives:
a. knowledge:
Talk about the action happening now using present.
Progressive tense with I, He, She.
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c . Behavior:
Student like studying the subject and use English correctly
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture, chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids.
3. Steps of teaching:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer the T’questions
Ss: Go to the board and answer
Questions:
What time do you get up?
What time do you do you go to school?
Do you go to school by motobike?
Do you walk to school?
What time do classes start and end?
Key:
I get up at 6
I go to school at 6.40
No I don’t
Yes I do
They start at 7.00 and end at 11.30
Others S giving the opinions
T: Correct the answers and give mark
* Warm up: (3)
T: Ask the Ss to look at the picture and ask
? What are they doing?
Ss: Look at the picture and answer
b. New lesson: (35’)
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Ask the Ss to look at the picture A1 and ask Ss to read the passage in slience to find the new words
Ss: Look, read and find the new words
T: Introduce some new words
Ss: Listen and copy
T: Read the new words
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Ask Ss practice reading
Ss: Read
T: check and correct their pronunciation
T: Introduce the present progressive tense by compare 2 setences
I ride my bike
I’m riding my bike
Ss: Look at 2 sentences and compare
T: Introduce the present progressive form
Ss: Listen and copy
T: Guide Ss give example
Ss: Give example
Ex: I’m playing video games
She’s playing video games
T: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss look at the A1 practice to ask and answer about people in the book
T: Introduce the form to ask and answer
Ss: Practice
S1: What is she doing?
S2: She is riding her bike
Etc…
T: Ask Ss look at A3 and answer the questions about peopl in the pictures
Ss: Practice in pairs
S1: What are you doing?
S2: I’m doing my homework
Etc…
T: Check and correct
15’
12’
8’
1. Listen and repeat
a. New words
Video games(n): trũ chơi điện tử
Ride(v): cưỡi, đi
Drive(v): Lỏi
Wait for(v): Chờ, đợi
b. Grammar
* Present progressive tense
(+) S + tobe + V-ing
(-) S + tobe + not + V-ing
(?) tobe + S + V-ing?
Yes, S + tobe / No, S + tobe + not
I am + V-ing
She/he/it + is + V-ing
You/we/they + are + V-ing
Usage: Thỡ HT tiếp diễn diễn tả hành động đang diễn ra tại thời điểm nói thường có từ ‘now’ bây giờ; ‘at the moment’ ngay lỳc này
Ex: I’m playing video games
He’s playing video games
Note: thông thường ta thêm ing vào sau động từ.
+ Động từ tận cựng cú từ ‘e’ thỡ bỏ ‘e’ thờm ‘ing’. Ex: write → writing
+ Động từ có một vần tận cùng là 1 phụ âm đứng trước 1 nguyên âm ta gấp đôi phụ âm. Ex: Begin → beginning
Run → running
2. Practice
What + tobe + S + doing?
S + tobe + V-ing
Example: a. What is he doing?
He is playing video games
b. What is she doing?
She is riding her bike
3. Answer
a. I’m doing my homework
b. She is riding her bike
c. He is driving his car
d. They are waiting for a bus
c. Summary: 2’
T: Retells the content of the lesson
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
Learn the lesson
Do exercise in your work book.
Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 8:OUT AND ABOUTPeriod 45: A. What are you doing? (A4,5*,6,7)
1. Objectives:
a. knowledge:
Talk about the action happening now using present. Futher practice with progressive tense with I, He, She, you, we, they
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c . Behavior:
Student like studying the subject and use English correctly
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture, chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids.
3. Steps of teaching:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and do ex
Ss: Go to the board and answer
Questions:Complete the sentences using the present progressive tense
I/go/to/school
She/walk/to work
Ba/travel /to/work/by/car
She/have/breakfast
John/brush/his/teeth
Key:
I am going to school
She is walking to school
Ba is traveling to work by car
She is having breakfast
John is brushing his teeth
Others S giving the opinions
T: Correct the answers and give mark
* Warm up: (3)
T: Ask the Ss to look at the picture and ask
? What are they doing?
Ss: Look at the picture and answer
b. New lesson: (35’)
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Ask the Ss to look at the picture A4 and listen the picture they hear
Ss: Look and listen
T: Open the tape or read
Ss: Listen and write
T: Ask Ss look at A6 and remind ‘wh’ questions
Ss: Listen
T: Give model sentence and ask Ss practice
Ss: Practice in pairs
S1: Who is that?
S2: That is Mr. Ha
S1: What does he do?
S2: He is a bussinessman
S1: Where is he going?
S2: He is going to Ha noi
S1: How is he traveling?
S2: He is traveling by plane
Etc…
T: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss to ask and answer about themselves
Ss: Practice in pairs
S1: What are you doing?
S2: I’m reading
Ect…
T: Check and correct
10’
17’
8’
1. Listen and number the picture
1.b; 2.f;3. d; 4.a; 5.c; 6.e
2. Read then ask questions with: Who; What; where; how
Who is that? → That is….
What does she/he do? → She/he is …
Where is she/he going? → She/he going ..
How is she/he traveling? → She/he traveling by …
Bussinessman(n): Thương gia
3. Practice
What are you doing?
What do you do?
Where are you going?
How are you traveling?
c. Summary: 2’
T: Retells the content of the lesson
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
Learn the lesson
Do exercise in your work book.
Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 8:OUT AND ABOUTPeriod 46: B. A truck driver (B1,2)
1. Objectives:
a. knowledge:
Talk about the action happening now using present. Reading a picture story about a truck driver to understand the main idea and delail
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c . Behavior:
Student like studying the subject and use English correctly
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture, chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids.
3. Steps of teaching:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer
Ss: Go to the board and answer
Questions:
a. What are you doing?
b. What do you do?
c. Where are you going?
d. How are you traveling?
Key:
a. I’m ….
b. I’m a student
c. I’m going to ….
d. I’m traveling by ….
Others S giving the opinions
T: Correct the answers and give mark
* Warm up: (3)
T: Ask the Ss to look at the picture and ask
? What is this? (T shows the picture of a truck)
? What is he doing?
Ss: Look at the picture and answer
b. New lesson: (35’)
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Ask the Ss to look at the picture B1 and ask
What does he do?
Ss: Look and answer
T: Introduce the new words
T: Use picture to introduce other new words
Ss: Listen and write
T: Read Ss listen and repeat
T: Check and correct
T: Ask some Ss to read the new words
Ss: Read
T: Guide Ss to read the story
Ss: Read before the class
T: Ask Ss to read carefully then answer the questions
Ss: Answer in pairs
S1: What does Mr. Quang do?
S2: He’s a truck driver
S3: Where is he going at 5 in the morning?
S4: He’s going to a farm
Etc…
T: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss look at B2 and read the dialouge
Ss: Read
T: Explain new word
Ss: Listen and copy
T: Ask practice the dialouge in pairs
Ss: Practice
T: Ask Ss to answer the questions
Ss: Answer in pairs
T: Check and correct
20’
15’
I. A truck driver
1. New words
A truck driver: Người lái xe tải
A farmer(n): Người nông dân
Load > Food stall(n): Quán ăn nhỏ
Arrive(v): Đến
Farm(n): Trang trại
Vegetable(n): Rau
Take(v): Mang, đưa
2. Answer the questions
a. He’s a truck driver
b. He’s going to a farm.
c. A famer is wating for him.
d. He’s taking the vegetable to the market
e. He’s eating breakfast.
f. He’s eating breakfast at a food stall
2. Listen and repeat
Copy(v): Sao, chộp
Correct(v): chữa
Ba is doing his homeWork.
Yes, he is.
No. he isn’t.
Tuan is play soccer.
No, they aren’t.
c. Summary: 2’ T: Retells the content of the lesson
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
Learn the lesson
Do exercise in your work book.
Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 8:OUT AND ABOUT
1. Objectives:
a. knowledge:
Talk about what they are allow to do and not allow to do on the road sign using: can’t and can. Traffic vocabularies
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c . Behavior:
Student like studying the subject and use English correctly
2. Preparations: a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture, chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids.
3. Steps of teaching:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer Ss: Go to the board and answer Questions:
a. What does Mr. Quang do?
b. Where is he going at 5 in the morning?
c. Who is waiting for him?
d. Where is he taking the vegetable?
e. What is he doing at 7 o’clock?
Key:
a. He’s a truck driver
b. He’s going to a farm.
c. A famer is wating for him.
d. He’s taking the vegetable to the market
e. He’s eating breakfast.
Others S giving the opinions
T: Correct the answers and give mark
* Warm up: (3)
T: Ask the Ss to look at the picture and ask
? Who is this?
? What is he doing?
Ss: Look at the picture and answer
T: Today we’ll learn about road signs
b. New lesson: (35’)
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Ask the Ss to look at the picture C1 and ask
What does this man do? Why does he ask the man to stop? What does this sign mean? Ss: Look and answer
T: Introduce the new words
T: Use picture to introduce other new words
(road signs) the same
Ss: Listen and write
T: Read Ss listen and repeat
T: Check and correct
T: Ask some Ss to read the new words
Ss: Read
T: Guide Ss to read the passage
Ss: Read before the class
T: Introduce the modal verbs can and can’t
Ss: Listen and coppy
T: Give ex and ask Ss give Ex
Ss: Give ex
T: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss Look at C2 and add can or can’t
Ss: do ex
Some pairs read aloud the sentences that they have done
Others Ss giving the opinions.
T: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss practice ao answer about road signs
Show the poster of some road signs and ask ss to practice with a friend Ss: Practice in pairs
S1What does this sign say?
S2: It mean: You can park here.
You can’t park
Etc…
T: Call some pairs read aloud the sentences they have done then correct the answers
T: Correct if necessary 15’
7’
13’
1. Road signs
a. New words
Policeman: Cảnh sỏt.
Difficult: Khú.
Sign: Biển bỏo
Oneway: Đương 1 chiều
To park: Đỗ.
To turn left: Rẽ trỏi.
To turn right: Rẽ phải .
To Go a head: Đi thẳng.
b. Can and can’t
Can(v): Cú thể
Can’t(v): Ko thể
+) S + can + V-infi
-) S + can not + V-infi
can not = can’t
Eg. I can ride a motobike
I can’t drive a car
You can park here You can't go into that street 2. What do road signs mean?
a. You can turn left. b. You can’t turn right
c. You can go a head.
d. You can’t ride a motorbike
3. Practice
What does this sign say?
It mean: You can park here.
You can’t park
c. Summary: 2’ T: Retells the content of the lesson
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
Learn the lesson
Do exercise in your work book.
Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 8:OUT AND ABOUT
1. Objectives:
a. knowledge:
Talk about obgation/ prohibition with must/ must not
Traffic vocabularies
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c . Behavior:
Student like studying the subject and use English correctly
2. Preparations: a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture, chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids.
3. Steps of teaching:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer Ss: Go to the board and answer Questions:
Show the poster of some road signs and ask Ss to answer Key:
Oneway
You can park here
You can’t park
Etc…
Others S giving the opinions
T: Correct the answers and give mark
* Warm up: (3)
T: Ask the Ss to look at the picture and ask
? Where is this?
Ss: Look at the picture and answer ‘ngó tư’
T: Today we’ll learn more about road signs
b. New lesson: (35’)
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Ask the Ss to look at the picture C3 and ask in Vietnamese then introduce the new words
?cảnh này ở đâu ?
Ss: Ngó tư
T: in English they say ‘Interection’
? khi đi qua ngó tư khi giao nhau chúng ta thường được cảnh báo gỡ ?
Ss: Nguy hiểm
T: in English they say dangerous
? khi ta tham gia giao thụng mà bất cẩn phóng nhanh vượt ẩu thỡ điều gỡ sẽ sảyra?
Ss: Tai nạn
T: in English they say accident
? khi đén ngó tư , đường giao nhau gặp biển bỏo nguy hiểm ta phải ?
Ss: Đi chậm
T: in English they say slow down > Ss: Look and answer
T: Introduce the new words
T: Use picture to introduce other new words
(road signs) the same
Ss: Listen and write
T: Read Ss listen and repeat
T: Check and correct
T: Ask some Ss to read the new words
Ss: Read
T: Guide Ss to read the passage
Ss: Read before the class
T: Introduce the modal verbs must and must not
Ss: Listen and coppy
T: Ask Ss look at C4 and listen
Ss: listen and nuber the sign
T: Correct if necessary 25’
10’
1. Road signs
a. New words
Interection(n): Ngó tư
Dangerous(adj): Nguy hiểm
Accident(n): Tai nạn
slow down > Stop(v): Dừng lại
b. Must and must not
Must(v): Được phép
must not (v): Ko được phép
+ Yêu cầu ai đó phải làm việc gỡ?
S + must + v
+ yêu cầu ai đó ko được phép làm việc gỡ
S + must not (mustn't) + v…
Eg. You must stop
You must not go ahead
2. Listen
1-c: You can’t turn right here
2-d: There’s a stop sign. I must stop
3-h: You can’t park here
4-a: You must slow down. There’s an intersection
5-g; You can go a head
6-b; we can turn left
7-f: You can’t ride motobike
c. Summary: 2’ T: Retells the content of the lesson
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
Learn the lesson
Do exercise in your work book.
Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
1. Objectives:
a. knowledge:
By the enf of the lesson Ss can consolidate words and forms from U6- U8 do ex well
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c . Behavior:
Student like studying the subject and use English correctly
2. Preparations: a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture, chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids.
3. Steps of teaching:
a. Oral test: 5’
* Warm up: T: Ask the Ss to retell all the grammar structure that they have learn from U6 toU8 Ss: Retell
b. New lesson: 37’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Ask Ss retell the present simple tense
Ss: Retell
T: Write on the board
T: Ask Ss to do ex 1 in the book
Ss: Listen to teacher and do ex in the book
Ss: Work individually to do ex
T: correct their mistakes
T: Ask Ss retell the present progressive tense
Ss: Retell
T: Write on the board
T: Ask Ss to do ex 2 in the book
Ss: Listen to teacher and do ex in the book
Ss: Work individually to do ex
Other Ss give command
T: correct their mistakes
T: Ask Ss to do ex 5 in the book contract present simple tense and present progressive tense
Ss: Listen to teacher and do ex in the book
Ss: Work pairs to do ex
Other Ss give command
T: correct their mistakes
T: Ask Ss retell the prepositions of place
Ss: Retell
T: Write on the board
T: Ask Ss to do ex 3 in the book
Ss: Listen to teacher and do ex in the book
Ss: Work in groups to do ex
Other Ss give command
T: correct their mistakes
T: Ask Ss retell must and must not
Ss: Retell
T: Write on the board
T: Ask Ss to do ex 6 in the book
Ss: Listen to teacher and do ex in the book
Ss: Work individually to do ex
Other Ss give command
T: correct their mistakes
T: Ask Ss retell can and can’t
Ss: Retell
T: Write on the board
T: Ask Ss to do ex 7 in the book
Ss: Listen to teacher and do ex in the book
Ss: Work individually to do ex
Other Ss give command
8’
10’
8’
6’
5’ I. Present simple tense
1. Grammar
+) S (I / you / we/ they) + V
+) She / he / it + V (s/es)
-) I/ you / we / they + do not + V - listen copy.
-) She / he/ it+ does not + V
?)Do + I / you / we / they + V?
Yes, S + do / No, S + do + not
?)Does + she / he / it + V?
Yes, S + does/No, S + does + not
- Thỡ hiện tại đơn diễn đạt thói quen hay hành động thường sảy ra thường lập đi lập lại
2. Practic. Exercise 1 a. go, go
b. travel, travels
c. walk, don’t walk, does …walk, walks
II. Present progressive
1. Grammar
(+) S + tobe + V-ing
(-) S + tobe + not + V-ing
(?) tobe + S + V-ing?
Yes, S + tobe / No, S + tobe + not
I am + V-ing
She/he/it + is + V-ing
You/we/they + are + V-ing
Usage: Thỡ HT tiếp diễn diễn tả hành động đang diễn ra tại thời điểm nói thường có từ ‘now’ bây giờ; ‘at the moment’ ngay lúc này
Ex: I’m playing video games
2. Practice.
*Exercise 2
a. is riding; b. Are waiting; c. Is watching;
d. Are playing; e. Is listening; f. Are walking; g. Is traveling;
*Exercise 5. Contract present simple tense and present progressive tense a. Play, is playing; b. rides, is riding
c. go, are going; d. walk, am walking
e. drives, is driving
III. Prepositions
a. Prepositions of place
to the left of; in; behind; in front of;
to the right of; opposite;
b. Exercise 4
In infront of / behind /opposite / to the right of/ to the left of.
VI. Must and must not
1. Grammar
+ Yêu cầu ai đó phải làm việc gỡ?
S + must + v
+ yêu cầu ai đó ko được phép làm việc gỡ
S + must not (mustn't) + v…
2. Practice
a. must; must not
b. must; must not; must not
c. must; must not
V. Can and can’t
1. Grammar
Can(v): Cú thể
Can’t(v): Ko thể
+) S + can + V-infi
-) S + can not + V-infi
can not = can’t
2. Practice
Can’t; can; can’t
c. Summary: 2’ T: Retells the content of the lesson
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
Learn the lesson
Do exercise in your work book.
Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
1. Objectives:
a. knowledge:
By the end of the lesson Ss can consolidate and prepare well for test of the first term
b. skill:
Language focus, writing, speaking and reading.
c . Behavior:
Student like studying the subject and use English correctly
2. Preparations: a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, board, picture, chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids.
3. Steps of teaching:
a. Oral test: 5’
* Warm up: T: Ask the Ss to retell all the grammar structure that they have learn from unit 1 This/that/these/thoes and tobe
Ss: Retell
b. New lesson: 37’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Ask Ss retell how to use of This/that/these/thoes Ss: Retell
T: Write on the board
T: Ask Ss give example
Ss: Give example
These are my teachers
Are they your teachers?
Yes, they are or No, they are not
T: Ask Ss to do ex
Ss: Listen to teacher and do ex Ss: Work individually to do ex
T: correct their mistakes
T: Ask Ss retell to be
Ss: Retell
T: Write on the board
T: Ask Ss to do ex
Ss: Listen to teacher and do ex
* Exercise 1. Complete the sentences
This/Loan’s family
There/4people/her family
Her father/a doctor
He/40
Her mother/teacher
She/thirty
* Exercise 2. Put am, is, are in the blank
a. I ....... a student
b. They .......... books.
c. He ........ Nam?
d. This ......... my pen
Other Ss give command
T: correct their mistakes
17’
20’
I. This/that/these/thoes
1. Grammar
This: Đây. chỉ vật ở gần
That: Kia. chỉ vật ở xa
These là số nhiều của This
Those là số nhiều của that Usage: Dùng để giới thiệu về người và vật
This/that + is + N/these/thoes+are+N(s;es)
Is + This/that + N?/Are+ these/thoes+N?
Yes. This/that/it + is/ Yes. They are
No. This/that/it +is + not/No. They are not
E.g: This is my teacher
Is this your teacher?
Yes, this is
or No, this isn’t
2. Practic
Exercise 1( page 14, 15)
a. a board
b. a ruler
etc …
Exercise 2( page 15) a. Is this your classroom?
b. Is this your bag?
Etc…
II. To be
1. Grammar
(+) S + tobe + N
(-) S + tobe + not + N
(?) tobe + S +N?
Yes, S + tobe / No, S + tobe + not
Is not = isn’t / Are not = aren’t
I am
She/he/it + is
You/we/they + are
Ex: I’m a student
She is a teacher
Is she a teacher?
Yes, She is / No. She is not
She is not a teacher
2. Practice.
Key: * Exercise 1. Complete the sentences
a. is; b. are, in; c. is; d. is; e. is; f. is
* Exercise 2. Put am, is, are in the blank
a. am; b. are; c. is; d. is
c. Summary: 2’ T: Retells the content of the lesson
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
Learn the lesson
Do again all exercises in your work book.
Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
1. Objectives:
a. knowledge:
By the end of the lesson Ss can consolidate and prepare well for test of the first term
b. skill:
Language focus, writing, speaking and reading.
c . Behavior:
Student like studying the subject and use English correctly
2. Preparations: a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, board, picture, chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids.
3. Steps of teaching:
a. Oral test: 5’
* Warm up: T: Ask the Ss to retell all the grammar structure that they have learn from unit 1 How many and time
Ss: Retell
b. New lesson: 37’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Ask Ss retell how to use of how many Ss: Retell
T: Write on the board
T: Ask Ss give example
Ss: Give example
How many people in your family?
There are 4
T: Ask Ss to practice
Ss: Listen to teacher and practice
T: correct their mistakes
T: Ask Ss retell ask and answer about time
Ss: Retell
T: Write on the board
T: Ask Ss to practice ask and answer about time
Ss: Practice 17’
20’
I. How many
1. Grammar
How many + Ns + are there... ?
There are + Ns.
There is an / an + N
E.g. How many students are there in your class?
There are 34 students in my class.
How many people are there in your family?
There are 4
2. Practice
a. How many people in your family?
b. How many people are there in your class?
II. Time
What time is it? Bõy giờ là mấy giờ
a. Giờ chẵn:
It’s + số giờ + o’clock
e.g. What time is it:
It’s eight o’clock.
b. Giờ lẻ: Có giờ hơn và giờ kém
Giờ hơn: Có 2 cách
+ Cỏch 1:
It’s + số giờ + số phỳt
e.g. What time is it:
It’s eight thirty.
+ Cỏch 2:
It’s + số phỳt + past + số giờ
e.g. What time is it:
It’s thirty past eight
Giờ kộm:
It’s + số phỳt + to + số giờ
e.g. What time is it:
It’s ten to eight
* Note: a quarter = fifteen: 15’
Half = thirty: 30’
e.g. What time is it:
It’s a quarter to eight
What time does Ba get up?
He gets up at 6 o’clock. c. Summary: 2’ T: Retells the content of the lesson
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
Learn the lesson
Do again all exercises in your work book.
Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
1. Objectives:
a. knowledge:
By the end of the lesson Ss can consolidate and prepare well for test of the first term
b. skill:
Language focus, writing, speaking and reading.
c . Behavior:
Student like studying the subject and use English correctly
2. Preparations: a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, board, picture, chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids.
3. Steps of teaching:
a. Oral test: 5’
* Warm up: T: Ask the Ss to retell all the grammar structure that they have learn from unit 1 Ss: Retell
b. New lesson: 37’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Ask Ss retell the present simple tense
Ss: Retell
T: Write on the board
T: Ask Ss to do ex
Exercise: Put the verb in the bracket with suitable form
a. he (go) to school by bike
b. she (walk) to school
c. they (go) to school by bus
d. We ( travel) by train
ss: Do ex
t: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss retell the wh’ questions
Ss: Retell
T: Write on the board
Ss: Listen and copy
T: Ask Ss retell the prepositions of place
Ss: Retell
T: Write on the board
T: Ask Ss describe the things around their house
Ss: Describe
15’
8’
14’
I. Present simple tense
1. Grammar
+) S (I / you / we/ they) + V
+) She / he / it + V (s/es)
-) I/ you / we / they + do not + V - listen copy.
-) She / he/ it+ does not + V
?)Do + I / you / we / they + V?
Yes, S + do / No, S + do + not
?)Does + she / he / it + V?
Yes, S + does/No, S + does + not
- Thỡ hiện tại đơn diễn đạt thói quen hay hành động thường sảy ra thường lập đi lập lại
2. Practice
Key:
a. he goes to school by bike
b. she walks to school
c. they go to school by bus
d. We travel by train
II. ‘Wh’ questions
Where; how; what; who; which; when
III. Prepositions
1. Prepositions of place
to the left of; in; behind; in front of;
to the right of; opposite;
2. Practice
My house is big/small
To the right of the house there is/are….
Etc… c. Summary: 2’ T: Retells the content of the lesson
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
Learn the lesson
Do again all exercises in your work book.
Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
1. Objectives:
a. knowledge:
By the end of the lesson Ss can consolidate and prepare well for test of the first term
b. skill:
Language focus, writing, speaking and reading.
c . Behavior:
Student like studying the subject and use English correctly
2. Preparations: a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, board, picture, chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids.
3. Steps of teaching:
a. Oral test: 5’
* Warm up: T: Ask the Ss to retell all the grammar structure that they have learn from unit 1
Present siple tense; present progressive tense and modal verbs: must, can Ss: Retell
b. New lesson: 37’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Ask Ss retell the present simple tense
Ss: Retell
T: Write on the board
T: Ask Ss to do ex
Ss: Do ex
Mai (be) a student. She(live) in Bac Yen. She(be) 11 years old. Every day she(get) up at 5.30. She (do) morning exercise at 5.45. She(brush) her teeth, (wash) her face and (have) breakfast at 6.30. She(go) to school at 6.45. the classes (start) at 7.00 and (end) at 11.30. She(go) home at 12.00 and (have) lunch at 12.30
T: Check and correct
Exercise: write about Minh's daily activities Activities Time Get up Have breakfast Go to school Play soccer Do home work Go to bed At 6.00 At 6.30 At 7.00 In the afternoon In the evening At 10.00 Minh gets up at 6.00.He has breakfast at 6.30.He goes to school at 7.00.He plays soccer in the afternoon,he does his home work in the T: Ask Ss retell present progressive
Ss: Retell
T: Write on the board
T: Ask Ss to practice to do ex
Ss: Practice Change the sentence from present simple tense to present progressive a. Do you play soccer?
b. She rides her bike
c. we walk to school
d. Does he play video games?
e. They load vegetable
15’
15’
7’ I. I. Present simple tense
1. Grammar
+) S (I / you / we/ they) + V
+) She / he / it + V (s/es)
-) I/ you / we / they + do not + V - listen copy.
-) She / he/ it+ does not + V
?)Do + I / you / we / they + V?
Yes, S + do / No, S + do + not
?)Does + she / he / it + V?
Yes, S + does/No, S + does + not
2. Practice
Is, lives, is, gets, does, brushes, washes, has, goes, start, end, goes, has
II. Present progressive
1. Grammar
(+) S + tobe + V-ing
(-) S + tobe + not + V-ing
(?) tobe + S + V-ing?
Yes, S + tobe / No, S + tobe + not
2. Practice.
Key: a. Are you playing soccer?
b. She is riding her bike
c. We are walking to school d. Is he playing video games?
e. They are loading vegetable
III. Must and can +) S + must / must not (mustn't) + V-infi
+) S + can / can not + V-infi
c. Summary: 2’ T: Retells the content of the lesson
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
Learn the lesson
Do again all exercises in your work book.
Prepare for the first term test
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Period 54. THE FIRST TERM TEST
1. Objectives
a. Knowledge:
All the language items from unit 1 to 8
b. Skill:
Reading, listening, writing, language focus
c. Behavior:
Educate students use English correctly to do the test
2. Questions
A. Listening (2 marks)
Listen and fill in the missing words from the box
In; To the left of; To the right of; in front of; Behind; Opposite Look at the house. A girl is ………. the house. A boy is waiting ……………. The house. There are some mountains ……………. the house and there is a market …………… it. …………….... the house there is a well, …………………. There are trees.
B. Reading (3 marks)
His name is Toan. He is a student. He lives in the city with his parents. Every morning he get up at six and goes to school at 6.45. His house is not near the school so he goes to school by bike.On the street, there is a restaurant, a store, a book store and a zoo. His house is next to a store
I. Answer the questions 1, What is his name?
2, Where does he live?
3, What time does he go to school?
4. How does he go to school?
II. Complete the sentences 1. His house is … …. .… ..…..so he goes to school by bike
2. On the street, there is a…………., ………….., ………….. and ……….
C. Language focus (3 marks)
I. Put the correct form of the words in bracket to complete the following sentences use simple tense 1. I (go) ……….. to school by bike
2. Lan (walk) ………… to school
II. Put the correct form of the words in bracket to complete the following sentences use present progressive tense 1. He …… ……. TV (watch)
2. They …… …….. by plane (travel)
III. Choose a suitable word then put in the blank to complete these questions
What where who how ………… old are you?
………… does she live?
………… is your name?
………… is that?
D. Writing (2ps). Write about your house 3. Answer key and mark guide
Listening (2 marks). Listen and fill in the missing words (2 mark)
In; in front of; Behind; Opposite; To the left of; To the right of;
B Reading I. Read the passage carefully then answer the questions
1. His name is Toan
2. He lives in the city with his parents 3. He goes to school at 6.45 4. He he goes to school by bike
II. Complete the sentences 1. His house is not near the school so he goes to school by bike
2. On the street, there is a restaurant, a store, a book store and a zoo C. Language focus (3 marks) Mỗi câu đúng 0.5 điểm I. Put the correct form of the words in bracket to complete the following sentences use simple tense 1. go ; 2. Walks
II. Put the correct form of the words in bracket to complete the following sentences use present progressive tense
1. is watching 2. are travelling
III. Choose a suitable word then put in the blank to complete these questions
1. how; 2. where; 3. What; 4. who D. Writing (2 marks). Chấm theo bài HS
Vớ dụ: My house is big/small. It’s old. It is in the country/city.
To the lefl of the house there is/are ………
To the right of the house there is/are ………
Behind the house there is/are ………
In front of the house there is/are ………
4. Comment
* Knowledge:
* Skill:
- Listening:
- Reading:
- Language focus:
- Writing:
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 9: The body
1. Objectives:
Knowledge:
Identify parts of the body
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test:5’
* Warm up: T: Show the picture of a man in the book page 96 and ask ss some questions about parts of the body. ?What is that? What are those? Ss: Look at the book and answer
T: Introduce the lesson.Today we will learn about parts of the body
c. New lesson: 37’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Introduce parts of the body by showing picture of a body and ask ? What is this ?
Ss: Observe and answer the questions in Vietnamese
T: Guide Ss to read the new words
Ss: Liten and repeat
T: Ask Ss practice to ask and answer about parts of the body
Ss: Work in pairs do the ex follow the ex.
S1: What are these?
S2: they are his arm
S1: What is that?
S2: It’s his head
Etc…
T: check and correct
T: ask Ss practice about themselves and answer about parts of the body
Ss: Practice in pairs
S1: What are these?
S2: they are my arm
S1: What is that?
S2: It’s my head
Etc…
T: check and correct 15’
12’
10’ 1. Parts of the body
Head: Đầu
Shouder: Vai
Arm: Cỏnh tay
Leg: cẳng chõn
Toe: Ngún chõn
Finger: Ngún tay
Body: Thõn thể
Chest: ngực
Hand: bàn tay
Foot: Bàn chõn → feet số nhiều của foot
2. Practice What is that? It is an his arm.
What are these? They/ These are his toes and fingers.
3. Futher practice
What are these? They are my legs
What is that? That is my arm
c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 9: The body
1. Objectives:
Knowledge:
Adjectives to describe apperance
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer
Ss: G to the board and answer
Question:
Can you name the parts of the body? What are they?
Key:
Head; Shouder; Arm; Leg; Toe; Finger; Chest; Body…..
Others Ss giving the opinions.
T: check and give mark
* Warm up(2’) T: Show the picture of people in A3 and ask ?What do they look like? Ss: Look at the book and answer
T: Introduce the lesson.Today we will learn about adjectives to describe apperance
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Introduce adj to describe people by showing picture of people in page 97 and ask ? What does she/he look like ?
Ss: Observe and answer the questions in Vietnamese
T: Guide Ss to read the new words
Ss: Liten and repeat
T: Ask Ss practice to talk about apearance of a peson
Ss: Work individually
S1: He’s short S2: She is tall
Etc…
T: check and correct
T: Ask Ss look at pictures in A4. Listen and choose the right picture
Ss: Listen and choose the right picture
Tape scrip: a. She is an old woman
b. He is a short man
c. He is a tall young man
d. She is a fat girl
some Ss answer before the class
T: check and correct
T: Ask Ss look at A5 and read the text about 2 people Chi and Tuan
Ss: Read and find the new words
T: Introduce the new words
T: Read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Ask Ss to read the text before the class
Ss: Practice reading
T: Ask Ss to read the dialouge in A6 then discribe Tuan in A5 depend on dialouge to ask and answer about Chi
Ss: Practice in pairs
S1: Who is that?
S2: That is Tuan
S1: What does he do?
S2:………
Etc
10’
5’
5’
8’
7’ 1. Listen and repeat
Thin: Gầy.
Short: Thấp.
Tall: Cao.
Heavy: Nặng cõn.
Fat: Bộo.
Light: Nhẹ cõn.
2. Practice S + tobe + adj
Ex: He’s short I’m fat
3. Listen. Which picture?
1. d; 2. c; 3. b; 4. a
4. Listen and read
Gymnast: Vận động viên thể dục.
Weak > < Strong: Yếu > < Khoẻ.
Wieght lifter: Vận động viên cử tạ
5. Practice
A: Who is that?
B: That is Tuan
A: What does he do?
B:………
Etc
c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 9: The body
1. Objectives:
Knowledge:
Face vocabulary to describe faces
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer
Ss: Go to the board and answer
Question:
Ask and answer about Tuan in A5
Key:
S1: Who is that?
S2: That is Tuan
S1: What does he do?
S2: He is weighlifter
S1: Is he short?
S2: yes he is
Others Ss giving the opinions.
T: check and give mark
* Warm up(2’) T: Show the picture of people in B1 and ask ?What is this ? Ss: Look at the book and answer
T: Introduce the lesson.Today we will learn about vocabulary to describe faces
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Introduce new words by showing picture in page 100 and ask ?What is this?
Ss: Observe and answer the questions in Vietnamese
T: Guide Ss to read the new words
Ss: Liten and repeat
T: Ask Ss to read
Ss: Read before the classs
T: check and correct their pronunciation
T: Guide Ss to practice to ask and answer about appearance by introducing the form
Ss: Listen and copy
T: ask Ss give example
Ss: Give example
S1: I have full lips
S2: He has short hair
Etc…
T: Ask Ss to do ex 1,2(page 85)in workbook
Ss: Do ex in workbook
T: Check and correct 20’
10’
5’
1. Listen and repeat
Face: Khuụn mặt
ear (s): Tai
hair: Túc
eye (s) Mắt.
nose: Mũi.
Mouth: Miệng
lip (s) Mụi.
tooth → teeth Răng.
Around face: Khuụn mặt trũn.
An oval face. Khuụn mặt trỏi xoan
Full lip: Môi đầy đặn.
Thin lip: Mụi mỏng
Long hair: túc dài.
Short hair: túc ngắn
2. Practice S + Have/has + adj + N
Ex: I have a round face
She has long hair
Etc…
3. Exercise
c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 9: The body
1. Objectives:
Knowledge:
Identify color to describe people and things
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer
Ss: Go to the board and answer
Question:
Retell the new words you learnt in last lesson
Key:
Face; ear(s); hair; eye(s); nose; Mouth; lip(s); tooth → teeth; Around face; An oval face; Full lip
Etc…
Others Ss giving the opinions.
T: check and give mark
* Warm up(2’) T: Use picture with color to ask Ss What color is it?
Ss: Look at the picture and answer
T: Introduce the lesson.Today we will learn vocabulary about color
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Introduce new words ?What is this?
Ss: Observe and answer the questions in Vietnamese
T: Write the new words
Ss: Listen and copy
T: Guide Ss to read the new words
Ss: Liten and repeat
T: Ask Ss to read
Ss: Read before the classs
T: check and correct their pronunciation
T: Introduce the form to ask and answer about color
T: Write on the board
Ss: Look, listen and copy
T: Ask Ss to give example
Ss: Give example
Ex: What color is his hair?
It’s brown
What color is his eyes?
They are green Etc…
T: Guide Ss to practice to ask and answer about color of hair and eyes of the picture in B3
Ss: Listen and practice in pairs
S1: What color is her hair?
S2: It’s black
Etc…
T: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss practice to ask and answer about themselves
Ss: practice 20’
15’
1. Color
Black: Đen
Yellow: Vàng
White: Trắng
Grey: Xỏm
Blue: Xanh dương
Red: Đỏ
Brown: Nõu
Green: Xanh lỏ cõy
Purple: Tớm
Orange: Cam
2. Practice What color + is + N?
It’s + color
What color + are + N?
They are + color
Ex: What color is her hair?
It’s black
What color is her eyes?
They are brown + What color is your hair?
It’s black
+ What color is your eyes?
They are brown
Etc… c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 9: The body
1. Objectives:
Knowledge:
Identify color to describe people and things
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer
Ss: Go to the board and answer
Question:
Retell the new words you learnt in last lesson
a. What color is your hair?
b. What color is your eyes?
Key:
Black; white; red …..
a. It’s black
b. They are brown
Others Ss giving the opinions.
T: check and give mark
* Warm up(2’) T: Ask 2 Ss go to the board to play game slap the board( use the words in B1,2) Ss: Play game
T: Introduce the lesson.Today we will practice more about adjectives to describe appearance of a person
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Ask Ss to look in the picture of Chi in the book and describe 5 sentences about Chi
Ss: Describe
She has long black hair.
She is tall.
She has a round face.
Her eye is brown.
She is thin. T: Read the text
Ss: Listen
T; Ask Ss to read the text
Ss: Read
T: Ask some Ss to read before the class
Ss: Read
T: Ask ss look at the questions about Chi in page 102 to ask and answer
Ss: Ask and answer in pairs
S1: Is Miss Chi’s hair long or short?
S2: a. It’s long
Etc…
T: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss look at A5 and listen
T: open the tape or T reads
Ss: Listen and write the letter of the picture
25’
10’
1. Listen and read
a. It’s long
b. her hair is black
c. Her eyes are brown.
d. It is small.
e. They are thin.
2. Listen
Tape transcrip:
1. He has short hair. He has a round face. He has big nose. He has full lips
2. He has short hair. He has an oval face. He has a small nose. He has thin lips
3. She has long hair. She has an oval face. He has a bis nose. She has thin lips
4. She has long hair. She has a round face. She has a small nose. She has full lips
1. c; 2. a; 3. d; 4. b
c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 10: Staying healthy
1. Objectives:
Knowledge:
Talk about feeling.
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer
Ss: Go to the board and answer
Question:
Describe 5 sentences about Chi
Key:
She has long black hair.
She is tall.
She has a round face.
Her eye is brown.
She is thin. Others Ss giving the opinions.
T: check and give mark
* Warm up(2’) T: Ask Ss look at the picture and ask
What are they doing?
How do they feel? Ss: Look and answer
T: Introduce the lesson.Today we learn about the feeling
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Ask Ss to look in the picture of people in the book and introduce the new words
T: Show the picture a and ask
What is he doing?
Ss: Anwer in Vietnamese. Cậu ấy ăn bánh mỡ
T: ? How does he feel?
Ss: Cậu ấy đói
T: Introduce the new word “ hungry”
T: Read and write on the board
T: Guide Ss to read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Introduce other new word the same
Some Ss read before the class
T: Check and correct their pronunciation
T: Introduce the form to ask and asnwer about felling
T: Write on the board
Ss: Listen and copy
T: Ask Ss to give example
Ss: Give example
Ex: How does he feel?
He is/feel hot
Some Ss practice
S1: How does she feel?
S2: She is/feels thirsty
T: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss look at a5 listen and match the name with the right picture
T: Open the tape or T reads
Ss: Listen and check
15’
10’
10’ 1. How do you feel?
Feel: Cảm thấy.
Hungry: Đói.
Thirsty: Khỏt.
Full: No.
Hot: Núng.
Cold: Lạnh.
Tired: Mệt mỏi.
2. Practice
How + do/does + S + feel? S + tobe/feel(s) + adj
Ex: How do you feel?
I am/feel hungry
How does she feel?
She is/feels thirsty
3. Listen
Tape transcrip:
Nhan is hungry. He’d like noodles
Phuong is thirsty. She’d like a drink
Ba is full
Huong is cold
Phuong b; Nhan a; Ba f; Huong d c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 10: Staying healthy
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: Talk about feeling. Talk about the things you want and need.
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer
Ss: Go to the board and answer
Question:
a. How does she feel?
b. How do they feel ?
c. How do you feel?
d. How does he feel?
Key:
a. She is thirsty
b. They are full
c. I’m cold
d. He is hungry
Others Ss giving the opinions.
T: check and give mark
* Warm up(2’) T: Ask Ss look at the picture and ask
Where are they?
What are they doing?
How do they feel? Ss: Look and answer
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Ask Ss to look in the picture of people in the book and answer
T: Introduce the new words
T: Read and write on the board
T: Guide Ss to read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Introduce other new word the same
Some Ss read before the class
T: Check and correct their pronunciation
T: Show the picture a and ask
What are they saying?
Ss: Anwer in Vietnamese.
T: Introduce the form “What would you like?” T: Write on the board
Ss: Listen and copy
T: Ask Ss to give example
Ss: Give example
Ex: What would you like?
I’d like some orange juice
Some Ss practice
S1: How does she feel?
S2: She is/feels thirsty
S1: What would she like?
She’d like some orange juice
Etc…
T: Check and correct
T: Guide Ss to read the dialouge
T reads Ss listen and repeat
T: Ask Ss to read before the class
Some Ss practice reading before the class
T: Listen and check T: Ask Ss look at a5 listen and match the name with the right picture
T: Open the tape or T reads
Ss: Listen and check
T: Ask Ss to read the dialouge again then practice to ask and answer about people in the dialouge
Ss: Practice to ask and answer
S1: How does Nam feel?
S2: He feels hungry
S1: What would he like?
S2: He’d like some noodles
Etc…
T: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss look at A6 listen and repeat
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Ask Ss to make new dialouge depend on the dialouge in the book
Ss: Make new dialouge depend on the dialouge in the book
T: Check and correct
15’
10’
10’ 1. What would you like?
a. New words
Some: Một vài.
Orange juice: Nước cam.
Noodle:
Drink: Uống.
Want: Muốn
Need: Cần
Noodles: Mỡ, phở
b. Grammar
How do/ does + S + feel?
S + be/ Feel + adj.
What would you like? =
What do/ does +S+want?: Muốn, Cần gỡ
S + want/ like/ need + N.
Ex: What would you like? Bạn muốn cỏi gỡ?
I’ d like some noodles: Tôi muốn ăn phở
2. Practice
How does Nam feel?
He feels hungry
What would he like?
He’d like some noodles
Etc…
3. Listen and repeat
a. Mai: What the matter. Nam?
Nam: I’m hot
Mai: What do you want?
Nam: I want a cold drink
b. Lan: What the matter. Na?
Na: I’m hungry
Lan: What do you want?
Na: I want some noodles
c. Linh: What the matter. Tung?
Tung: I’m thirsty
Linh: What do you want?
Tung: I want a drink c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 10: Staying healthy
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: Name of food and drink
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer
Ss: Go to the board and answer
Question:
a. How does she feel?
b. What would she like?
c. Would she like noodles?
d. What would you like?
e. Would you like a drink?
Key:
a. She is thirsty
b. She’d like some orange juice
c. No, she wouldn’t
d. I’d like noodles
e. Yes, I would
Others Ss giving the opinions.
T: check and give mark
* Warm up(2’) T: Ask Ss look at the picture and ask
What are these?
Ss: Look and answer
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Ask Ss to look in the picture in the book and
introduce the new words
T: Read and write on the board
T: Guide Ss to read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Introduce other new word the same
Some Ss read before the class
T: Check and correct their pronunciation
T: Guide Ss to practice
Ss: Practice to ask and answer
S1: What would you like?
S2: I’ d like some oranges
Etc…
T: Listen and check T: Ask Ss look at B2 listen and repeat
Ss: Listen and repeat
Some Ss practice reading before the class
T: Listen and check
T: Introduce “some” and “any”
Ss: Look, listen and copy T: Give example then ask Ss to give example
Ss: Give example
T: Check and correct
T; Ask Ss practice in pair to ask and answer
Ss: Practice
S1: Is there any water?
S2: Yes, there is some water
Etc…
T: Check and correct 15’
10’
10’
1. New words Apple: Quả tỏo.
Orange: Quả cam.
Banana: Quả chuối.
Meat: Thịt.
Water: Nước.
Milk: Sữa.
Vegetable: Rau.
What would you like?
I’ d like some meat
Etc…
2. Listen and repeat
a. Practice
b. Grammar
Some: đứng trước câu khẳng định
Any: đứng trước câu phủ định và cõu hỏi
+ Is there any…?
Yes, there is some…
No, there isn’t any…
+ Are there any…?
Yes, there are some…
No, there aren’t any… 2. Practice
+ Is there any water?
Yes, there is some water
+ Are there any oranges?
No, there aren’t any oranges c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 10: Staying healthy
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: Name of food and drink
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer
Ss: Go to the board and answer
Question:
a. How do you feel?
b. What would you like?
c. Would you like a drink?
d. Are there any apples?
e. Is there any meat?
Key:
a. I’m thirsty
b. I’d like some orange juice
c. Yes. I would
d. No, there aren’t any apples
e. Yes, there is some meat
Others Ss giving the opinions.
T: check and give mark
* Warm up(2’) T: Ask Ss look at the picture and ask
What are these?
Ss: Look and answer
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Ask Ss to look in the picture in the book and
introduce the new words
T: Read and write on the board
T: Guide Ss to read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Introduce other new word the same
Some Ss read before the class
T: Check and correct their pronunciation
T: Guide Ss to practice depend on dialouge in the book
Ss: Practice to ask and answer depend on dialouge in the book
S1: I’m hungry. I’d like some rice. What would you like?
S2: I’m hungry, too. I’d like some chicken
Etc…
T: Listen and check T: Ask Ss look at B5 listen and match the names of the people with what they would like
Ss: Listen and match the names of the people with what they would like
T: Play the tape or read
Ss: Listen and match
T: Call some pairs read aloud the sentences they have done.
Some pairs read aloud the sentences they have done.
T: Check and correct
Keys:
Nhan: Would you like some chicken and some rice
Tuan: Would you like some meat and some vegetables
Huong: Would you like some fruit and some milk
Mai: Would you like some fish and an orange juice
T; Ask Ss practice in pair to ask and answer
Ss: Practice
S1: Is there any water?
S2: Yes, there is some water
Etc…
T: Check and correct 15’
10’
10’
1. New words Fish: Cỏ.
Fruit: Trỏi cõy.
Menu: Thực đơn.
Chicken: thịt gà.
A: I’m hungry. I’d like some bread
What would you like?
B: I’m not hungry, But I’m thirsty I’d like some water
Etc…
2. Listen
Nhan: c,f; Tuan: a,d; Huong: e,g
Mai: b,h
2. Practice
Some: đứng trước câu khẳng định
Any: đứng trước câu phủ định và câu hỏi
+ Is there any…?
Yes, there is some…
No, there isn’t any…
+ Are there any…?
Yes, there are some…
No, there aren’t any… Example: + Is there any water?
Yes, there is some water
+ Are there any oranges?
No, there aren’t any oranges c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 10: Staying healthy
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: Name of food and drink
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer
Ss: Go to the board and answer
Question:
a. How do you feel?
b. What would you like?
c. Would you like a drink?
d. Are there any apples?
e. Is there any meat?
Key:
a. I’m thirsty
b. I’d like some orange juice
c. Yes. I would
d. No, there aren’t any apples
e. Yes, there is some meat
Others Ss giving the opinions.
T: check and give mark
* Warm up(2’) T: Ask Ss look at the picture and ask
What are these?
Ss: Look and answer
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Ask Ss to look in the picture in the book and
introduce the new words
T: Read and write on the board
T: Guide Ss to read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Introduce other new word the same
Some Ss read before the class
T: Check and correct their pronunciation
T: Ask Ss to look at C2 and introduce “What is your favorite food?”
Ss: Listen and copy
T: Guide Ss to practice the dialouge in the book
Ss: Practice to ask and answer depend on dialouge in the book
S1: What is your favorite food?
S2: I like potato
S1: Do you like chicken?
S2: Yes, I do
Etc…
T: Listen and check
T: Ask Ss practice to ask and answer about the food and drink they like or dislike
Ss; Practice
S1: What is your favorite food?
S2: I like fish
S1: What is your favorite drink?
S2: I like apple juice
Etc…
T: Check and correct 15’
10’
10’
1. New word Favorite: Sở thớch
* Vegetables
Carrot: Củ cà rốt
Tomato: Cà chua
Potato: Khoai tõy
Lettuce: Xà lỏch.
Bean: Đậu hà Lan
Pea: Đỗ.
Cabbage: Bắp cải.
Onion: Hành.
* Drink
Ice: Đá lạnh
Lemonade: Nước chanh
Iced tea: Trà đá
Iced coffee; Cà phê đá
Apple juice: Nước táo ép
Soda: Nước sô đa
What are these/thoes?
They are + Ns
2. Listen and repeat
What is your favorite food?
I like + N
Do you like…?
Yes, I do/ No, I don’t
3. Practice
+ What is your favorite food/drink?
+ Do you like…?
Yes, I do/ No, I don’t
+ What do you like? c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 11: What do you eat?
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ss can buy food and drink at a store
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer
Ss: Go to the board and answer
Question:
a. How do you feel?
b. What would you like?
c. What is your favorite food?
d. What is your favorite drink?
e. Do you like chicken?
Key:
a. I’m thirsty
b. I’d like some orange juice
c. I like fish
d. I like apple juice
e. Yes, I do
Others Ss giving the opinions.
T: check and give mark
* Warm up(2’) T: Ask Ss look at the picture and ask
Where are they?
What are these?
Ss: Look and answer
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Ask Ss to look in the picture in the book and
introduce the new words by showing picture and ask
What is this?
Ss: Look and answer
T: Read and write on the board
T: Guide Ss to read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Introduce other new word the same
Some Ss read before the class
T: Check and correct their pronunciation
T: Explain: Khi muốn kết hợp cỏc từ chỉ vật , chứa k/lượng t/lượng các đơn vị đong đo đếm với các dt khác ta để các từ chỉ đơn vị đứng trước và nối với các dt khác bằng giới từ “ of ” < trừ trường hợp a dozen ko có gt đi kèm >
Ex: A kilo of rice
200 grams of beef
T: Have Ss matching
Ss: Matching
T: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss look at pic A1 a and introduce
Vui wants some food and drink she goes to the store. Look at this man. He is a “store keeper”. Can you guess meaning of “storekeeper
Ss: Listen and guess ‘Chủ tệm, người bán hàng’
T: Introduce the new words
Ss: Listen and copy
T: Là người bán hàng gặp khách hàng em nói như thế nào?
Ss: Tụi cú thể giỳp gỡ cho anh/ chị khụng?
T: Write: can i help you?
T: Play the tape A1 or T reads
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Guide Ss to practice the dialouge in the book
T: Ask Ss practice to ask and answer
Ss: Practice to ask and answer depend on dialouge in the book
S1: Can I help you?
S2: Yes, I like a kilo of rice
S1: Here you are
S2: Thank you
Etc…
T: Listen and check
T: Have Ss close the book. Complete this dialogue
Ss: Practice
T: Check and correct 15’
5’
10’
5’
1. New word A bottle of cooking oil: chai, lọ
A packet of tea: 1 gúi chố
A box of chocolates: 1 hộp sụ cụ la
A kilo of rice: 1 cõn gạo
200 gram of beef: 2 lạng thịt bũ
A dozen eegs: một tỏ trứng
A can of peas: 1 hộp, lon đỗ
A bar of soap: 1thanh, thỏi xà phũng
A tube of toothpaste: 1 tuýp kem đánh răng
2. Matching
A bottle toothpaste
A packet beef
A box tea
A kilo eggs
A gram chocolate
A dozen water
3. Listen and repeat
Storekeeper(n): Chủ tệm, người bán hàng Can I help you? Tụi cú thể giỳp gỡ cho anh/ chị khụng?
Here you are: của anh/ chị đây
4. Practice
Complete this dialogue
A: … I help you?
B: … a ….. of …… please.
A: ……………………
B: …………………….
c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 11: What do you eat?
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ss can ask and answer about food and drink they need and want. Talk quantities and prices. Using “How many …?”
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer
Ss: Go to the board and answer
Question:
a. Retell the new words
b. Make dialouge with teacher
Key:
a. A bottle of cooking oil; A kilo of rice; A packet of tea; A box of chocolates etc…
b. T: Can I help you?
S: Yes, I like a kilo of rice
T: Here you are
S: Thank you
Others Ss giving the opinions.
T: check and give mark
* Warm up(2’) T: Ask Ss to play game slap the board
Ss: Play game
T: Ask Ss to look in the picture in the book and ? Where is this?Have Ss say words people often say when they buy food or drink Ss: số lượng, gía cả T: Introduce the lesson
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Ask the Ss to look at the dialouge in the book.
T: Ask the Ss listen to the tape and find the new words, using the picture.
Ss: listen to the tape and find the new words, using the picture.
T: Open the tape or read
Ss: Listen and repeat.
T: Read and write the new words on the board
Ss: Copy and read.
T: Guide Ss to read Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Check and correct their pronunciation
T: Introduce “ How much” and “how many”
Ss: Look listen and copy
T: Ask Ss to give example
Ss: Give example
T: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss look at A2 and practice the dialouge
Ss: Practice
S1: Salegirl
S2: Ba
T: Ask Ss to read the dialouge carefully then answer the questions
Ss: Answer the questions in pairs
T: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss make new dialouge depend on dialouge in the book
Ss: Make new dialouge depend on dialouge in the book
S1: Can I help you?
S2: I need some rice
S1: How much rice do you want?
S2: 5 kilos of rice
S1: Is there any thing else?
S2: Yes. I need some oranges
S1: How many do oranges you want?
S2: One kilo, please.
Etc…
15’
10’
10’
1. At the store a. Newwords
Salegirl = Shopkeeper: Nhõn viờn bỏn hàng.
Is there any thing else?: Cũn gỡ nữa khụng?
b. Grammar
- Danh từ trong tiếng anh được chia làm 2 loại chính: Dt đếm được và dt ko đếm được
Ex: bread, water, coffee, tra, rice, noodle, soap, oil…. Là những dt ko đếm được.
+ Dt ko đếm đc luôn ở số it và khụng dựng với a/an
+ Danh từ đếm đc có 2 dạng: số ít và số nhiều
How much…: Dùng để hỏi số lượng với dt ko đếm đc
How many…: Dùng để hỏi số lượng với dt đếm đc
Ex: + How much beff do you want?
+ how many eggs do you want?
2. Answer the question
a, ba is at the store
b, he wants some beef and eggs
c, he wants 200 grams of beef
d, he wants a dozen eggs
3. Practice
S + want/ need + N.
How much/ many + N ...?
S + want/ need + N.
How much/ many + N ...?
c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 11: What do you eat?
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ss can ask and answer about food and drink they need and want. Talk quantities and prices.
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer
Ss: Go to the board and answer
Question:
Make dialouge with a partner
Key:
S2: Can I help you?
S1: Yes, I like some rice
S2: How much do you want?
S1: 5 kiloes please
S2: 5 kiloes of rice. Is there any thing else?
S1: Yes need some apples
S2: How many do you want?
S1: 3 apples please
S1: Here you are
S2: Thank you
Others Ss giving the opinions.
T: check and give mark
* Warm up(2’) T: Introduce the lesson
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Ask the Ss to look at the picture in the book.
T: Ask the Ss listen to the tape and find the new words, using the picture.
Ss: listen to the tape and find the new words, using the picture.
T: Open the tape or read
Ss: Listen and repeat.
T: Read and write the new words on the board
Ss: Copy and read.
T: Guide Ss to read Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Check and correct their pronunciation
T: Ask Ss to read their answer
T: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss look at A4 and practice the dialouge
Ss: Practice
S1: Mom
S2:Nam
T: Ask Ss to read the dialouge carefully then write the shopping list
Ss: Write the shopping list
Some Ss write on the board
T: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss make new dialouge depend on dialouge in the book
Ss: Make new dialouge depend on dialouge in the book
S1: Can I help you?
S2: I need some rice
S1: How much rice do you want?
S2: 5 kilos of rice
S1: Is there any thing else?
S2: Yes. I need some oranges
S1: How many do oranges you want?
S2: One kilo, please.
Etc…
10’
15’
10’
1. Listen a. Newwords
Half: Một nửa
A can of coca: Một lon coca
Cookies: bỏnh quy
b. Key
a. Phuong wants a tube of toothpaste.
b. Ly wants a bar of soaf and a box of chocolate.
c. Mai wants a can of soda.
d. Nam wants a packet of cookies
2. Read
A bottle of cooking iold.
Some rice.
Half a kilo of beef.
Half a dozen of eggs.
3. Practice
S + want/ need + N.
How much/ many + N ...?
S + want/ need + N.
How much/ many + N ...?
c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 11: What do you eat?
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ss can ask and answer about food and drink they need and want. Talk quantities and prices.
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer
Ss: Go to the board and answer
Question:
Make dialouge with a partner
Key:
S2: Can I help you?
S1: Yes, I like some rice
S2: How much do you want?
S1: 5 kiloes please
S2: 5 kiloes of rice. Is there any thing else?
S1: Yes need some apples
S2: How many do you want?
S1: 3 apples please
S1: Here you are
S2: Thank you
Others Ss giving the opinions.
T: check and give mark
* Warm up(2’) T: Introduce the lesson
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Ask the Ss to look at the picture in the book.
? What is this?
? What are they?
Ss: Look at picture and call the name of things in the picture
T: Ask the Ss write the name of things in the picture.
Ss: Write
T: Go around the class and correct on the pictures.
T: Ask the Ss look at the picture and read again.
T: Call some Ss read aloud the sentences that they have done.
T: Ask the Ss look at A2 and listen to the tape and find the new words
Ss: listen to the tape and find the new words
T: Open the tape or read
Ss: Listen and repeat.
T: Read and write the new words on the board
Ss: Copy and read.
T: Guide Ss to read Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Check and correct their pronunciation
T: Ask Ss to read their answer
T: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss look at B2 and practice the dialouge
Ss: Practice
S1: Salegirl S2: Lan T: Introduce the new stucture how much Ss: Look listen and copy
T: Ask Ss practice in pairs to ask and answer ? what would you like for breakfast?
Lunch?
Dinner?
I’d like…
S1: what would y like for lurch?
S2: I’d like some rice and some water
T: Ask Ss look at b2 and listen to the tape then number pictures you hear
Ss: listen to the tape then number pictures you hear
T: Check and correct
5’
13’
10’
7’ 1. Write the name of things in the picture.
a. rice; b, noodles; c. meat etc….
2. Listen and Repeat
a. Newwords:
Sandwich:
A glass of lemon juce: 1 ly nước chanh.
b. Grammar
How much are they?
They are + Price.
How much is it?
It is + price.
3. Practice
What would you like for breakfast?
Lunch?
Dinner?
I’d like…
4. Listen E; b; I; c; f; j; h; l
Fish – noodles – orange juice – beef – vegetables – milk – bananas – water c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 11: What do you eat?
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ss can ask and answer about food and drink they need and want. Talk quantities and prices.
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer
Ss: Go to the board and answer
Question:
T: Ask Ss practice in pairs to ask and answer
? what would you like for breakfast?
Lunch?
Dinner?
Key:
I’d like some rice and some water etc…
Others Ss giving the opinions.
T: check and give mark
* Warm up(2’) T: Ask Ss to match
Ss: Match
Abottle of milk
Soda
Water
A kilo of beef
Meat (oranges)
Rice
A doza eggs
Apples
oranges
T: Introduce the lesson c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Ask the Ss to look at the picture in the book.
? What is this?
? What are they?
Ss: Look at picture and call the name of things in the picture ( in Vietnamese) Ss: listen to the tape and find the new words
T: Open the tape or read
Ss: Listen and repeat.
T: Read and write the new words on the board
Ss: Copy and read.
T: Guide Ss to read Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Check and correct their pronunciation
T: Write on board there numbers and read
A hundred : 100
Two hundred : 200
A thousand : 1000
Three thousand : 3000
T: Have Ss guess meaning of “ humdred” “ thousand”
T: Write some example. Have Ss read
Ss: Read
T: Introduce the stucture how much
Ss: Look listen and copy
T: Have Ss point at pic B5 – 121 call name of food or drink and it’s price Ss: Read aloud
A fried rice is 2500
play tape B5 ( 2time)
T: Have Ss look at pictures B5 practice in pair ask and answer about the price
Ss: Practice inpairs
S1: How much is fried rice?
S2: It is two thousand five hundred dong
Etc…
T: Ask Ss practice ask and answer about the price or make similar dialogues as B2 120
a. A kilo of sugar/ 6500đ
b. a dozen eggs/ 1400đ
c. a tube of tod’paste/ 800
d. a bowl of noodle/ 700
Ss: Practice
T: Check and correct 15’
10’
10’ 1. Newwords Fried rice: cơm rang
A bowl of noodle: bát phở
Sandwich:
Cake: bánh ngọt
Ice – cream: kem
400: four hundred
900: nine humdred
1000: a thousand
1500: one thousand five hundred
2200: two thousand two hundred
b. Grammar
How much hỏi giá cả
How much are they? (Danh từ đếm được số nhiều) → They are + Price.
How much is it? (Danh từ không đếm được)
→ It is + price.
Ex: How much is an apple?
How much are 2 eggs?
3. Practice
How much is a cake/
It’s 500d
4. Practice further S1: How much is a kilo of sugar?
S2: It is 65000
c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Period 70: GRAMMAR PRACTICE 1. Objectives:
a. knowledge:
By the End of the lesson Ss can cousolidate vocabulary and structures on topics they have learnt from U9 -> U11
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c . Behavior:
Student like studying the subject and use English correctly
2. Preparations: a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture, chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids.
3. Steps of teaching:
a. Oral test: (3’)
T: call 1s go to the board and ask some questions
Questions:
1. What would you like for breakfast?
Lunch?
Dinner?
2. How much is a bowt of moodle?
A kilo of oranges?
Key:
1. I’d like some…..
2. It’s 15000d……….
T: check and correct
* Warm up: (1’)
T: Ask students to remind the form of the Present simple
Ss: Retell
b. New lesson: (38’)
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Ask the Ss retell the Present simple
Ss: Retell
T: Write on the board
T: Ask Ss give example
Ss: do
T: Ask Ss practice to do exercise in the work book
T: Ask the Ss retell a, an, some, any
Ss: Retell
T: Write on the board
T: Ask Ss give example
Ss: do
T: Ask Ss practice to do exercise in the work book
T: Correct the answers
T: Ask the Ss retell adjectives
Ss: Retell
T: Write on the board
T: Ask Ss give example
Ss: do
T: Ask Ss practice to do exercise in the work book
T: Correct the answers
T: Ask the Ss retell question words
Ss: Retell
T: Write on the board
T: Ask Ss give example
Ss: do
T: Ask Ss practice to do exercise in the work book
T: Correct the answers
T: Have Ss compare present simple and resent progressive tenses T: Ask Ss do ex 5 – 123
some Ss read aloud
T: Correct the answers
10’
8’ 7
6
7’ I. The simple tense
1. Grammar
S + like/ likes S + Don’t/ like…
Doesn’t
Do + S + like…?
Does
Yes, S + do/ does
No, s + don’t/ doesn’t like
2. Exercise 1
a, - like
- like
- do … like
- … I don’t like
b, - does … like
- … likes ….
- … doesn’t like
II. a, an, some, any
1. Grammar
Để nói về số lượng
a, A/ AN : Một ( mạo từ không xác định) đứng trước danh từ số ít đếm được
- A: đanh từ bất đầu = 1 fụ âm : a banana
- AN: trước danh từ bắt đầu = 1 fụ am: an orange
b, Some/ any: 1 vài, 1 chút (tính từ không sác định)
- some: dùng trong câu KĐ
- any: PĐ và câu hỏi
2. Exercise 2
a, - … any …
- … any … some
- …are …
b, - …any …
- … some …
c, - … any …
- … some …
- … a …
III. Ajectives Dùng để chỉ T/C , đ đ của người hoặc vật
Exercise 3
a, short e, full
b, thin f, cold
c, light g, thin
d, strong h, long
IV. Question words Where; how; what; who; which; when
Exercise 4
a, who …
b, what …
c, How…
d, what
e, where V. Contrast: present simple and resent progressive tenses + thì hiện tại đơn: diễn tả hành động lặp đi lặp lại. thói quen hay 1 sự rất hiển nhiên
+ thì hiện đại tiếp diễn: diễn tả hành động đang xẩy ra tại thời điểm nói ( now/ at the moment)
S + tobe + V-ing
Exercise 5
a, … is eating …
b, … are drinking …
c, … is riding …
d, … is going …
e, … is getting …
f, … is traveting …
c. Summary: (2’) T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: (1’)
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: …………………… Period 71: A FORTY - FIVE MINUTE TEST 1. Objectives
a. Knowledge:
All the language items from unit 9 to 11
b. Skill:
Reading, listening, writing, language focus
c. Behavior:
Educate students use English correctly to do the test
2. Questions 45’ I. Listening: Listen and fill in the gap the suitable word(2pts). Nghe và điền vao chỗ trống
Miss Loan is …...and…… She has around face and long…….. hair, she has …….eyes and …. big nose. She has…….lips and …….white teeth. She is………
II. Reading: Read the passage
1. Fill in the blanks with the suitable words (2pts). Điền từ thích hợp vào chỗ trống
Storekeeper : Good morning.(1) ……I help you?
Lan : Yes. I want (2)…….apples, please
Storekeeper : How(3)………. do you want?
Lan : Yes, I’d (4)……half a dozen apples. Do you have(5)…….rice?
Storekeeper : Yes, I have some rice. How(6)………. do you want?
Lan : 10 kilos of rice, please
Storekeeper : Is there anything (7)…………..?
Lan : No, thank. How(8)………..are they?
Storekeeper : Sixty five thousand dong, please
2. Read the passage and answer the question (1pts). Trả lời các câu hỏi sau
a. What does Lan want?
b. How much are they?
III. Language focus:
1. Put a. an, some, any in a suitable blank(1pt). Điền a. an, some, any vào chỗ trống
a. Do you have……beef?
b. She wants………...rice
c. I would like…….bottle of cooking oil
d. He’d like ……..apple
2. Put the verb in the blank with suitable tense(2pts). Chia động từ trong ngoặc ở thì đúng
a. He (want)………some chicken
b. They(walk) ………to school
c. we ….. ………by car (travel)
d. She ….. ……..video games (play)
IV. Writing: Describe about your friend(apperiance, favorite food and drink) (2pts)
Em hãy tả về vẻ bề ngoài, món ăn, đồ uống yêu thích của bạn em
3. Answer key and mark guide
I. Listening: (2ps) Listen and fill in the gap the suitable word ( Each correct answer get mark 0.25)
Thin; short; black; brown; a; thin; small; strong II Reading (3ps)
1. Fill in the blanks with the suitable words ( Each correct answer get mark 0.25)
1. can; 2 some; 3. many; 4. like; 5. any; 6. much; 7. else; 8. much II. Answer the questions ( Each correct answer get mark 0,5)
1. Lan wants some apples and some rice 2. they are sixty five thousand dong III. Language focus (3ps)
1. Put a. an, some, any in a suitable blank (Each correct answer get mark 0.25)
a. any; b. some; c. a; d. an II. Put the verb in the blank with suitable tense ( Each correct answer get mark 0.5)
a. wants; b. walk; c. are traveling; d. is playing IV. Writing: Describe about your friend(apperiance, favorite food and drink) 2marks Depend on Ss’s writing 4. Comment
* Knowledge:
* Skill:
- Listening:
- Reading:
- Language focus:
- Writing:
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Period 72: CORRECT THE TEST 1. Objectives
a. Knowledge:
Help Ss correct the mistakes in their test, Ss will know mistake and correct them, Ss can get more experiment for next tests
b. Skill:
Reading, listening, writing, language focus
c. Behavior:
Educate students use English correctly and get more experiment for next tests
2. Correction (43’) T gives Ss test papers and commend
T: Ask Ss go to the board do again the test
Ss: do again
T: Give test to Ss and get Ss pairs compare
Ss: Compare in pairs
T: Check and correct
*Keys
I. Listening: (2ps) Listen and fill in the gap the suitable word ( Each correct answer get mark 0.25)
Thin; short; black; brown; a; thin; small; strong
II Reading (3ps)
1. Fill in the blanks with the suitable words ( Each correct answer get mark 0.25)
1. can; 2 some; 3. many; 4. like; 5. any; 6. much; 7. else; 8. much
II. Answer the questions ( Each correct answer get mark 0,5)
1. Lan wants some apples and some rice
2. they are sixty five thousand dong III. Language focus (3ps)
1. Put a. an, some, any in a suitable blank (Each correct answer get mark 0.25)
a. any; b. some; c. a; d. an
II. Put the verb in the blank with suitable tense ( Each correct answer get mark 0.5)
a. wants; b. walk; c. are traveling; d. is playing
IV. Writing: Describe about your friend(apperiance, favorite food and drink) 2marks Depend on Ss’s writing
3. Guide to do at home(2’) Do again the test in your exercise book
Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 12: SPORT AND PASTIMES
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: Use the present progressive tense and sport vocabularies to talk about their pastimes b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
* Warm up T: Ask Ss to say again form of the present progressive tense
Ss: Retell T: Ask Ss to think about the sport
Ss: Answer: soccer, volleyball Ss: Answer in Vietnamese c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Ask the Ss to look at the picture in the book.
? What are they doing?
Ss: Look at picture and call the name of activities in the picture ( in Vietnamese)
Ss: listen to the tape and find the new words
T: Open the tape or read
Ss: Listen and repeat.
T: Read and write the new words on the board
Ss: Copy and read.
T: Guide Ss to read Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Check and correct their pronunciation
T: remind the present progressive tense and ask Ss to read the picture Ss: Read
T: Have Ss look at pictures A1 practice in pair ask and answer about the activities Ss: Practice inpairs
S1: What is he doing?
S2: He is skipping rope.
S4: What is she doing?
S5: She is playing badminton Etc…
Etc ….. T: Check and correct
T: Have Ss look at pictures A3 answer about the activities
Ss: Look at th picture and answer about the sports they play
I skip
I do aerobics
Etc… 15’
10’
10’ 1. Newwords Badminton table tennis
aelobics
volleyball
tennis skip
Jog
b. Grammar
Present progressive tense S + tobe + V-ing
2. Practice
+) What is he/she doing?
She/he + is + Ving
Eg: He is skipping
+) What are they doing?
They + are + Ving
3. Listen and repeat Which sport do you play? I play socccer
Etc….
c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 12: SPORT AND PASTIMES
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: Use the present progressive tense and sport vocabularies to talk about their pastimes b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: call 1s go to the board and ask some questions
Questions:
1. Write the sentences with the present continuous tense
a, Mss Giang/ Jog
b, The children/ shop
c, They/ play/ soccer
d, Hoa & Mai are planning table tennis
2. Which sport do you play?
Key:
1. a, Mss Giang is Jogging
b, The children are shopping
c, They are playing soccer
d, Hoa & Mai are Playing table tennis
2. I skip and I do aerobics……………
T: check and correct
* Warm up( 2’) 1. Retell the new words
Ss: Do ex: Badminton; table tennis; aelobics; volleyball……
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Ask the Ss to look at the picture in the book.
Introduce about Nam & Lan. Than ask the Ss to read the information about them call some Ss to read
? Which sport does she/he play?
Ss: Look at picture and call the name of activities in the picture T: Ask Ss to read the text Ss: Read
Listen and correct their mistakes T: Ask some Ss to read before the class
T? What grammar is used in this text
Ss: look at the text and answer: the present simple tense T: Remind the present simple tense T: Ask Ss to read again and answer the questions
Ss: Read the answer the questions Ss: Practice inpairs
S1: Which sport does Lan play? S2: Lan swim, she does aerobics and play badminton
Etc …..
T: Check and correct
T: Have Ss look at A5 ask and answer about the activities they play Ss: answer about the sports they play
S1: Which sport do you play?
I skip
I do aerobics
Etc…
Call some Ss to talk about their favorite sport 20’
15’
1. Read a. Lan swim, she does aerobics and play badminton
b. No, she doesn’t
c. Nam plays soccer. He jogs and play table tennis
d. yes, he does
2. Practice
Which sport do you play?
I play soccer
c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 12: SPORT AND PASTIMES
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: Name of sport activities and pastime.
Talk and write about what they or others do in the free time.
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: call 1s go to the board and ask some questions
Questions:
Answer the question about you
1: What sport do you play?
2: Do you play tennis?
3: Do you play soccer?
4: Do you play aerobics?
Key:
1: I play badminton
2: Yes, I do
3: yes, I do
4: No, I don’t
Other Ss give comment and give mark
T: check and correct
* Warm up( 2’) T: Ask Ss to talk about their free time. What about Phuong, Ly, Nam, Tuan, Long?
Ss: Listen & talk by Vietnamese
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Ask the Ss to look at the picture in the book.
Introduce some new words:
What do they do in their free time?
Ss: Look at picture and call the name of activities in the picture
T: Ask Ss to read the text
Ss: Read
Listen and correct their mistakes T: Ask some Ss to read before the class
T: Ask Ss practice in pairs to ask and answer Ss: Practice inpairs
S1: What do you do in your free time?
S2: I watch TV
Etc …..
T: Check and correct
T: Have Ss look at B3 ask and answer about the activities they do in their free time ?What do they do in their free time?
Ss: answer about the activites they do in their free time S1: What does Phuong do in his free time? He goes to the movies Etc…
Call some Ss to talk about their favorite activites T: Ask Ss to listen
Play the tape
- Tan reads
- Minh & Nam play video games
- Lien watches T.V
- Lan & Mai listen to music
Ss: Listen and answer before the class
T: Check and correct 10’
7
13’
5’ 1. New words Free time(n)
- Movies (n)
- Fishing (n)
- Video game (n)
2. Practice
What do you do in your free time? I watch TV 3. Listen and read What does Phuong do in his free time?
He goes to the movies
Etc…
4. Listen
Tan – f, Minh & Nam – e
Lien – a, Lan & mai – b
c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 12: SPORT AND PASTIMES
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: Describe time table. Present simple tense. How often. Adverb of one, twice talk and write about freequency b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: call 1s go to the board and ask some questions
Questions:
Answer the question about you
1. Which sport do you play?
2. What do you do in your free time?
Key:
1. I play…..
2. I read etc…
Other Ss give comment and give mark
T: check and correct
* Warm up( 2’) T: What do you do in your free time?
How often do you do?
Ss: Listen & talk by Vietnamese
Eg: I go to the movie twice a week
I go to school twice a day c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. Introduce about Ly’s diary
T: Ask the Ss to look at the picture in the book.
? How often does Ly go jogging?
? How often does she listen to music?
What do they do in their free time?
Ss: Look at picture and call the name of activities in the picture
T: Ask Ss to read the text
Ss: Read
T: Ask Ss practice in pairs
Ss: Practice inpairs
Listen and correct their mistakes
T: Ask Ss to look at Ly’s diary ask and answer about Ly’s activities Ss: Look at Ly’s diary ask and answer about Ly’s activities
S1: How often does Ly go fishing?
S2: She goes fishing once a week 15’
20’ 1. How often + How often …? Dùng để hỏi mức độ thường xuyên – bao nhiêu lần?
From: How often + do/ does + s ….?
S + V ……
Once, twice, 3 times ….
Eg: I go to the movie twice a week
I go to school twice a day
- once = one time
- Twice = two times
2. Practice
How often does Ly go to school?
She goes to chool six times a week
Etc… c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 12: SPORT AND PASTIMES
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
- Use well the Adv of frequency: always, uswally, often, some time, newer
- Use the question and answer with “How often …?”
- Reading comprehension the conversation talk about the activities had use the adv of frequency
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: call 1s go to the board and ask some questions
Questions:
Answer the question about you
How often does Ly go to school/go fishing …..?
Key:
She goes to chool six times a week
Etc…
Other Ss give comment and give mark
T: check and correct
* Warm up( 2’) Ask Ss to look at Ly’s diary then do
How of ten does Ly do the thing
Introduce Adv of frequency depend on the sentences by Ss given
Look at the picture then talk about ly
- ly goes to chool 6 time a week
- Ly plays badminton 3 time a week
- She watches T.V twice a week
- she jogs once a week
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Introduce the adv of frequency
T: Read
Call Ss to read the Adv of frequency
Ss: Listen, read & copy
T: Introduce the content of the text
(point to picture then introduce)
- play the tape/ read
Call some Ss to read the text
Guide Ss to ask & answer about Ba & Lan
Call some pair to do
S1: How often do they go to the park?
S2: They often go to the park Other Ss do the same T: Ask Ss look at the questions in the C4 and answer
Ss: Look at the questions then write the answer in the book
How often do you go to the zoo?
- How often do you go to the park?
- How often do you play sport?
- How often do you go camping?
10’
15’
10’ 1. Adv of frequency
Always (adv) Luôn luôn.
- Usually (adv) Thường thường.
- Often (adv) Hay.
- Some time (adv) Thỉnh thoảng.
- never (adv) Chưa bao giờ.
2. Listen and read
* New words:
Year(n)
Have a picnic: Đi pin nic.
Fly the kite: tha diều
Camp: Đi cắm trại.
Tent: Cái lều.
Late:
Ex: How often do Ba & Lan go to the zoo?
- they go to the zoo 3 times a year
Etc… 3. Write
- I go to the zoo 5 times a year
- I go to the park twice a month
- I play sport oncea day
- I go camping twice a year
Etc… c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 12: SPORT AND PASTIMES
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
- Use well the Adv of frequency: always, uswally, often, some time, newer
- Use the question and answer with “How often …?”
- Reading comprehension the conversation talk about the activities had use the adv of frequency
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: call 1s go to the board and ask some questions
Questions:
Complete the sentences about you with once a week, twice a week three … time a week, everyday
a, I go to chool
b, I eat meat
c, I study English
Key:
a, I go to school six times aweek (3m)
b, I eat meat four times aweek (3m)
c, I study English three time aweek (3m)
read well
Other Ss give comment and give mark
T: check and correct
* Warm up( 2’) Ask Ss to retell the adv of frequency Ss: Retell
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Aks Ss to book at the picture (p 132) then listen & fill the Adv of frequency given to each pictures
- play the tape/ read
call some Ss todo exercise
ss: Listen then compare the result to each o ther listen & tell their result
T: Listen & correct their mistakes
tape crip:
a, Nga & Lan never go camping
b, They some time go to the zoo
c, They often go to the park
d, they often play sport
e, They usually have apicnic in the park
T: Introduce the content of the text
Minh likes walking on the weekend
Minh & his friends often go walking in the mountains
? What do they do there? Let’s listen
Read the text the first time
T: Call some S Listen & read after in chorus
Ss: Read in silents
Answer the given
Listen & do in pairs to answers T: Check and correct
10’
25’
1. Listen
a, Never d, some time
b, Some time e, usually
c, often
2. Read
2.1. New words:
On the weekend:
Wear boot:
Warm:
Take:
A camping stove:
Overnight:
Friends:
2.2. Answer the questions
a, Minh likes walking
b, they always wear strong boots & warm clothers
c, he goes on the weekend
d, He usually goes with 2 frinds
e, he often goes walking in the mountains
f, They always take food & water & a camping stove c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 13: ACTIVITES AND THE SEASONS
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: Present simple tense. Use the temperature and season vocabulary. Talk, write about the weather in each season.
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: call 1s go to the board and ask some questions
Questions:
1. What do you like doing? 2. etc….
Key:
1. I like jogging…… Other Ss give comment and give mark
T: check and correct
* Warm up( 2’) Ask Ss to retell the adj of felling Ss: Retell
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Aks Ss to book at the picture (p 134) then T introduce the new words
What’s the season?
Ss: Look and answer
T: Read the new word Ss: Listen, repeat and copy
Some Ss read before the class T: Check and correct
T: guide Ss to match the words
Ss: Match the words
T: Ask Ss look at A1 listen and repeat
T: Read
Ss: Listen and read in chorus
T: Ask some Ss to read before the class
T: Guide Ss to play the game Wordsquare by find the words they have learnt T: Check and correct
Key: → fall; cold; warm; spring; cool; weather
↓season; summer 15’
5’
15 1. New words
a. The weather and seasons
Weather:
Summer:
Fall:
Spring:
Winter:
Cool:
The season:
2. Matching
a. Cold Summer.
b. Cool Spring.
c. Warm Fall.
d. Hot Winter.
3. Listen and Reapeat * Practice: Wordsquare F
A
L
L
C
O
L
D
X
W
A
R
M
A S
S
S P R I N G U
E
O D E H K H M
A
B C W I D O M
S
C
O
O
L
S T E
O
W
E
A
T
H
E
R
N
c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 13: ACTIVITES AND THE SEASONS
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: Present simple tense. Use the temperature and season vocabulary. Talk, write about the weather in each season.
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: call 1s go to the board and ask some questions
Questions:
Retell the new words
Key:
Weather:
Summer:
Fall:
Spring:
Winter:
Cool:
Other Ss give comment and give mark
T: check and correct
* Warm up( 2’) Pelmanism:
Spring warm summer hot winter cold fall T: Guide Ss to play game Ss: Play game c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Introduce the srtucture to ask and answer about the westher and seasons What’s the season?
What the weather like in the….
Ss: Look and answer
T: guide Ss to practice to ask and answer about the westher and seasons Ss: Practice to ask and answer about the westher and seasons
S1: What’s the weather like in the winter? S2: It’s cold
Etc….. T: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss look at A3 listen and repeat
T: Read
Ss: Listen and read in chorus
T: Ask some Ss to read before the class
T: Guide Ss to ask and answer the questions Ss: Practice
S1: What weather do you like?
S2: I like…..
T: Check and correct
15’
5’
15
1. Grammar
* Hỏi và trả lời về thời tiết
What’s the weather like in + Season ?
Thời tiết vào mùa ...như thế nào?
- It’s + adj ( chi thoi tiet)
Ex: What’s the weather like in the summer? It’s hot 2. Practice What’s the weather like in the fall?
It’s cool
What’s the weather like in the winter?
It’s cold
What’s the weather like in the spring?
It’s warm
3. Listen and Reapeat
What weather do you like? I like + adj + weather c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 13: ACTIVITES AND SEASONS
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
- Practice in adverb of freequency. Simple past.
- Use the sport and season vocabulary.
- Use “ When ” clause in possitive statement
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: call 1s go to the board and ask some questions
Questions:
a. what weather do you like?
b. what is the weather like in the summer?
c. what is the weather like in the fall?
d. what is the weather like in the winter?
e. what is the weather like in spring?
f. what weather like today?
Key:
a, I like hot weather
b it’s hot
c, it’s cool d. it’s cold e. it’s warm
f. It’s…….. Other Ss give comment and give mark
T: check and correct
* Warm up( 2’) T: Ask Ss to retell about pastimes Ss: Retell c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Aks Ss to book at the picture (p 136) then read T: read
Ss: Listen
T: Guide Ss to read
Ss: Read Some Ss read before the class
T: Ask Ss to look at the picture and say what What does Ba do when it’s……… Ss: Practice in pairs to ask and answer S1: What does Ba do when it’s hot?
S2: When it’s hot He goes swimming
Etc….
T: Ask Ss practice to ask and answer about themselves Ss: Practice to ask and answer about themselves
S1: What do you do when it’s cool ?
When it’s hot I go jogging
Etc….
T: Ask Ss to write about activites they do in each weather
Ss: Write
T: Ask Ss to read their writing
Ss: Read
T: Check and correct 10’
15’
10’ 1. Read What does Ba do when it’s hot? When it’s hot He goes swimming Etc….
2. Practice What do you do when it’s ….?
When it’s….. I ……
Eg: What do you do when it’s hot?
When it’s hot I go swimming
Etc….
3. futher Practice
Sugession:
when it’s hot I go swimming
when it’s cold I play soccer when it’s cool I go jogging when it’s warm I go fishing
c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 13: ACTIVITES AND SEASONS
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
- Practice in adverb of freequency. Simple past.
- Use the sport and season vocabulary.
- Use “ When ” clause in possitive statement
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: call 1s go to the board and ask some questions
Questions:
a. what weather do you like?
b. what do you do when it’s hot?
c. what do you do when it’s cold?
d. what do you do when it’s warm?
e. what do you do when it’s cool?
f. what weather like today?
Key:
a, I like hot weather
b, when it’s hot I go swimming
c, when it’s cold I play soccer etc….
f. It’s…….. Other Ss give comment and give mark
* Warm up( 2’) Ask Ss to retell the adv of frequency
Ss: Retell
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Aks Ss to book at the picture (p 138) then listen & repeat
T: play the tape or read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Introduce some new words
T: Read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Ask Ss to look at the picture and say what people do.
Ss: Read
We often play volleyball in the spring.
they sometimes Go sailling in the fall.
I often Go swimming in the summer.
She always plays badminton in the fall
We always play basketball in the winter.
Etc….
10’
10’
15’ 1. Listen and repeat
* New words
Go sailing: Bơi thuyền.
Basketball: Chơi bóng rổ.
2. Write the list of things you do in the different seasons
a. Spring
b. Summer
c. fall
d. Winter
ex. A: What do you do in the spring?
B: I usually play badminton the spring
Etc….
3. Practice
Game: Lucky numbers
1. What is the weather like in BY?
2. …………..the fall?
3. Lucky number.
4. What is the weather do you like?
5. What sport do you do in the spring?
6. Lucky number.
7. What’s the weather like in the winter?
8. Where do you often Go in the summer? c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 14: MAKING PLANS
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: Going to future( near future).
Possitive statement and WH question to talk about vacation plan.
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: call 1s go to the board and ask some questions
Questions:
a. what weather do you like?
b. what do you do when it’s hot?
c. what do you do when it’s cold?
d. what do you do when it’s warm?
e. what do you do when it’s cool?
f. what weather like today?
Key:
a, I like hot weather
b, when it’s hot I go swimming
c, when it’s cold I play soccer etc….
f. It’s…….. Other Ss give comment and give mark
* Warm up( 2’) Ask Ss to talk about some places in VN
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Aks Ss to book at the picture (p 140) then listen & repeat
T: play the tape or read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Introduce some new words
T: Read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Ask Ss to look at the picture and say what is this?/ Where is this? Ss: Read the picture T: Ask Ss to match the new words with the words inVietnamese
Ss: Matching
T: Ask Ss to practice the dialouge
Ss: Read before the class
T: Introduce the grammar structure “going to”
Ss: Look, listen and copy
T: Ask Ss to read again and answer the questions
Ss: Read then and answer the questions in groups T: Ask Ss to give their answer on the board
T: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss to read the dialouge again then complete the dialouge Ss: Write
T: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss to practice coplete the open dialouge
Ss: Complete
T: Check and correct 20’
15’
I. Listen and repeat
1. New words
The summer vacation:
Stay with:
Stay for:
Visit: Aunt: Uncle:
Citadel:
2. Grammar
Going to: Sẽ
Dùng để hỏi vê dự dịnh kế hoạch What + tobe + S + going to + do?
S + tobe + going to + V-inf
Eg: What are you going to do?
I’m going to visit Hue
3. Answer the questions a. She is going to vsit Hue
b. She is going to stay
c. She is going to stay with her aunt and uncle
d. She is going to visit the citadel
II. Write 1. Complete the dialouge A: What are you going to do this summer vacation? B: .....................visit HL Bay
A: Where are you going to stay?
B: ………………………. in a hotel
A: How long are you going to stay?
B: ……………….for two weeks
A: What are you going to do?
B: ………visit the beach and swim
3. Practice the open dialogue S1: What are you …………...?
S2: I …………………Nha Trang.
S1: Where ……………....... stay?
S2: …………………. in a hotel.
S1: How long………………………?
S2: For ……
S1: What …………………… ?
S2: I …………….go swimming. c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 14: MAKING PLANS
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: Going to future( near future).
Possitive statement and WH question to talk about vacation plan.
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: call 1s go to the board and ask some questions
Questions:
a. what is Lan going to do? b. Where is she going to stay? c. How long is she going to stay? d. what is she going to do?
e. what are you going to do this summer vacation? Key:
a. She is going to vsit Hue
b. She is going to stay
c. She is going to stay with her aunt and uncle
d. She is going to visit the citadel
e, I’m going to…………………… Other Ss give comment and give mark
* Warm up( 2’) Ask Ss to talk about some places they are going to visit in VN
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Aks Ss to book at the picture (p 142) then listen & read T: play the tape or read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Introduce some new words
T: Read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Ask Ss to look at the picture and say what is this?/ Where is this?
Ss: answer T: Ask Ss to read the tex then complete the table
Ss: Read then complete
T: Guide Ss to read the text
Ss: Read
T: Ask Ss to practice ask and answer Ss: practice in pairs S1: Where are they going to visit first?
S2: They are going to visit Ha Long bay
Etc….
T: Check and correct
10’
10’ 15’
1. Listen and read * New words
First: Then:
Next:
After that:
See:
Grandmother
Grandfather:
2. complete the table Place
Where to stay
How long
Activity
Ha long
Uncle’s house
2 days
Visit the bay
Hanoi
hotel
3 days
See Ngoc son temple
Hue
Friend’s house
2 days
See the citadel
Nha trang
Friend’s house
3 days
Visit friends
HCM
Grand’ house
One week
Visit grands
3. Answer the questions What places are they going to visit?
Where are they going to stay?
Etc…. c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 14: MAKING PLANS
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: Speak with Going to. ( near future).
Talk about plan for the near future.
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: call 1s go to the board and ask some questions
Questions:
a. what are they going to do?
b. Where are they going to stay in Ha Long Bay?
c. How long are they going to stay in Ha Noi?
d. what are they going to do in Hue?
e. what are they going to stay in HCM city?
Key:
a. They are going on vacation this summer b. They are going to stay with their aunt and uncle etc……..
Other Ss give comment and give mark
* Warm up( 2’) Ask Ss to talk about their plans in free time c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Aks Ss to book at the picture (p 144) then listen & repeat T: play the tape or read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Introduce some new words
T: Read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Ask Ss to practice reading Ss: read T: Ask Ss to ask and answer about their plans in B2
Ss: practice inpairs
S1: What are you going to do to night?
S2: I’m going to help my mom
S1: What are you going to do tomorrow?
S2: I’m going to go walking
T: Ask Ss to read the text B3 Ss: Read
T: Ask Ss make the plans for the weekend Ss: making plans T: Ask Ss to practice talk about their plans on the weekend Ss: Read their plans
On Saturday morning I’m going to go to school
On Saturday afternoon I’m going to go fishing
Etc….
T: Check and correct
10’
10’
15’
1. Listen and repeat
* New words
Tomorrow Tonight
2. Practice a. What are you going to do to night?
I’m going to see a movie.
What are you going to do tomorrow?
I’m going to go walking
b. What are you going to do to night?
I’m going to help my mom
What are you going to do tomorrow?
I’m going to play volleyball
3. Making plan for the weekend On Saturday morning I’m going to… On Saturday afternoon I’m going to… On Saturday everning I’m going to…
On Sunday morning I’m going to…
On Sunday afternoon I’m going to…
On Sunday everning I’m going to… c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 14: MAKING PLANS
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: Speak with Going to. ( near future).
Talk about plan for the near future.
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: call 1s go to the board and ask some questions
Questions:
What are you going to do on the weekend?
Key:
On Saturday morning I’m going to…
On Saturday afternoon I’m going to…
On Saturday everning I’m going to…
On Sunday morning I’m going to…
On Sunday afternoon I’m going to…
On Sunday everning I’m going to…
Other Ss give comment and give mark
* Warm up( 2’) Ask Ss to talk about their plans in free time
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Aks Ss to book at the picture (p 145) then listen & read
T: play the tape or read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Introduce some new words
T: Read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Ask Ss to practice reading
Ss: read
T: Ask Ss to ask and answer about their plans in B5 Ss: practice inpairs
S1: What is Minh going to do / bring?
S2: he is going to ……
Etc… T: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss to listen and match the name with the right picture Ss: Listen
T: Check and correct
15’
10’
10’
1. Listen and repeat
* New words
Camera:
Take photo:
Bring:
2. Practice ask and answer
What is ….. going to bring?
He is going to ………..
Ex: What is Minh going to bring?
Minh is going to bring some food
3. Listen Vui: A tent, some food.
Ly: Camara.
Lan: A ball.
Nga and Mai: Some drink. c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 14: MAKING PLANS
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: Make suggetions with let’s.
Further practice: - Want to do, what about, why don’t we?
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: call 1s go to the board and ask some questions
Questions:
What are you going to do on the weekend?
Key:
On Saturday morning I’m going to…
On Saturday afternoon I’m going to…
On Saturday everning I’m going to…
On Sunday morning I’m going to…
On Sunday afternoon I’m going to…
On Sunday everning I’m going to…
Other Ss give comment and give mark
* Warm up( 2’) Ask Ss to talk about their plans in free time
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Aks Ss to book at the picture (p 145) then listen & read
T: play the tape or read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Introduce some new words
T: Read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Ask Ss to practice reading
Ss: read
T: Ask Ss to ask and answer about suggestion in c1 Ss: practice
S1: Let's go camping S2: What bout going camping? Etc…
T: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss to read again and answer the questions Ss: Read again and answer the questions T: Check and correct
15’
10’
10’
1. Listen and read
a. New words
Pagoda:
Minibus
Too = Very:
Too far:
Good idea
b. Grammar
Let’s + V-inf
What about + Ving…?
Why don’t we + V-inf….?
E.g:Let's go camping! Why don't we go to Huong pagoda? 2. Practice ask and answer
a. He wants to go to Hue b. She wants to go to Huong Pagoda c. She wants to walk there
d. Because it’s too far
e. He wants to travel by bike
f. Because it’s too hot
g. He wants to travel by minibus
3. Make suggestons a. Let’s go to the beach b. What about going to the museum
c. Why don’t we play volleyball
etc…. c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
1. Objectives:
a. knowledge:
By the End of the lesson Ss can cousolidate vocabulary and structures on topics they have learnt from U12 -> U14
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c . Behavior:
Student like studying the subject and use English correctly
2. Preparations: a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture, chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids.
3. Steps of teaching:
a. Oral test: 2’
* Warm up Ask Ss to talk about the adv of freequency
c. New lesson: 40’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Aks Ss to look at the book (p 145) then retell the simple tense
Ss: Look at the book (p 145) then retell the simple tense
T: Guide Ss to do ex in group
Ss: Do ex
T: Check and correct
A. Huong : (1) …… you like sports ?
Ba : Yes. I (2) …… sports.
Huong : What (3) ……you play?
Ba : I (4) ……badminton.
Huong : (5) … you play volleyball?
Ba : No, I (6) ………
C. Minh : (1) ……they like sports?
Ha : Yes, they (2) ……
Minh : What (3) ….. they play?
Ha : They swim.
Minh : Do they dive?
Ha : No, they (4) ……
T: Aks Ss to look at the book (p 146) then retell the present progressivetense
Ss: Look at the book (p 146) then retell the simple tense
T: Guide Ss to do ex
Ss: Do ex
T: Check and correct
A. Hung : What are you watching ?
Mai : I ( 1) …….this TV sports.
Hung : What are they playing?
Mai : They are (2) ………………. soccer.
Hung : Who is winning ?
Mai : My favorite team (3) ……… the match.
B. Vui : What is Mom cooking ?
Nam : She (1) ……… a chicken.
Vui : Are we having some rice, too?
Nam : No, we (2) ……We are having noodles.
Vui : Is she cooking some vegetables ?
Nam : Yes, she (3) ……she is cooking some beans.
C. Nhan : Are you doing your homework?
Thanh : Yes, I (1) ………….. My math. What are you reading?
Nhan : I (2) ……………….. My history book.
T: Aks Ss to look at the book (p 146) then retell going to
Ss: Look at the book (p 145) then retell
T: Guide Ss to do ex in pairs
Ss: Do ex
T: Check and correct
EX : S1 : What are they going to do?
S2 : They are going to play soccer.
T Guide Ss to play a game lucky numbers use 12 numbers 2,5,9,10 are lucky numbers
Ss: Play game 8’
7’
8’
10’
7’ I. Present simple tense ( Thì hiện tại đơn) 1. Grammar
a. Form : (+) S + V / Vs, es + O.
(-) S + do/ does + not + O…
(?) Do / Does + S + V…?
Yes, S + Do/does
No, S + Don’t/doesn’t
b. Usage: Thì hiện tại đơn diễn tả sự thật, chân lý hay hành động, sự việc xảy ra theo thói quen hàng ngày
2. Practice exercise1 Complete the dialogue, using the present simple tense
B. Thu : (1) …… he like sports?
Tuan : Yes, he (2) ……
He (3) ………sports.
Thu : What (4) ……he play?
Tuan : He (5) …… soccer.
Thu : (6) …… he play tennis?
Tuan : No, he (7) ……
II. Adverbs of frequency 1. Network 2. Practice exercise 2
How often do you + V…….?
I + always/usually…. + V…. III. Present progressive tense
( thì hiện tại tiếp diễn)
1. Grammar a. Form :
(+) : S + am / is / are + V-ing + O
(-) : S + am /is /are + not +V-ing + O
(?) : Am / is /are + S + V-ing + O?
b. Usage : (thì hiện tại tiếp diễn, diễn tả hành động, sự việc đang diễn ra ở hiện tại)
2. Practice exercise 3
Complete the dialogue, using the present progressive tense.
IV. Going to 1. Grammar
a. Form : What + is /are /am + S + going to + do? ( S + is /are /am + going to + V . b. Usage: Diễn tả dự định trong tương lai. 2. Practice excerise 4
a. What are they going to do? b. Complete the dialouge Han : What are you going to do?
Vui : I (1) ………… visit HaNoi.
Han : Where are you going to stay?
Vui : I (2) ……… stay in a hotel.
Han : How long are you going to stay.
Vui : I (3) ……… stay for a week.
* Answer the questions :
What is Vui going to do ?
Where is she going to stay ?
How long is she going to stay? V. Lucky numbers 1. What׳s the weather like in the spring ? 2. Lucky number 3. What׳s the weather like in the summer? 4. What׳s the weather like in the fall? 5. Lucky number
6. What׳s the weather like in the winter? 7. What are you going to do this evening? 8. What are you going to do on the weekend? 9. Lucky number
10. Lucky number
11. What are you going to do tomorrow? 12. What are you going to do in the vacation? c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Period 89: A FORTY - FIVE MINUTE TEST 1. Objectives
a. Knowledge:
All the language items from unit 12 to 14
b. Skill:
Reading, listening, writing, language focus
c. Behavior:
Educate students use English correctly to do the test
2. Questions 45’ A. Listening: Listen and complete the table.(2pts) Name Place to visit? Where to stay? How long to stay? Lan (1)…....................... Friend’s house For five days Hoa Hue (2)….......................... for three days Mai (3)…………. With her uncle for two weeks Ba Ho Chi Minh city With his grandfather. For (4)…………. B. Reading: Read the passage (3pts) There are four seasons in a year. They are spring, summer, fall and winter. It is warm in the spring. Sometimes, it is cold but not very cold. There are many flowers in the spring. After spring comes summer. In the summer, the day is long and the night is short. They often go swimming in the summer. It is cool in the fall. In the winter, It is usually very cold. The day is short and the night is long.
I. Choose the best answer (1 pts) 1. There are ……………. seasons in a year.
a. three b. four c. five d. six
2. It is………………. in the fall
a. hot b. cold c. cool d. warm
II. Answer the questions: (2 pts)
2. What’s the weather like in the spring? -> …………………………………………………………
4. What do they often do in the summer? -> ………………………………………………………… C. Language focus: I. Choose the best answer.( 1pts) 1. Lan ………………… aerobics every morning.
a, do b. does c. to do d. doing
2. It is ……………. in the summer.
a. hot b. warm c. cold d. cool
3. What about………………….by car?
a. go b. to go c. going d. goes
4. Let’s…………………our homeworks
a. to do b. do c. does d. doing
II. Put the verb in the blank with suitable tense(2pts)
1. He (go)………walking in the mountain every week
2. They always (play) ………badminton in the fall
3. Mai(like)….. ……… traveling by car
4. Everyday, Ba (do) ………………not get up early
D. Writing: Write a passage about your vacation, using the following cues.( 2 pts)
This summer/ vacation/I / visit / Ha Noi city
I / stay/ with my friend / three weeks
I/ see/ Ngoc Son temple and parks
I/ play games / there.
3. Answer key and mark guide
I. Listening: (2ps) ( Each correct answer get mark 0. 5)
(1) Ha Noi; (2) in a hotel; (3) Ha Long Bay; (4) Two days II Reading (3ps)I. Choose the best answer (1 pts) ( Each correct answer get mark 0.5)
1. can; 2 some; 3. many; 4. like; 5. any; 6. much; 7. else; 8. much
II. Answer the questions ( Each correct answer get mark 0,5)
1. It is warm in the spring
2. They often go swimming in the summer III. Language focus (3ps)
1 I. Choose the best answer (Each correct answer get mark 0.25)
1. b 2.a 3. c 4. b II. Put the verb in the blank with suitable tense ( Each correct answer get mark 0.5)
a. goes; b. play; c. likes ; d. does IV. Writing: Write a passage about your vacation, using the following cues. ( Each correct answer get mark 0.5) This summer vacation Iam going to visit Ha Noi city. I am going to stay with my friend for three weeks. I’m going to see Ngoc Son temple and parks. I’m going to play games there 4. Comment
* Knowledge:
* Skill:
- Listening:
- Reading:
- Language focus:
- Writing:
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Period 90: CORRECT THE TEST 1. Objectives
a. Knowledge:
Help Ss correct the mistakes in their test, Ss will know mistake and correct them, Ss can get more experiment for next tests
b. Skill:
Reading, listening, writing, language focus
c. Behavior:
Educate students use English correctly and get more experiment for next tests
2. Correction (43’) T gives Ss test papers and commend
T: Ask Ss go to the board do again the test
Ss: do again
T: Give test to Ss and get Ss pairs compare
Ss: Compare in pairs
T: Check and correct
*Keys
I. Listening: (2ps) ( Each correct answer get mark 0. 5)
(1) Ha Noi; (2) in a hotel; (3) Ha Long Bay; (4) Two days
II Reading (3ps)I. Choose the best answer (1 pts) ( Each correct answer get mark 0.5)
1. can; 2 some; 3. many; 4. like; 5. any; 6. much; 7. else; 8. much
II. Answer the questions ( Each correct answer get mark 0,5)
1. It is warm in the spring
2. They often go swimming in the summer
III. Language focus (3ps)
1 I. Choose the best answer (Each correct answer get mark 0.25)
1. b 2.a 3. c 4. b
II. Put the verb in the blank with suitable tense ( Each correct answer get mark 0.5)
a. goes; b. play; c. likes ; d. does
IV. Writing: Write a passage about your vacation, using the following cues. ( Each correct answer get mark 0.5) This summer vacation Iam going to visit Ha Noi city. I am going to stay with my friend for three weeks. I’m going to see Ngoc Son temple and parks. I’m going to play games there
3. Guide to do at home(2’) Do again the test in your exercise book
Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 15: COUNTRIES 1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to ask and answer about the nationality and languages of some countries in the world
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 2’
* Warm up T: Show the pictures on page 154 and ask some question.
1- Do you know where these people come from ?
2- Do you want to know where they are fom ?
Ss: Work in groups and discuss the Qs
c. New lesson: 40’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: use the picture in the book to introduce the name of some countries Ss: Look at picture and call the name of countries ( in Vietnamese)
T: Open the tape or read
Ss: Listen and repeat.
T: Read and write the new words on the board
Ss: Copy and read.
T: Guide Ss to read the picture with people from other countries Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Check and correct their pronunciation
Some Ss read before the class T: Introduce the form to ask and answer about where someone from T: Write on the board
Ss: Look, listen and copy
T: Give Model sentences and ask Ss to practice
Ss: Practice to ask and answer
S1: Where is Laura from?
S2: She is from Canada Etc…
T; Check and correct T: Ask Ss to look in the book (page 155) and read about Minh
Ss: Look and listen
T: Introduce nationality and language of some coutries in A3
T: Read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Ask Ss to read before the class
Some Ss read
T: Introduce new form to ask and answer about nationality and language
Ss: Look, listen and copy
T: Ask Ss practice to ask and answer about nationality and language of some people from other countries Ss: Practice inpairs S1: Who’s that?
S2: That’s Yoko S1: Where is she from?
S2: She is from Japan S1: What’s her nationality?
S2: She is Japanese
S1: Which language does she speak?
S2: She speaks Japanese Etc… T: Ask Ss to look at pictures of some famous people from many coutries and say about their countries; nationalities and languages Ss: Look at pictures and practice
Eg: T shows a picture of president from The USA Barack Obama and ask
Where is he from?
What’s his nationality?
Which language does he speak?
He is from The USA
He is American
He speaks English Etc… T: Ask Ss to introduce themselvse by answer some questions Ss: Practice
T: Check and correct 20’
20’
I. Countries 1. New words Canada: France
China:
USA:
Japan:
Great Britain
Australia:
2. Hỏi và trả lời ai đó đến từ đâu Where + tobe + S + from? S + tobe + from + country
Ex: Where are you from? I’m from Viet nam
Model sentences Where is Laura from?
She is from Canada 3. Hỏi và trả lời về quốc tịch và ngôn ngữ
Nationality(n): Quốc tịch Language(n): Ngôn ngữ
a. Hỏi và trả lời về quốc tịch
What + His/her/your/their + nationality ?
(Quốc tịch của anh ấy/cô ấy/bạn/họ là gì)
S + tobe + nationality(quốc tịch)
b. Hỏi và trả lời về ngôn ngữ Which language + do/does + S + speak?
S + speak (s) + language(ngôn ngữ)
II. Practice 1. Mapped dialogue
A: Who’s that?
B: That’s ……… A: Where … … from?
B: … … from ………… A: What’s … .. nationality?
B: He/she is …………
A: Which language does …. speak?
B: … .. speaks ……………. 2. Further practice She is from Viet Nam.
She is Vietnamese.
She speaks Vietnamese. 3. Answer about you Where are you from?
I’m from …………
What’s your nationality?
I’m …………….
Which language do you speak?
I speak …………….
c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 15: COUNTRIES
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to ask and answer about the nationality and languages of some countries in the world
Write a postcard about being on vacation to their friends.
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer Ss: Go to the board and answer Questions: Show the picture of some people and ask Ss to answer about their countries; nationalities and languages Introduce about youself Key:
She is from Viet Nam.
She is Vietnamese.
She speaks Vietnamese. I speak …………….
I’m from …………
Etc…
Others S giving the opinions
T: Correct the answers and give mark
* Warm up T: Show the letter in page 156 and ask ? What is this?
Ss: Look and discuss the Qs
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Ask Ss look at the letter and read T: Introduce some new words
T: Write on the board
Ss: Look, listen and copy
T: Ask some Ss to read the letter Ss: Read
T: Guide Ss to write similar postcard for Minh depend on the postcard from Nhan Ss: Write
T: Ask Some Ss to read their reading
Ss: Read before the class
T: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss to look in A3 answer the questions Ss: Look and answer in pairs
S1: What is your name?
S2: a. My name is…
S1: How old are you?
S2: I’m….. years old
Etc…
T: Check and correct
10’
15’ 10’
1. Read the postcard
A postcard: Interesting place: A lot of:
2. Write a postcard Dear Nhan, I’m on vacationn in…….
3. Answer the questions
a. My name is… b. I’m….. years old
c. I’m from…..
etc… c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 15: COUNTRIES
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to :Use the comparative and superlative form of short adjectives
Compare places using comparative and superlative adjective
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer Ss: Go to the board and answer Questions:
1. Read the postcard they have written in the last lesson 2. Answer some questions
Key:
1. Dear Nhan,
I’m on vacationn in…….
2. a. My name is…
b. I’m….. years old
c. I’m from…..
Etc…
Others S giving the opinions
T: Correct the answers and give mark
* Warm up T: Show the picture in page 158 and ask Ss to compare the buildings and houses Ss: Look and discuss
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Ask Ss look at pictures and compare the building and house Ss: Look and compare
T: Read
Ss: Listen and repeat
Some Ss read before the class
T: Introduce the structures of The comparative and superlative form of short adjectives Ss: Look listen and copy T: Give ex and ask Ss give some ex
Ss: Give ex
T: Ask Ss to look at B2 and ask
? Where is this?
Ss: Look and answer
T: Read the passage
Ss: Listen
T: Introduce some new words
Ss: Look listen and copy
T: Guide Ss to read the passage
Some Ss read before the class
T: Ask Ss to answer the questions
Ss: Read again and answer in pairs T: Check and correct
T: Introduce Sears tower in Chicago and
Petronas Twin towers in Kuala Lumpur T: Ask Ss to read
Ss: Reas T: Ask ss to guess which is taller: Sear towers or Petronas twin towers?
Ss: Read and check
+ Sears tower is 442 meters high
+ Petronas twin towers is 452 meters high
Ss Answer Petronas twin towers is taller than Sears tower
T: Ask ss to look at the picture in B4 and guess what is it? And Where is it?
T: Introduce the Great wall in China T: Read and introduce some new words Ss: Look listen and copy
T: Guide Ss to read
Ss: Read
T; Ask Ss to read again then answer the questions
Ss: Answer in pairs
S1: How long is the Great wall?
S2: It is over 6,000 kilometers long
Etc…
10’
10’
15’
1. The comparative and superlative form of short adjectives
a. Comparative: short adj+er
big→bigger
small→smaller
S1 +be +short adj-er +than +S2
E.g: Hoa is taller than Nga
b. superlative: short adj + est
big→bigest
small→smallest S + tobe + the + adj-est
E.g: Hoa is the tallest
Big = > bigger = > the biggest.
Wet = > wetter => the wettest.
Hot = > hotter = > the hottest.
Cold = > colder = > the coldest.
Small = > smaller = > the smallest.
Tall = > taller = > the talest.
2. Listen and read a. New words
In the world: Population:
Capital:
b. Answer the questions
a. No, it isn’t b. Mexico City is the biggest city in the world
c. Tokyo is bigger 3. Some world famous places a. Towers Sears tower:
Petronas Twin towers:
Which is taller Sear towers or Petronas twin towers?
b. The Great wall of China
The Great wall:
High:
Thick: How + long is the Great wall? high
thick
c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 15: COUNTRIES
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: • By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: Introduce about the country, use some place nouns and talk about some natural features of VN
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer Ss: Go to the board and answer Questions:
1. Retell the structures of The comparative and superlative form of short adjectives 2. Change some adj in to comparative and superlative
a. Cold; b. Small; c. Tall; d. Wet; e. big Key:
1. S + tobe + the + adj-est
S1 +be +short adj-er +than +S2
2. Change some adj in to comparative and superlative Cold - colder - the coldest
Small - smaller - the smallset.
Tall - taller - the tallest.
big - bigger - the biggest.
Wet - wetter - the westest.
Etc…
Others S giving the opinions
T: Correct the answers and give mark
* Warm up(2) T: Show the picture in page 162 and ask ? Where is it?
Ss: Look and answer c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Ask Ss look at pictures and read Ss: Look and read T: Read
Ss: Listen
T: Introduce some new words and the structure lots of E.g:We have lots of beaches
T: Guide Ss to read the passage
Some Ss read before the class
T: Ask ss to do exercise in C1: Complete the passage
Call on some ss to give answers
T: Check and correct T: Ask Ss to practice in pairs to ask and answer
Ss: Practice in pairs
S1: Does VN have any rain?
S2: Yes, it does
Etc… 25’
10’ I. Listen and read 1. New words Lots of: Red/Mekong River:
Rain:
Forest:
Desert:
2. Complete the passage a. mountains
b. rivers
c. lakes
d. rain
e. forests
f. beaches
g. deserts
II. Ask and answer Does VN have any…? Yes, it does/No, it doesn’t c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 15: COUNTRIES
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: • By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: Introduce about the country, use some place nouns and talk about some natural features of VN and in the world
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer Ss: Go to the board and answer Questions:
1. Complete the passage using pictures
2. Does VN have any…?
Key:
1. a. mountains b. rivers etc…
2. Yes, it is/ No, it isn’t Etc…
Others S giving the opinions
T: Correct the answers and give mark
* Warm up(2) Ask ss some questions:
1.Which is the highest mountain in the world?
2.Which is the longest river in VietNam?
3.Which is longer:The Red river or the Mekong river?
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Ask Ss look at the book page 165 and listen
Ss: Look and read
T: Read
Ss: Listen
T: Introduce some new words
T: Write on the board
T: Read the new words
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Guide Ss to read the passage
Some Ss read before the class
T: Check and correct
T: Ask ss to do exercise in C3: answer the questions T: Ask Ss to practice in pairs to ask and answer
Ss: Practice in pairs
Call on some ss to give answers
T: Check and correct
20’
15’
1. New words
Flow to: Chảy xuống.
The sea:
Tibet:
North of africa:
Mediteranean
It starts in Tibet.
The Nile river.
The Mediteranean sea. Địa trung hải Mount Everest: 2. Answer the questions a.The Mekong river is the longest river in VN
b. The Mekong river startes in China
c.The Nile river is the longest river in the world
d. The Nile river flow to The Mediterranean sea
e. Mount Everest is the highest mountain in the world f. Phanxipang is the highest mountain in VN
c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 16: MAN AND THE ENVIRONMENT
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: • By the end of the lesson, students will be able to :
+Use How much and How many question with some quantity adjs(some, a lot, a little, a few) Countable and uncountable quantifiers b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer Ss: Go to the board and answer Questions:
1.Which is the highest mountain in the world?
2.Which is the longest river in VietNam?
3.Which is longer:The Red river or the Mekong river?
Key:
1. Mount Everest is the highest mountain in the world 2. The Mekong river is the longest river in VN
Etc…
Others S giving the opinions
T: Correct the answers and give mark
* Warm up(2) Ask Ss to list some countable and uncountable nouns about food
Ss: Make a list
b. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Ask ss to look at the picture in A1 and comment about rice and egg in each
T: Present the use of Some/a lot/a few/little S: Look listen and copy T: Read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Ask ss to say again How much; How many questions
T: Write on the board
Ss: Copy
T: Ask Ss to look at a3 listen and write the letter of picture under the right heading Ss: Listen and write the letter of picture under the right heading Some Ss read their listening T: Check and correct 10’
15’
10’ 1. Some quantity adjs
- Some/a lot/a few+plural countable nouns
- Some/a lot of/a little+uncountable nouns Lots of = a lot of:
2. How much and How many question with some quantity adjs
How much + uncountable nouns?
How many+ countable nouns..?
*Model sentence:
+ How much rice is there?
There is some.
+ How many eggs are there?
There are some.
There are alot of/ lots of / a few eggs 3. Practice
*Keys:
A lot of.
Some.
A lot of.
A few.
A litte.
Some.
c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 16: MAN AND THE ENVIRONMENT
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: • By the end of the lesson, students will be able to :
+Use How much and How many question with some quantity adjs(some, a lot, a little, a few) and to know about castle and plant vocabulary
Countable and uncountable quantifiers
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer Ss: Go to the board and answer Questions:
1. Retell again the use of Some/a lot/a few/little 2. Make question with How much + uncountable nouns?/How many+ countable nouns..?
Key:
1. - Some/a lot/a few+plural countable nouns
- Some/a lot of/a little+uncountable nouns
2. + How much rice is there?
There is some.
+ How many eggs are there? Etc…
Others S giving the opinions
T: Correct the answers and give mark
* Warm up(2) Ask Ss to list some countable and uncountable nouns about food
Ss: Make a list
b. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Ask Ss to look at the picture in A2 and ask what does he do?
T: Ask Ss the questions in Vietnamese
?What do farmers produce?
Ss: Answer T: Read the passage
T: Ask Ss to find the new words
Ss: Find the new words
T: Introduce the new words
S: Look listen and copy
T: Read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Ask Ss to read the passage
Ss: Read T: Ask Ss to answer the questions Ss: Practice in pairs to answer the questions
S1:
T: Check and correct 20’
15’
1. New words
On the farm: ở trang trại
Animals: Động vật. Buffalo: Con trâu.
Cow: Con bò.
Pull a card: Kéo xe bò.
Produce: Sản xuất.
Plow: Cày.
2. Answer the questions a. He produces a lot of rice b. Yes, he does
c. He produces a little fruit
d. His cows produce a little milk
e. His chickens produce a lot of eggs c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 16: MAN AND THE ENVIRONMENT
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: • By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: Further practice in present progressive to talk about environment and know how to protect the invironment b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject and know how to protect the invironment 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer Ss: Go to the board and answer Questions:
1. Retell again the use of Some/a lot/a few/little 2. Answer the questions
a. How much rice does Mr. Hai produce?
b. How much fruit does he produce?
c. How many eggs do his chickens produce?
Key:
1. - Some/a lot/a few+plural countable nouns
- Some/a lot of/a little+uncountable nouns
2. a. He produces a lot of rice b. He produces a little fruit
c. His chickens produce a lot of eggs Others S giving the opinions
T: Correct the answers and give mark
* Warm up(2) Ask Ss to talk about some important problems that the man face nowadays
Ss: Talk about some important problems that the man face nowadays b. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Ask Ss to look at the picture in A4 and discuss the topic
T: Read the passage
T: Ask Ss to find the new words
Ss: Find the new words
T: Introduce the new words
S: Look listen and copy
T: Read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Ask Ss to read the passage
Ss: Read
T: Introduce the questions with why and because Ss: Listen and copy
T: Ask Ss to answer the questions
Ss: Practice in pairs to answer the questions
S1: Why do we need more land? S2: Because……….
T: Check and correct 20’
15’
1. New words
More: Nhiều hơn.
Need: Cần.
Land: Đất.
Cut down: Chặt xuống.
Burn: Đốt .
Destroy: Phá huỷ.
Asian: Châu á.
Danger: Nguy hiểm
2. Answer the questions with why and because Why + V…..?: Tại sao?
Because: Tại vì a. Because there are more people b. Because they need more fields
c. Because we are destroying plants and animals c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 16: MAN AND THE ENVIRONMENT
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to :
+Know some vocabulary about the environment and some imperatives about the environment. Pollution of invironment, protect the invironment and present progressive b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject and know how to protect the invironment 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer Ss: Go to the board and answer Questions:
1. Why do we need more land?
2. Why do farmer burn the forest?
3. Why are these Asian animal in danger?
Key:
1. Because there are more people
2. Because they need more fields
3. Because we are destroying plants and animals Others S giving the opinions
T: Correct the answers and give mark
* Warm up(2) Ask Ss to talk about some important problems that the man face nowadays
Ss: Talk about some important problems that the man face nowadays b. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Ask Ss to look at the picture in B1 and discuss the topic
T: Read the passage
T: Ask Ss to find the new words
Ss: Find the new words
T: Introduce the new words
S: Look listen and copy
T: Read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Ask Ss to read the passage
Ss: Read
T: Introduce the questions with and ask Ss to read carefully then answer the questions Ss: Practice in pairs to answer the questions
S1: Ask S2: Answer
T: Check and correct
T: Ask ss to look at the pictures on page 170 and say what we should or shouldn't do to our environment?
T: Introduce some new words
T: Ask Ss do matching
Ss: Do matching
T: Check and correct 15’
10’
10’ 1. New words
Invironment: Môi trường.
Wild animal: Động vật hoang dã.
Wasting: Phí phạm.
Coal: Than dầu.
Oil: Dầu.
Gas: Ga.
Power: Điện năng.
Gases: Các chất khí.
Trash: Rác.
Ocean: Đại dương.
2. Answer the questions a. Because we are destroying the forests
b. Gases are polluting the air
c. The pollution come from coal, oil, gas
d.We are producing too much trash
3. Listen and read Pick: Hái
Throw: Ném, vứt
Keep off the grass: Ko dẫm lên cỏ Save water:
Collcet the paper Follow these rule:Theo quy định.
A-c B-f C-a D-h E-e F-b G-g H-d
c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 16: MAN AND THE ENVIRONMENT
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to :
+ Know some vocabulary about the environment, Pollution of invironment, protect the invironment + Use Should, shouldn’t; talk about some activities to protect the envi ronment in Vietnam
b. skill: Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject and know how to protect the invironment 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer Ss: Go to the board and answer Questions:
1. Why are wild animals and plants in danger?
2. What is polluting the air?
3. Where does the pollution come from?
d. What is polluting the land, the rivers and the oceans
Key:
1. Because we are destroying the forests
2. Gases are polluting the air
3. The pollution come from coal, oil, gas
4.We are producing too much trash
Others S giving the opinions
T: Correct the answers and give mark
Warm up(2)
T: Ask ss to do the Matching A B Collect Trash on the street Don't pick Water Don't throw The grass Save Flowers Keep off paper b. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Ask Ss to look at B4 and discuss the topic
T: Read the passage
T: Ask Ss to find the new words
Ss: Find the new words
T: Introduce the new words
S: Look listen and copy
T: Read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Ask Ss to read the passage
Ss: Read in groups S1: Lan
S2: Ba
S3: Nga
S4: Nam
T: Introduce should and shouldn't
Ss: Listen and copy
T: Ask Ss to write rules for the pictures Ss: Practice to write rules for the pictures T: Check and correct
10’
10’ 15’
1. New words
Leaves: Xả, bỏ.
Put: Để, Đặt.
Trash can: Thùng rác
2. Should and shouldn’t Shold/sholdn’t + V + O
E.g:We should save water
3. Read Recycle: Tái chế.
Waste food: Thức ăn thừa.
Feed: Cho ăn.
Pig: Con Lợn.
Empty: Trống rỗng.
Scrap: Phế thải.
Metal: Sắt thép.
Plastic Nhựa.
*Answer the questions a. In VN, we collect empty bottles, cans, waste paper, scrap metal and old plastice and recycle them
b, We feed it to pigs
c. Factories recycle them
d. Yes I do
e. We collect waste paper for school mini- project(kế hoạch nhỏ) c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
1. Objectives:
a. knowledge:
By the End of the lesson Ss can cousolidate vocabulary and structures on topics they have learnt from U14-> U16
Further practice in Present simple,present progressive,comparative and superlative forms of adjs and indefinite quantifiers:a few/a little/a lot/lots
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c . Behavior:
Student like studying the subject and use English correctly
2. Preparations: a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture, chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids.
3. Steps of teaching:
a. Oral test: 2’
* Warm up Ask Ss to talk about the adv of freequency
c. New lesson: 40’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Aks Ss to look at the book (p 174) then retell the simple tense
Ss: Look at the book (p 174) then retell the simple tense
T: Guide Ss to do ex in group
Ss: Do ex
T: Check and correct
E.g: a. Nam:Where are you from?
Tom:I am from Canada
Nam:Do you speak Vietnamese?
Tom:No,I don't.I speak English and
French
T: Aks Ss to retell the present progressivetense
Ss: Retell T: Guide Ss to do ex
Ss: Do ex
T: Check and correct
E.g: a. What is her name?
Her name is Susan
T: Introduce the structures of The comparative and superlative form of short adjectives Ss: Look listen and copy
T: Ask Ss to do ex Ss: Do ex
T: Check and correct
adj comparative superlative Long Short Tall Small Big High
thick Longer Shorter Taller Smaller Bigger Higher
thicker The longest The shortest The tallest The smallest The biggest The highest
The thickest T: Aks Ss to retell the use of Some/a lot/a few/little Ss: Retell
T: Guide Ss to do ex
T: Ask ss to complete the passage in exercise
4 with a partner
*The street of HN are very busy.There is a lots of traffic. Most people only *The street of HN are very busy.There is a lots of traffic. Most people only have a little money to
spend on transportation. As a result,there are only a few private cars on the roads.
The bike is the cheapest form of transportation,so there are a lots of bikes. There are a lots of motobikes, too. There are a lots of taxis, but they are expensive
Ss: Do ex
T: Check and correct 10’
10’
10’
10’
I. Present simple tense ( Thì hiện tại đơn) 1. Grammar
(+) S + V / Vs, es + O.
(-) S + do/ does + not + O…
(?) Do / Does + S + V…?
Yes, S + Do/does
No, S + Don’t/doesn’t
2. Practice exercise1 b. speaks
c. speaks Chinese d.speaks Japenese
e.speaks Vietnamese f.speaks English
II. Present progressive tense
( thì hiện tại tiếp diễn)
1. Grammar (+) : S + am / is / are + V-ing + O
(-) : S + am /is /are + not +V-ing + O
(?) : Am / is /are + S + V-ing + O?
2. Practice excerise 2 b.lives
c.is-is staying d.is
e.does-teaches
f.does-teach-doesn't- teaches
III. Adjectives: Comparatives and superlatives a. Comparative: short adj+er
big→bigger
small→smaller
S1 +be +short adj-er +than +S2
E.g: Hoa is taller than Nga
b. superlative: short adj + est
big→bigest
small→smallest S + tobe + the + adj-est
E.g: Hoa is the tallest
Big = > bigger = > the biggest.
2. Practice excerise 3
a. longer-the longest
b. the longest c. the tallest-taller-the tallest
d. the biggest-bigger-the IV. Some quantity adjs
- Some/a lot/a few+plural countable nouns
- Some/a lot of/a little+uncountable nouns
Lots of = a lot of
c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
1. Objectives:
a. knowledge:
• By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: further practice with the verb "To be" in present simple tense,asking and answering about quantity,some i mperatives;asking and aswering about things with This/That/These/Those and quesstion words; Possesive pronouns and greeting
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c . Behavior:
Student like studying the subject and use English correctly. Ss have feeling that It's easy to learn the subject 2. Preparations: a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture, chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids.
3. Steps of teaching:
a. Oral test: 2’
* Warm up Ask ss to play Simon say with some imperatives
a.come in b.sit down
c.stand up d.open your book e.close your book f.bye/good by e
c. New lesson: 40’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Ask ss to work in groups and practice greeting each other by using some greeting sentences
1.Hello
2.How are you?I'm fine ,thanks
3.Good morning ..
Ask ss to revise the meaning and form of the verb"To be" am/are/is
-Ask ss to give examples
E.g:I'm eleven years old
-Ask them to read the answers and the questions from h to n on page 176
Ss:Work in groups and practice with a partner
T: Check and correct
T: Request Ss to say again the way of asking and answering about quantity then ask them to give examples
Ss: Give examples then do ex
T: Check and correct
T: Point to things and practice asking and answering with This/That/These/Those
-Ask ss to practice asking and answering about things in the class
E.g:What is this? -This is a table
T: Call on some pairs to practice to class
Ss: Practice T: Revise some question words then ask Ss to practice themselves
Ss: Practice
T: Ask Ss to revise Prossessive pronouns Ss: Retell
T: Ask ss to make sentences with these possessive pronouns Ss: Make sentence
10’
8’
10’
8’ 4’ I. Present simple tense with tobe 1. Grammar
(+) S + am/is/are + O.
(-) S + am/is/are + not + O…
(?)am/is/are + S + O?
Yes, S + am/is/are No, S + am/is/are + not 2. Practice exercise1 E.g:S1:Hello!my name is Lan
S2:Hi,Lan!My name is Nga
How are you,Lan?
S1:I'm fine,Thanks and you?
S2:Fine,thanks
Ec… II. There There is + DT số it There are + DT số nhiều
There is one
There are two
III. This/that/these/those
*Note:This/That+singular countable nouns
These/Those+plural countable nouns
+This/These to talk about thing that is near the speaker
+That/Those to talk about thing that far from the speaker
IV. Question words What/how/where/when…..
Eg: S1: How old are you?
S: I’m 12
Etc…
V. Prossessive pronouns
I You We They She He It
My your our their her his its
c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
1. Objectives:
a. knowledge:
• By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: Further practice in present simple tense,days of the week; some modal verbs; adverb of frequency and indefinite quantifiers
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c . Behavior:
Student like studying the subject and use English correctly. Ss have feeling that It's easy to learn the subject 2. Preparations: a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture, chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids.
3. Steps of teaching:
a. Oral test: 2’
* Warm up T: Ask Ss to find in the book which part use present simple tense c. New lesson: 40’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Ask ss to say again the use and form of the present simple tense. Guide ss to read part 9,14,19,25 and 30 chorally
Ss: Retell and read
T: Ask ss to work in pairs, practice asking and asnwering the Qs about themselves
Ss: Practtice
T: Guide Ss to retell days of the week
Ss: Retell
T: Guide Ss to practice ask and answer about subjectat school with “when” T: Show the Ly's timetable and ask ss to practice asking and answering about her with a friend
E.g:S1:When does Ly have English?
S2:She has E on Monday and Friday
T: Call on some pairs to practice
T: Ask Ssto retell Adverbs of frequency T: Call on some pairs to practice to class
Ask ss to work in pairs and practice asking and answering about their habits
E.g:S1:How often do you help your mom?
S2:I often help my mom
T: Call on some ss to practice in front of the class
And ask ss to say again the way of offering and giving advice
Ss: Practice in pairs T: Ask Ss to retell modal verbs
Ss: Retell
T: Ask ss to give some countble and uncountable nouns
T: Revise the way of using a/an/some/any/a few/a little,a lot/lots of
Ss: Retell
10’
8’
5’’
5’ 8’
4’
I. Present simple tense ( Thì hiện tại đơn) 1. Grammar
(+) S + V / Vs, es + O.
(-) S + do/ does + not + O…
(?) Do / Does + S + V…?
Yes, S + Do/does
No, S + Don’t/doesn’t
2. Practice Do you like noodles? Yes, I do
Ec… II. Days of the week Monday; Tuesday; Wednesday; Thursday; Friday; Saturday; Sunday
Form:
When do we have + subject?
We’ve it on + day in the week.
Does/ do + S + on + ....
Eg : When do we have english ?
We have english on Tuesday, Thursday and Saturday
III. Adverbs of frequency Always,usually, often Etc…
IV. Would/want/need S+Would+Like+O
E.g: What do you want/need?
I'd like an apple
V. Modal verbs: can/must/should Can/must/should + V + O
Giving advice
S+Should/shouldn't+V+O
VI. Indefinite quantifiers
A/an/some/any/a few/a little,a lot/lots of
E.g:apple,banana,orange, meat, rice…
c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
1. Objectives:
a. knowledge:
• By the end of the lesson, students will be able to :
further practice in the present progressive tense;preposition;adjectives;comparative and superlative forms;expressing a future action;weather and the seasons
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c . Behavior:
Student like studying the subject and use English correctly. Ss have feeling that It's easy to learn the subject 2. Preparations: a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture, chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids.
3. Steps of teaching:
a. Oral test: 2’
* Warm up T: Ask Ss to retell some prepositions Ss: Retell: in/on /next to/etc… c. New lesson: 40’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Ask Ss to retell the present progressive tense
Ss: Retell
T: Ask ss to give examples
T: Guide ss to read part 15 and 27
Ss: Read
T: Ask ss to work in pairs and practice the Qs about themselves. Call on some pairs to practice to class
Ss: Practice Ask ss to say again the way of expressing
a future action
-Ask them to give examples
E.g:?What are you going to do?
I'm going to visit Hue
T: Ask ss to play Noughts and Crosses
Ss: Play game
T: Ask ss some Qs
1.Which season do you like best?
2.Why?
T: Ask ss the question:What's the weather like in the[spring]?
T: Request ss to write a short paragraph about the season they like best T: Ask Ss to retell the adjs
Ss: Retell
T: Ask Ss to give ex
Ss: Give ex
Ex: He is tall
T: Use the picture and ask ss to compare the house and the store
E.g:The house is taller than the store
-Ask them to say again the superlative and comparative form of adjs
-Request ss to make 5sentences using these forms to compare their friends E.g:Hoa is taller than Lan
Hung is the tallest person 10’
8’
8’
6’
8’
I. Present progressive tense 1. Grammar
(+) S + tobe + V-ing
(-) S + tobe + not + V-ing
(?) tobe + S + V-ing?
Yes, S + tobe / No, S + tobe + not
I am + V-ing
She/he/it + is + V-ing
You/we/they + are + V-ing
E.g(+)We are learning English now
(-)I'm not reading book
(?)What is he doing?
2. Practice What are you doing?
I'm reading an English book Ec… II. Going to What + is /are /am + S + going to + do? ( S + is /are /am + going to + V
E.g:?What are you going to do?
+I'm going to visit Hue
III. Weather and seasons Hot; warm; cool; cold; summer etc… E.g:I like spring.It's warm.I often go
fishing and go camping with my friends IV. Adjectives Big; sall; etc…
V. Comparative and superlative forms
1. Comparative: short adj+er
big→bigger
small→smaller
S1 +be +short adj-er +than +S2
E.g: Hoa is taller than Nga
2. superlative: short adj + est
big→bigest/small→smallest
S + tobe + the + adj-est
E.g: Hoa is the tallest
c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
PAGE 5
Food stall(n): Quán ăn nhỏ
Arrive(v): Đến
Farm(n): Trang trại
Vegetable(n): Rau
Take(v): Mang, đưa
2. Answer the questions
a. He’s a truck driver
b. He’s going to a farm.
c. A famer is wating for him.
d. He’s taking the vegetable to the market
e. He’s eating breakfast.
f. He’s eating breakfast at a food stall
2. Listen and repeat
Copy(v): Sao, chộp
Correct(v): chữa
Ba is doing his homeWork.
Yes, he is.
No. he isn’t.
Tuan is play soccer.
No, they aren’t.
c. Summary: 2’
T: Retells the content of the lesson
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
Learn the lesson
Do exercise in your work book.
Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 8:OUT AND ABOUTPeriod 47: C. Road signs (C1,2)
1. Objectives:
a. knowledge:
Talk about what they are allow to do and not allow to do on the road sign using: can’t and can. Traffic vocabularies
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c . Behavior:
Student like studying the subject and use English correctly
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture, chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids.
3. Steps of teaching:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer
Ss: Go to the board and answer
Questions:
a. What does Mr. Quang do?
b. Where is he going at 5 in the morning?
c. Who is waiting for him?
d. Where is he taking the vegetable?
e. What is he doing at 7 o’clock?
Key:
a. He’s a truck driver
b. He’s going to a farm.
c. A famer is wating for him.
d. He’s taking the vegetable to the market
e. He’s eating breakfast.
Others S giving the opinions
T: Correct the answers and give mark
* Warm up: (3)
T: Ask the Ss to look at the picture and ask
? Who is this?
? What is he doing?
Ss: Look at the picture and answer
T: Today we’ll learn about road signs
b. New lesson: (35’)
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Ask the Ss to look at the picture C1 and ask
What does this man do?
Why does he ask the man to stop?
What does this sign mean?
Ss: Look and answer
T: Introduce the new words
T: Use picture to introduce other new words
(road signs) the same
Ss: Listen and write
T: Read Ss listen and repeat
T: Check and correct
T: Ask some Ss to read the new words
Ss: Read
T: Guide Ss to read the passage
Ss: Read before the class
T: Introduce the modal verbs can and can’t
Ss: Listen and coppy
T: Give ex and ask Ss give Ex
Ss: Give ex
T: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss Look at C2 and add can or can’t
Ss: do ex
Some pairs read aloud the sentences that they have done
Others Ss giving the opinions.
T: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss practice ao answer about road signs
Show the poster of some road signs and ask ss to practice with a friend
Ss: Practice in pairs
S1What does this sign say?
S2: It mean: You can park here.
You can’t park
Etc…
T: Call some pairs read aloud the sentences they have done then correct the answers
T: Correct if necessary
15’
7’
13’
1. Road signs
a. New words
Policeman: Cảnh sỏt.
Difficult: Khú.
Sign: Biển bỏo
Oneway: Đương 1 chiều
To park: Đỗ.
To turn left: Rẽ trỏi.
To turn right: Rẽ phải .
To Go a head: Đi thẳng.
b. Can and can’t
Can(v): Cú thể
Can’t(v): Ko thể
+) S + can + V-infi
-) S + can not + V-infi
can not = can’t
Eg. I can ride a motobike
I can’t drive a car
You can park here
You can't go into that street
2. What do road signs mean?
a. You can turn left.
b. You can’t turn right
c. You can go a head.
d. You can’t ride a motorbike
3. Practice
What does this sign say?
It mean: You can park here.
You can’t park
c. Summary: 2’
T: Retells the content of the lesson
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
Learn the lesson
Do exercise in your work book.
Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 8:OUT AND ABOUTPeriod 48: C. Road signs (C3,4,5)
1. Objectives:
a. knowledge:
Talk about obgation/ prohibition with must/ must not
Traffic vocabularies
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c . Behavior:
Student like studying the subject and use English correctly
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture, chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids.
3. Steps of teaching:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer
Ss: Go to the board and answer
Questions:
Show the poster of some road signs and ask Ss to answer
Key:
Oneway
You can park here
You can’t park
Etc…
Others S giving the opinions
T: Correct the answers and give mark
* Warm up: (3)
T: Ask the Ss to look at the picture and ask
? Where is this?
Ss: Look at the picture and answer ‘ngó tư’
T: Today we’ll learn more about road signs
b. New lesson: (35’)
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Ask the Ss to look at the picture C3 and ask in Vietnamese then introduce the new words
?cảnh này ở đâu ?
Ss: Ngó tư
T: in English they say ‘Interection’
? khi đi qua ngó tư khi giao nhau chúng ta thường được cảnh báo gỡ ?
Ss: Nguy hiểm
T: in English they say dangerous
? khi ta tham gia giao thụng mà bất cẩn phóng nhanh vượt ẩu thỡ điều gỡ sẽ sảyra?
Ss: Tai nạn
T: in English they say accident
? khi đén ngó tư , đường giao nhau gặp biển bỏo nguy hiểm ta phải ?
Ss: Đi chậm
T: in English they say slow down > Ss: Look and answer
T: Introduce the new words
T: Use picture to introduce other new words
(road signs) the same
Ss: Listen and write
T: Read Ss listen and repeat
T: Check and correct
T: Ask some Ss to read the new words
Ss: Read
T: Guide Ss to read the passage
Ss: Read before the class
T: Introduce the modal verbs must and must not
Ss: Listen and coppy
T: Ask Ss look at C4 and listen
Ss: listen and nuber the sign
T: Correct if necessary 25’
10’
1. Road signs
a. New words
Interection(n): Ngó tư
Dangerous(adj): Nguy hiểm
Accident(n): Tai nạn
slow down > Stop(v): Dừng lại
b. Must and must not
Must(v): Được phép
must not (v): Ko được phép
+ Yêu cầu ai đó phải làm việc gỡ?
S + must + v
+ yêu cầu ai đó ko được phép làm việc gỡ
S + must not (mustn't) + v…
Eg. You must stop
You must not go ahead
2. Listen
1-c: You can’t turn right here
2-d: There’s a stop sign. I must stop
3-h: You can’t park here
4-a: You must slow down. There’s an intersection
5-g; You can go a head
6-b; we can turn left
7-f: You can’t ride motobike
c. Summary: 2’ T: Retells the content of the lesson
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
Learn the lesson
Do exercise in your work book.
Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
1. Objectives:
a. knowledge:
By the enf of the lesson Ss can consolidate words and forms from U6- U8 do ex well
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c . Behavior:
Student like studying the subject and use English correctly
2. Preparations: a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture, chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids.
3. Steps of teaching:
a. Oral test: 5’
* Warm up: T: Ask the Ss to retell all the grammar structure that they have learn from U6 toU8 Ss: Retell
b. New lesson: 37’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Ask Ss retell the present simple tense
Ss: Retell
T: Write on the board
T: Ask Ss to do ex 1 in the book
Ss: Listen to teacher and do ex in the book
Ss: Work individually to do ex
T: correct their mistakes
T: Ask Ss retell the present progressive tense
Ss: Retell
T: Write on the board
T: Ask Ss to do ex 2 in the book
Ss: Listen to teacher and do ex in the book
Ss: Work individually to do ex
Other Ss give command
T: correct their mistakes
T: Ask Ss to do ex 5 in the book contract present simple tense and present progressive tense
Ss: Listen to teacher and do ex in the book
Ss: Work pairs to do ex
Other Ss give command
T: correct their mistakes
T: Ask Ss retell the prepositions of place
Ss: Retell
T: Write on the board
T: Ask Ss to do ex 3 in the book
Ss: Listen to teacher and do ex in the book
Ss: Work in groups to do ex
Other Ss give command
T: correct their mistakes
T: Ask Ss retell must and must not
Ss: Retell
T: Write on the board
T: Ask Ss to do ex 6 in the book
Ss: Listen to teacher and do ex in the book
Ss: Work individually to do ex
Other Ss give command
T: correct their mistakes
T: Ask Ss retell can and can’t
Ss: Retell
T: Write on the board
T: Ask Ss to do ex 7 in the book
Ss: Listen to teacher and do ex in the book
Ss: Work individually to do ex
Other Ss give command
8’
10’
8’
6’
5’ I. Present simple tense
1. Grammar
+) S (I / you / we/ they) + V
+) She / he / it + V (s/es)
-) I/ you / we / they + do not + V - listen copy.
-) She / he/ it+ does not + V
?)Do + I / you / we / they + V?
Yes, S + do / No, S + do + not
?)Does + she / he / it + V?
Yes, S + does/No, S + does + not
- Thỡ hiện tại đơn diễn đạt thói quen hay hành động thường sảy ra thường lập đi lập lại
2. Practic. Exercise 1 a. go, go
b. travel, travels
c. walk, don’t walk, does …walk, walks
II. Present progressive
1. Grammar
(+) S + tobe + V-ing
(-) S + tobe + not + V-ing
(?) tobe + S + V-ing?
Yes, S + tobe / No, S + tobe + not
I am + V-ing
She/he/it + is + V-ing
You/we/they + are + V-ing
Usage: Thỡ HT tiếp diễn diễn tả hành động đang diễn ra tại thời điểm nói thường có từ ‘now’ bây giờ; ‘at the moment’ ngay lúc này
Ex: I’m playing video games
2. Practice.
*Exercise 2
a. is riding; b. Are waiting; c. Is watching;
d. Are playing; e. Is listening; f. Are walking; g. Is traveling;
*Exercise 5. Contract present simple tense and present progressive tense a. Play, is playing; b. rides, is riding
c. go, are going; d. walk, am walking
e. drives, is driving
III. Prepositions
a. Prepositions of place
to the left of; in; behind; in front of;
to the right of; opposite;
b. Exercise 4
In infront of / behind /opposite / to the right of/ to the left of.
VI. Must and must not
1. Grammar
+ Yêu cầu ai đó phải làm việc gỡ?
S + must + v
+ yêu cầu ai đó ko được phép làm việc gỡ
S + must not (mustn't) + v…
2. Practice
a. must; must not
b. must; must not; must not
c. must; must not
V. Can and can’t
1. Grammar
Can(v): Cú thể
Can’t(v): Ko thể
+) S + can + V-infi
-) S + can not + V-infi
can not = can’t
2. Practice
Can’t; can; can’t
c. Summary: 2’ T: Retells the content of the lesson
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
Learn the lesson
Do exercise in your work book.
Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
1. Objectives:
a. knowledge:
By the end of the lesson Ss can consolidate and prepare well for test of the first term
b. skill:
Language focus, writing, speaking and reading.
c . Behavior:
Student like studying the subject and use English correctly
2. Preparations: a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, board, picture, chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids.
3. Steps of teaching:
a. Oral test: 5’
* Warm up: T: Ask the Ss to retell all the grammar structure that they have learn from unit 1 This/that/these/thoes and tobe
Ss: Retell
b. New lesson: 37’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Ask Ss retell how to use of This/that/these/thoes Ss: Retell
T: Write on the board
T: Ask Ss give example
Ss: Give example
These are my teachers
Are they your teachers?
Yes, they are or No, they are not
T: Ask Ss to do ex
Ss: Listen to teacher and do ex Ss: Work individually to do ex
T: correct their mistakes
T: Ask Ss retell to be
Ss: Retell
T: Write on the board
T: Ask Ss to do ex
Ss: Listen to teacher and do ex
* Exercise 1. Complete the sentences
This/Loan’s family
There/4people/her family
Her father/a doctor
He/40
Her mother/teacher
She/thirty
* Exercise 2. Put am, is, are in the blank
a. I ....... a student
b. They .......... books.
c. He ........ Nam?
d. This ......... my pen
Other Ss give command
T: correct their mistakes
17’
20’
I. This/that/these/thoes
1. Grammar
This: Đây. chỉ vật ở gần
That: Kia. chỉ vật ở xa
These là số nhiều của This
Those là số nhiều của that Usage: Dùng để giới thiệu về người và vật
This/that + is + N/these/thoes+are+N(s;es)
Is + This/that + N?/Are+ these/thoes+N?
Yes. This/that/it + is/ Yes. They are
No. This/that/it +is + not/No. They are not
E.g: This is my teacher
Is this your teacher?
Yes, this is
or No, this isn’t
2. Practic
Exercise 1( page 14, 15)
a. a board
b. a ruler
etc …
Exercise 2( page 15) a. Is this your classroom?
b. Is this your bag?
Etc…
II. To be
1. Grammar
(+) S + tobe + N
(-) S + tobe + not + N
(?) tobe + S +N?
Yes, S + tobe / No, S + tobe + not
Is not = isn’t / Are not = aren’t
I am
She/he/it + is
You/we/they + are
Ex: I’m a student
She is a teacher
Is she a teacher?
Yes, She is / No. She is not
She is not a teacher
2. Practice.
Key: * Exercise 1. Complete the sentences
a. is; b. are, in; c. is; d. is; e. is; f. is
* Exercise 2. Put am, is, are in the blank
a. am; b. are; c. is; d. is
c. Summary: 2’ T: Retells the content of the lesson
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
Learn the lesson
Do again all exercises in your work book.
Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
1. Objectives:
a. knowledge:
By the end of the lesson Ss can consolidate and prepare well for test of the first term
b. skill:
Language focus, writing, speaking and reading.
c . Behavior:
Student like studying the subject and use English correctly
2. Preparations: a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, board, picture, chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids.
3. Steps of teaching:
a. Oral test: 5’
* Warm up: T: Ask the Ss to retell all the grammar structure that they have learn from unit 1 How many and time
Ss: Retell
b. New lesson: 37’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Ask Ss retell how to use of how many Ss: Retell
T: Write on the board
T: Ask Ss give example
Ss: Give example
How many people in your family?
There are 4
T: Ask Ss to practice
Ss: Listen to teacher and practice
T: correct their mistakes
T: Ask Ss retell ask and answer about time
Ss: Retell
T: Write on the board
T: Ask Ss to practice ask and answer about time
Ss: Practice 17’
20’
I. How many
1. Grammar
How many + Ns + are there... ?
There are + Ns.
There is an / an + N
E.g. How many students are there in your class?
There are 34 students in my class.
How many people are there in your family?
There are 4
2. Practice
a. How many people in your family?
b. How many people are there in your class?
II. Time
What time is it? Bõy giờ là mấy giờ
a. Giờ chẵn:
It’s + số giờ + o’clock
e.g. What time is it:
It’s eight o’clock.
b. Giờ lẻ: Có giờ hơn và giờ kém
Giờ hơn: Có 2 cách
+ Cỏch 1:
It’s + số giờ + số phỳt
e.g. What time is it:
It’s eight thirty.
+ Cỏch 2:
It’s + số phỳt + past + số giờ
e.g. What time is it:
It’s thirty past eight
Giờ kộm:
It’s + số phỳt + to + số giờ
e.g. What time is it:
It’s ten to eight
* Note: a quarter = fifteen: 15’
Half = thirty: 30’
e.g. What time is it:
It’s a quarter to eight
What time does Ba get up?
He gets up at 6 o’clock. c. Summary: 2’ T: Retells the content of the lesson
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
Learn the lesson
Do again all exercises in your work book.
Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
1. Objectives:
a. knowledge:
By the end of the lesson Ss can consolidate and prepare well for test of the first term
b. skill:
Language focus, writing, speaking and reading.
c . Behavior:
Student like studying the subject and use English correctly
2. Preparations: a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, board, picture, chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids.
3. Steps of teaching:
a. Oral test: 5’
* Warm up: T: Ask the Ss to retell all the grammar structure that they have learn from unit 1 Ss: Retell
b. New lesson: 37’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Ask Ss retell the present simple tense
Ss: Retell
T: Write on the board
T: Ask Ss to do ex
Exercise: Put the verb in the bracket with suitable form
a. he (go) to school by bike
b. she (walk) to school
c. they (go) to school by bus
d. We ( travel) by train
ss: Do ex
t: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss retell the wh’ questions
Ss: Retell
T: Write on the board
Ss: Listen and copy
T: Ask Ss retell the prepositions of place
Ss: Retell
T: Write on the board
T: Ask Ss describe the things around their house
Ss: Describe
15’
8’
14’
I. Present simple tense
1. Grammar
+) S (I / you / we/ they) + V
+) She / he / it + V (s/es)
-) I/ you / we / they + do not + V - listen copy.
-) She / he/ it+ does not + V
?)Do + I / you / we / they + V?
Yes, S + do / No, S + do + not
?)Does + she / he / it + V?
Yes, S + does/No, S + does + not
- Thỡ hiện tại đơn diễn đạt thói quen hay hành động thường sảy ra thường lập đi lập lại
2. Practice
Key:
a. he goes to school by bike
b. she walks to school
c. they go to school by bus
d. We travel by train
II. ‘Wh’ questions
Where; how; what; who; which; when
III. Prepositions
1. Prepositions of place
to the left of; in; behind; in front of;
to the right of; opposite;
2. Practice
My house is big/small
To the right of the house there is/are….
Etc… c. Summary: 2’ T: Retells the content of the lesson
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
Learn the lesson
Do again all exercises in your work book.
Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
1. Objectives:
a. knowledge:
By the end of the lesson Ss can consolidate and prepare well for test of the first term
b. skill:
Language focus, writing, speaking and reading.
c . Behavior:
Student like studying the subject and use English correctly
2. Preparations: a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, board, picture, chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids.
3. Steps of teaching:
a. Oral test: 5’
* Warm up: T: Ask the Ss to retell all the grammar structure that they have learn from unit 1
Present siple tense; present progressive tense and modal verbs: must, can Ss: Retell
b. New lesson: 37’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Ask Ss retell the present simple tense
Ss: Retell
T: Write on the board
T: Ask Ss to do ex
Ss: Do ex
Mai (be) a student. She(live) in Bac Yen. She(be) 11 years old. Every day she(get) up at 5.30. She (do) morning exercise at 5.45. She(brush) her teeth, (wash) her face and (have) breakfast at 6.30. She(go) to school at 6.45. the classes (start) at 7.00 and (end) at 11.30. She(go) home at 12.00 and (have) lunch at 12.30
T: Check and correct
Exercise: write about Minh's daily activities Activities Time Get up Have breakfast Go to school Play soccer Do home work Go to bed At 6.00 At 6.30 At 7.00 In the afternoon In the evening At 10.00 Minh gets up at 6.00.He has breakfast at 6.30.He goes to school at 7.00.He plays soccer in the afternoon,he does his home work in the T: Ask Ss retell present progressive
Ss: Retell
T: Write on the board
T: Ask Ss to practice to do ex
Ss: Practice Change the sentence from present simple tense to present progressive a. Do you play soccer?
b. She rides her bike
c. we walk to school
d. Does he play video games?
e. They load vegetable
15’
15’
7’ I. I. Present simple tense
1. Grammar
+) S (I / you / we/ they) + V
+) She / he / it + V (s/es)
-) I/ you / we / they + do not + V - listen copy.
-) She / he/ it+ does not + V
?)Do + I / you / we / they + V?
Yes, S + do / No, S + do + not
?)Does + she / he / it + V?
Yes, S + does/No, S + does + not
2. Practice
Is, lives, is, gets, does, brushes, washes, has, goes, start, end, goes, has
II. Present progressive
1. Grammar
(+) S + tobe + V-ing
(-) S + tobe + not + V-ing
(?) tobe + S + V-ing?
Yes, S + tobe / No, S + tobe + not
2. Practice.
Key: a. Are you playing soccer?
b. She is riding her bike
c. We are walking to school d. Is he playing video games?
e. They are loading vegetable
III. Must and can +) S + must / must not (mustn't) + V-infi
+) S + can / can not + V-infi
c. Summary: 2’ T: Retells the content of the lesson
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
Learn the lesson
Do again all exercises in your work book.
Prepare for the first term test
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Period 54. THE FIRST TERM TEST
1. Objectives
a. Knowledge:
All the language items from unit 1 to 8
b. Skill:
Reading, listening, writing, language focus
c. Behavior:
Educate students use English correctly to do the test
2. Questions
A. Listening (2 marks)
Listen and fill in the missing words from the box
In; To the left of; To the right of; in front of; Behind; Opposite Look at the house. A girl is ………. the house. A boy is waiting ……………. The house. There are some mountains ……………. the house and there is a market …………… it. …………….... the house there is a well, …………………. There are trees.
B. Reading (3 marks)
His name is Toan. He is a student. He lives in the city with his parents. Every morning he get up at six and goes to school at 6.45. His house is not near the school so he goes to school by bike.On the street, there is a restaurant, a store, a book store and a zoo. His house is next to a store
I. Answer the questions 1, What is his name?
2, Where does he live?
3, What time does he go to school?
4. How does he go to school?
II. Complete the sentences 1. His house is … …. .… ..…..so he goes to school by bike
2. On the street, there is a…………., ………….., ………….. and ……….
C. Language focus (3 marks)
I. Put the correct form of the words in bracket to complete the following sentences use simple tense 1. I (go) ……….. to school by bike
2. Lan (walk) ………… to school
II. Put the correct form of the words in bracket to complete the following sentences use present progressive tense 1. He …… ……. TV (watch)
2. They …… …….. by plane (travel)
III. Choose a suitable word then put in the blank to complete these questions
What where who how ………… old are you?
………… does she live?
………… is your name?
………… is that?
D. Writing (2ps). Write about your house 3. Answer key and mark guide
Listening (2 marks). Listen and fill in the missing words (2 mark)
In; in front of; Behind; Opposite; To the left of; To the right of;
B Reading I. Read the passage carefully then answer the questions
1. His name is Toan
2. He lives in the city with his parents 3. He goes to school at 6.45 4. He he goes to school by bike
II. Complete the sentences 1. His house is not near the school so he goes to school by bike
2. On the street, there is a restaurant, a store, a book store and a zoo C. Language focus (3 marks) Mỗi câu đúng 0.5 điểm I. Put the correct form of the words in bracket to complete the following sentences use simple tense 1. go ; 2. Walks
II. Put the correct form of the words in bracket to complete the following sentences use present progressive tense
1. is watching 2. are travelling
III. Choose a suitable word then put in the blank to complete these questions
1. how; 2. where; 3. What; 4. who D. Writing (2 marks). Chấm theo bài HS
Vớ dụ: My house is big/small. It’s old. It is in the country/city.
To the lefl of the house there is/are ………
To the right of the house there is/are ………
Behind the house there is/are ………
In front of the house there is/are ………
4. Comment
* Knowledge:
* Skill:
- Listening:
- Reading:
- Language focus:
- Writing:
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 9: The body
1. Objectives:
Knowledge:
Identify parts of the body
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test:5’
* Warm up: T: Show the picture of a man in the book page 96 and ask ss some questions about parts of the body. ?What is that? What are those? Ss: Look at the book and answer
T: Introduce the lesson.Today we will learn about parts of the body
c. New lesson: 37’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Introduce parts of the body by showing picture of a body and ask ? What is this ?
Ss: Observe and answer the questions in Vietnamese
T: Guide Ss to read the new words
Ss: Liten and repeat
T: Ask Ss practice to ask and answer about parts of the body
Ss: Work in pairs do the ex follow the ex.
S1: What are these?
S2: they are his arm
S1: What is that?
S2: It’s his head
Etc…
T: check and correct
T: ask Ss practice about themselves and answer about parts of the body
Ss: Practice in pairs
S1: What are these?
S2: they are my arm
S1: What is that?
S2: It’s my head
Etc…
T: check and correct 15’
12’
10’ 1. Parts of the body
Head: Đầu
Shouder: Vai
Arm: Cỏnh tay
Leg: cẳng chõn
Toe: Ngún chõn
Finger: Ngún tay
Body: Thõn thể
Chest: ngực
Hand: bàn tay
Foot: Bàn chõn → feet số nhiều của foot
2. Practice What is that? It is an his arm.
What are these? They/ These are his toes and fingers.
3. Futher practice
What are these? They are my legs
What is that? That is my arm
c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 9: The body
1. Objectives:
Knowledge:
Adjectives to describe apperance
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer
Ss: G to the board and answer
Question:
Can you name the parts of the body? What are they?
Key:
Head; Shouder; Arm; Leg; Toe; Finger; Chest; Body…..
Others Ss giving the opinions.
T: check and give mark
* Warm up(2’) T: Show the picture of people in A3 and ask ?What do they look like? Ss: Look at the book and answer
T: Introduce the lesson.Today we will learn about adjectives to describe apperance
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Introduce adj to describe people by showing picture of people in page 97 and ask ? What does she/he look like ?
Ss: Observe and answer the questions in Vietnamese
T: Guide Ss to read the new words
Ss: Liten and repeat
T: Ask Ss practice to talk about apearance of a peson
Ss: Work individually
S1: He’s short S2: She is tall
Etc…
T: check and correct
T: Ask Ss look at pictures in A4. Listen and choose the right picture
Ss: Listen and choose the right picture
Tape scrip: a. She is an old woman
b. He is a short man
c. He is a tall young man
d. She is a fat girl
some Ss answer before the class
T: check and correct
T: Ask Ss look at A5 and read the text about 2 people Chi and Tuan
Ss: Read and find the new words
T: Introduce the new words
T: Read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Ask Ss to read the text before the class
Ss: Practice reading
T: Ask Ss to read the dialouge in A6 then discribe Tuan in A5 depend on dialouge to ask and answer about Chi
Ss: Practice in pairs
S1: Who is that?
S2: That is Tuan
S1: What does he do?
S2:………
Etc
10’
5’
5’
8’
7’ 1. Listen and repeat
Thin: Gầy.
Short: Thấp.
Tall: Cao.
Heavy: Nặng cõn.
Fat: Bộo.
Light: Nhẹ cõn.
2. Practice S + tobe + adj
Ex: He’s short I’m fat
3. Listen. Which picture?
1. d; 2. c; 3. b; 4. a
4. Listen and read
Gymnast: Vận động viên thể dục.
Weak > < Strong: Yếu > < Khoẻ.
Wieght lifter: Vận động viên cử tạ
5. Practice
A: Who is that?
B: That is Tuan
A: What does he do?
B:………
Etc
c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 9: The body
1. Objectives:
Knowledge:
Face vocabulary to describe faces
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer
Ss: Go to the board and answer
Question:
Ask and answer about Tuan in A5
Key:
S1: Who is that?
S2: That is Tuan
S1: What does he do?
S2: He is weighlifter
S1: Is he short?
S2: yes he is
Others Ss giving the opinions.
T: check and give mark
* Warm up(2’) T: Show the picture of people in B1 and ask ?What is this ? Ss: Look at the book and answer
T: Introduce the lesson.Today we will learn about vocabulary to describe faces
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Introduce new words by showing picture in page 100 and ask ?What is this?
Ss: Observe and answer the questions in Vietnamese
T: Guide Ss to read the new words
Ss: Liten and repeat
T: Ask Ss to read
Ss: Read before the classs
T: check and correct their pronunciation
T: Guide Ss to practice to ask and answer about appearance by introducing the form
Ss: Listen and copy
T: ask Ss give example
Ss: Give example
S1: I have full lips
S2: He has short hair
Etc…
T: Ask Ss to do ex 1,2(page 85)in workbook
Ss: Do ex in workbook
T: Check and correct 20’
10’
5’
1. Listen and repeat
Face: Khuụn mặt
ear (s): Tai
hair: Túc
eye (s) Mắt.
nose: Mũi.
Mouth: Miệng
lip (s) Mụi.
tooth → teeth Răng.
Around face: Khuụn mặt trũn.
An oval face. Khuụn mặt trỏi xoan
Full lip: Môi đầy đặn.
Thin lip: Mụi mỏng
Long hair: túc dài.
Short hair: túc ngắn
2. Practice S + Have/has + adj + N
Ex: I have a round face
She has long hair
Etc…
3. Exercise
c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 9: The body
1. Objectives:
Knowledge:
Identify color to describe people and things
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer
Ss: Go to the board and answer
Question:
Retell the new words you learnt in last lesson
Key:
Face; ear(s); hair; eye(s); nose; Mouth; lip(s); tooth → teeth; Around face; An oval face; Full lip
Etc…
Others Ss giving the opinions.
T: check and give mark
* Warm up(2’) T: Use picture with color to ask Ss What color is it?
Ss: Look at the picture and answer
T: Introduce the lesson.Today we will learn vocabulary about color
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Introduce new words ?What is this?
Ss: Observe and answer the questions in Vietnamese
T: Write the new words
Ss: Listen and copy
T: Guide Ss to read the new words
Ss: Liten and repeat
T: Ask Ss to read
Ss: Read before the classs
T: check and correct their pronunciation
T: Introduce the form to ask and answer about color
T: Write on the board
Ss: Look, listen and copy
T: Ask Ss to give example
Ss: Give example
Ex: What color is his hair?
It’s brown
What color is his eyes?
They are green Etc…
T: Guide Ss to practice to ask and answer about color of hair and eyes of the picture in B3
Ss: Listen and practice in pairs
S1: What color is her hair?
S2: It’s black
Etc…
T: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss practice to ask and answer about themselves
Ss: practice 20’
15’
1. Color
Black: Đen
Yellow: Vàng
White: Trắng
Grey: Xỏm
Blue: Xanh dương
Red: Đỏ
Brown: Nõu
Green: Xanh lỏ cõy
Purple: Tớm
Orange: Cam
2. Practice What color + is + N?
It’s + color
What color + are + N?
They are + color
Ex: What color is her hair?
It’s black
What color is her eyes?
They are brown + What color is your hair?
It’s black
+ What color is your eyes?
They are brown
Etc… c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 9: The body
1. Objectives:
Knowledge:
Identify color to describe people and things
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer
Ss: Go to the board and answer
Question:
Retell the new words you learnt in last lesson
a. What color is your hair?
b. What color is your eyes?
Key:
Black; white; red …..
a. It’s black
b. They are brown
Others Ss giving the opinions.
T: check and give mark
* Warm up(2’) T: Ask 2 Ss go to the board to play game slap the board( use the words in B1,2) Ss: Play game
T: Introduce the lesson.Today we will practice more about adjectives to describe appearance of a person
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Ask Ss to look in the picture of Chi in the book and describe 5 sentences about Chi
Ss: Describe
She has long black hair.
She is tall.
She has a round face.
Her eye is brown.
She is thin. T: Read the text
Ss: Listen
T; Ask Ss to read the text
Ss: Read
T: Ask some Ss to read before the class
Ss: Read
T: Ask ss look at the questions about Chi in page 102 to ask and answer
Ss: Ask and answer in pairs
S1: Is Miss Chi’s hair long or short?
S2: a. It’s long
Etc…
T: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss look at A5 and listen
T: open the tape or T reads
Ss: Listen and write the letter of the picture
25’
10’
1. Listen and read
a. It’s long
b. her hair is black
c. Her eyes are brown.
d. It is small.
e. They are thin.
2. Listen
Tape transcrip:
1. He has short hair. He has a round face. He has big nose. He has full lips
2. He has short hair. He has an oval face. He has a small nose. He has thin lips
3. She has long hair. She has an oval face. He has a bis nose. She has thin lips
4. She has long hair. She has a round face. She has a small nose. She has full lips
1. c; 2. a; 3. d; 4. b
c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 10: Staying healthy
1. Objectives:
Knowledge:
Talk about feeling.
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer
Ss: Go to the board and answer
Question:
Describe 5 sentences about Chi
Key:
She has long black hair.
She is tall.
She has a round face.
Her eye is brown.
She is thin. Others Ss giving the opinions.
T: check and give mark
* Warm up(2’) T: Ask Ss look at the picture and ask
What are they doing?
How do they feel? Ss: Look and answer
T: Introduce the lesson.Today we learn about the feeling
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Ask Ss to look in the picture of people in the book and introduce the new words
T: Show the picture a and ask
What is he doing?
Ss: Anwer in Vietnamese. Cậu ấy ăn bánh mỡ
T: ? How does he feel?
Ss: Cậu ấy đói
T: Introduce the new word “ hungry”
T: Read and write on the board
T: Guide Ss to read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Introduce other new word the same
Some Ss read before the class
T: Check and correct their pronunciation
T: Introduce the form to ask and asnwer about felling
T: Write on the board
Ss: Listen and copy
T: Ask Ss to give example
Ss: Give example
Ex: How does he feel?
He is/feel hot
Some Ss practice
S1: How does she feel?
S2: She is/feels thirsty
T: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss look at a5 listen and match the name with the right picture
T: Open the tape or T reads
Ss: Listen and check
15’
10’
10’ 1. How do you feel?
Feel: Cảm thấy.
Hungry: Đói.
Thirsty: Khỏt.
Full: No.
Hot: Núng.
Cold: Lạnh.
Tired: Mệt mỏi.
2. Practice
How + do/does + S + feel? S + tobe/feel(s) + adj
Ex: How do you feel?
I am/feel hungry
How does she feel?
She is/feels thirsty
3. Listen
Tape transcrip:
Nhan is hungry. He’d like noodles
Phuong is thirsty. She’d like a drink
Ba is full
Huong is cold
Phuong b; Nhan a; Ba f; Huong d c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 10: Staying healthy
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: Talk about feeling. Talk about the things you want and need.
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer
Ss: Go to the board and answer
Question:
a. How does she feel?
b. How do they feel ?
c. How do you feel?
d. How does he feel?
Key:
a. She is thirsty
b. They are full
c. I’m cold
d. He is hungry
Others Ss giving the opinions.
T: check and give mark
* Warm up(2’) T: Ask Ss look at the picture and ask
Where are they?
What are they doing?
How do they feel? Ss: Look and answer
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Ask Ss to look in the picture of people in the book and answer
T: Introduce the new words
T: Read and write on the board
T: Guide Ss to read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Introduce other new word the same
Some Ss read before the class
T: Check and correct their pronunciation
T: Show the picture a and ask
What are they saying?
Ss: Anwer in Vietnamese.
T: Introduce the form “What would you like?” T: Write on the board
Ss: Listen and copy
T: Ask Ss to give example
Ss: Give example
Ex: What would you like?
I’d like some orange juice
Some Ss practice
S1: How does she feel?
S2: She is/feels thirsty
S1: What would she like?
She’d like some orange juice
Etc…
T: Check and correct
T: Guide Ss to read the dialouge
T reads Ss listen and repeat
T: Ask Ss to read before the class
Some Ss practice reading before the class
T: Listen and check T: Ask Ss look at a5 listen and match the name with the right picture
T: Open the tape or T reads
Ss: Listen and check
T: Ask Ss to read the dialouge again then practice to ask and answer about people in the dialouge
Ss: Practice to ask and answer
S1: How does Nam feel?
S2: He feels hungry
S1: What would he like?
S2: He’d like some noodles
Etc…
T: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss look at A6 listen and repeat
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Ask Ss to make new dialouge depend on the dialouge in the book
Ss: Make new dialouge depend on the dialouge in the book
T: Check and correct
15’
10’
10’ 1. What would you like?
a. New words
Some: Một vài.
Orange juice: Nước cam.
Noodle:
Drink: Uống.
Want: Muốn
Need: Cần
Noodles: Mỡ, phở
b. Grammar
How do/ does + S + feel?
S + be/ Feel + adj.
What would you like? =
What do/ does +S+want?: Muốn, Cần gỡ
S + want/ like/ need + N.
Ex: What would you like? Bạn muốn cỏi gỡ?
I’ d like some noodles: Tôi muốn ăn phở
2. Practice
How does Nam feel?
He feels hungry
What would he like?
He’d like some noodles
Etc…
3. Listen and repeat
a. Mai: What the matter. Nam?
Nam: I’m hot
Mai: What do you want?
Nam: I want a cold drink
b. Lan: What the matter. Na?
Na: I’m hungry
Lan: What do you want?
Na: I want some noodles
c. Linh: What the matter. Tung?
Tung: I’m thirsty
Linh: What do you want?
Tung: I want a drink c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 10: Staying healthy
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: Name of food and drink
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer
Ss: Go to the board and answer
Question:
a. How does she feel?
b. What would she like?
c. Would she like noodles?
d. What would you like?
e. Would you like a drink?
Key:
a. She is thirsty
b. She’d like some orange juice
c. No, she wouldn’t
d. I’d like noodles
e. Yes, I would
Others Ss giving the opinions.
T: check and give mark
* Warm up(2’) T: Ask Ss look at the picture and ask
What are these?
Ss: Look and answer
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Ask Ss to look in the picture in the book and
introduce the new words
T: Read and write on the board
T: Guide Ss to read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Introduce other new word the same
Some Ss read before the class
T: Check and correct their pronunciation
T: Guide Ss to practice
Ss: Practice to ask and answer
S1: What would you like?
S2: I’ d like some oranges
Etc…
T: Listen and check T: Ask Ss look at B2 listen and repeat
Ss: Listen and repeat
Some Ss practice reading before the class
T: Listen and check
T: Introduce “some” and “any”
Ss: Look, listen and copy T: Give example then ask Ss to give example
Ss: Give example
T: Check and correct
T; Ask Ss practice in pair to ask and answer
Ss: Practice
S1: Is there any water?
S2: Yes, there is some water
Etc…
T: Check and correct 15’
10’
10’
1. New words Apple: Quả tỏo.
Orange: Quả cam.
Banana: Quả chuối.
Meat: Thịt.
Water: Nước.
Milk: Sữa.
Vegetable: Rau.
What would you like?
I’ d like some meat
Etc…
2. Listen and repeat
a. Practice
b. Grammar
Some: đứng trước câu khẳng định
Any: đứng trước câu phủ định và cõu hỏi
+ Is there any…?
Yes, there is some…
No, there isn’t any…
+ Are there any…?
Yes, there are some…
No, there aren’t any… 2. Practice
+ Is there any water?
Yes, there is some water
+ Are there any oranges?
No, there aren’t any oranges c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 10: Staying healthy
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: Name of food and drink
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer
Ss: Go to the board and answer
Question:
a. How do you feel?
b. What would you like?
c. Would you like a drink?
d. Are there any apples?
e. Is there any meat?
Key:
a. I’m thirsty
b. I’d like some orange juice
c. Yes. I would
d. No, there aren’t any apples
e. Yes, there is some meat
Others Ss giving the opinions.
T: check and give mark
* Warm up(2’) T: Ask Ss look at the picture and ask
What are these?
Ss: Look and answer
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Ask Ss to look in the picture in the book and
introduce the new words
T: Read and write on the board
T: Guide Ss to read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Introduce other new word the same
Some Ss read before the class
T: Check and correct their pronunciation
T: Guide Ss to practice depend on dialouge in the book
Ss: Practice to ask and answer depend on dialouge in the book
S1: I’m hungry. I’d like some rice. What would you like?
S2: I’m hungry, too. I’d like some chicken
Etc…
T: Listen and check T: Ask Ss look at B5 listen and match the names of the people with what they would like
Ss: Listen and match the names of the people with what they would like
T: Play the tape or read
Ss: Listen and match
T: Call some pairs read aloud the sentences they have done.
Some pairs read aloud the sentences they have done.
T: Check and correct
Keys:
Nhan: Would you like some chicken and some rice
Tuan: Would you like some meat and some vegetables
Huong: Would you like some fruit and some milk
Mai: Would you like some fish and an orange juice
T; Ask Ss practice in pair to ask and answer
Ss: Practice
S1: Is there any water?
S2: Yes, there is some water
Etc…
T: Check and correct 15’
10’
10’
1. New words Fish: Cỏ.
Fruit: Trỏi cõy.
Menu: Thực đơn.
Chicken: thịt gà.
A: I’m hungry. I’d like some bread
What would you like?
B: I’m not hungry, But I’m thirsty I’d like some water
Etc…
2. Listen
Nhan: c,f; Tuan: a,d; Huong: e,g
Mai: b,h
2. Practice
Some: đứng trước câu khẳng định
Any: đứng trước câu phủ định và câu hỏi
+ Is there any…?
Yes, there is some…
No, there isn’t any…
+ Are there any…?
Yes, there are some…
No, there aren’t any… Example: + Is there any water?
Yes, there is some water
+ Are there any oranges?
No, there aren’t any oranges c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 10: Staying healthy
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: Name of food and drink
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer
Ss: Go to the board and answer
Question:
a. How do you feel?
b. What would you like?
c. Would you like a drink?
d. Are there any apples?
e. Is there any meat?
Key:
a. I’m thirsty
b. I’d like some orange juice
c. Yes. I would
d. No, there aren’t any apples
e. Yes, there is some meat
Others Ss giving the opinions.
T: check and give mark
* Warm up(2’) T: Ask Ss look at the picture and ask
What are these?
Ss: Look and answer
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Ask Ss to look in the picture in the book and
introduce the new words
T: Read and write on the board
T: Guide Ss to read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Introduce other new word the same
Some Ss read before the class
T: Check and correct their pronunciation
T: Ask Ss to look at C2 and introduce “What is your favorite food?”
Ss: Listen and copy
T: Guide Ss to practice the dialouge in the book
Ss: Practice to ask and answer depend on dialouge in the book
S1: What is your favorite food?
S2: I like potato
S1: Do you like chicken?
S2: Yes, I do
Etc…
T: Listen and check
T: Ask Ss practice to ask and answer about the food and drink they like or dislike
Ss; Practice
S1: What is your favorite food?
S2: I like fish
S1: What is your favorite drink?
S2: I like apple juice
Etc…
T: Check and correct 15’
10’
10’
1. New word Favorite: Sở thớch
* Vegetables
Carrot: Củ cà rốt
Tomato: Cà chua
Potato: Khoai tõy
Lettuce: Xà lỏch.
Bean: Đậu hà Lan
Pea: Đỗ.
Cabbage: Bắp cải.
Onion: Hành.
* Drink
Ice: Đá lạnh
Lemonade: Nước chanh
Iced tea: Trà đá
Iced coffee; Cà phê đá
Apple juice: Nước táo ép
Soda: Nước sô đa
What are these/thoes?
They are + Ns
2. Listen and repeat
What is your favorite food?
I like + N
Do you like…?
Yes, I do/ No, I don’t
3. Practice
+ What is your favorite food/drink?
+ Do you like…?
Yes, I do/ No, I don’t
+ What do you like? c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 11: What do you eat?
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ss can buy food and drink at a store
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer
Ss: Go to the board and answer
Question:
a. How do you feel?
b. What would you like?
c. What is your favorite food?
d. What is your favorite drink?
e. Do you like chicken?
Key:
a. I’m thirsty
b. I’d like some orange juice
c. I like fish
d. I like apple juice
e. Yes, I do
Others Ss giving the opinions.
T: check and give mark
* Warm up(2’) T: Ask Ss look at the picture and ask
Where are they?
What are these?
Ss: Look and answer
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Ask Ss to look in the picture in the book and
introduce the new words by showing picture and ask
What is this?
Ss: Look and answer
T: Read and write on the board
T: Guide Ss to read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Introduce other new word the same
Some Ss read before the class
T: Check and correct their pronunciation
T: Explain: Khi muốn kết hợp cỏc từ chỉ vật , chứa k/lượng t/lượng các đơn vị đong đo đếm với các dt khác ta để các từ chỉ đơn vị đứng trước và nối với các dt khác bằng giới từ “ of ” < trừ trường hợp a dozen ko có gt đi kèm >
Ex: A kilo of rice
200 grams of beef
T: Have Ss matching
Ss: Matching
T: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss look at pic A1 a and introduce
Vui wants some food and drink she goes to the store. Look at this man. He is a “store keeper”. Can you guess meaning of “storekeeper
Ss: Listen and guess ‘Chủ tệm, người bán hàng’
T: Introduce the new words
Ss: Listen and copy
T: Là người bán hàng gặp khách hàng em nói như thế nào?
Ss: Tụi cú thể giỳp gỡ cho anh/ chị khụng?
T: Write: can i help you?
T: Play the tape A1 or T reads
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Guide Ss to practice the dialouge in the book
T: Ask Ss practice to ask and answer
Ss: Practice to ask and answer depend on dialouge in the book
S1: Can I help you?
S2: Yes, I like a kilo of rice
S1: Here you are
S2: Thank you
Etc…
T: Listen and check
T: Have Ss close the book. Complete this dialogue
Ss: Practice
T: Check and correct 15’
5’
10’
5’
1. New word A bottle of cooking oil: chai, lọ
A packet of tea: 1 gúi chố
A box of chocolates: 1 hộp sụ cụ la
A kilo of rice: 1 cõn gạo
200 gram of beef: 2 lạng thịt bũ
A dozen eegs: một tỏ trứng
A can of peas: 1 hộp, lon đỗ
A bar of soap: 1thanh, thỏi xà phũng
A tube of toothpaste: 1 tuýp kem đánh răng
2. Matching
A bottle toothpaste
A packet beef
A box tea
A kilo eggs
A gram chocolate
A dozen water
3. Listen and repeat
Storekeeper(n): Chủ tệm, người bán hàng Can I help you? Tụi cú thể giỳp gỡ cho anh/ chị khụng?
Here you are: của anh/ chị đây
4. Practice
Complete this dialogue
A: … I help you?
B: … a ….. of …… please.
A: ……………………
B: …………………….
c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 11: What do you eat?
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ss can ask and answer about food and drink they need and want. Talk quantities and prices. Using “How many …?”
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer
Ss: Go to the board and answer
Question:
a. Retell the new words
b. Make dialouge with teacher
Key:
a. A bottle of cooking oil; A kilo of rice; A packet of tea; A box of chocolates etc…
b. T: Can I help you?
S: Yes, I like a kilo of rice
T: Here you are
S: Thank you
Others Ss giving the opinions.
T: check and give mark
* Warm up(2’) T: Ask Ss to play game slap the board
Ss: Play game
T: Ask Ss to look in the picture in the book and ? Where is this?Have Ss say words people often say when they buy food or drink Ss: số lượng, gía cả T: Introduce the lesson
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Ask the Ss to look at the dialouge in the book.
T: Ask the Ss listen to the tape and find the new words, using the picture.
Ss: listen to the tape and find the new words, using the picture.
T: Open the tape or read
Ss: Listen and repeat.
T: Read and write the new words on the board
Ss: Copy and read.
T: Guide Ss to read Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Check and correct their pronunciation
T: Introduce “ How much” and “how many”
Ss: Look listen and copy
T: Ask Ss to give example
Ss: Give example
T: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss look at A2 and practice the dialouge
Ss: Practice
S1: Salegirl
S2: Ba
T: Ask Ss to read the dialouge carefully then answer the questions
Ss: Answer the questions in pairs
T: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss make new dialouge depend on dialouge in the book
Ss: Make new dialouge depend on dialouge in the book
S1: Can I help you?
S2: I need some rice
S1: How much rice do you want?
S2: 5 kilos of rice
S1: Is there any thing else?
S2: Yes. I need some oranges
S1: How many do oranges you want?
S2: One kilo, please.
Etc…
15’
10’
10’
1. At the store a. Newwords
Salegirl = Shopkeeper: Nhõn viờn bỏn hàng.
Is there any thing else?: Cũn gỡ nữa khụng?
b. Grammar
- Danh từ trong tiếng anh được chia làm 2 loại chính: Dt đếm được và dt ko đếm được
Ex: bread, water, coffee, tra, rice, noodle, soap, oil…. Là những dt ko đếm được.
+ Dt ko đếm đc luôn ở số it và khụng dựng với a/an
+ Danh từ đếm đc có 2 dạng: số ít và số nhiều
How much…: Dùng để hỏi số lượng với dt ko đếm đc
How many…: Dùng để hỏi số lượng với dt đếm đc
Ex: + How much beff do you want?
+ how many eggs do you want?
2. Answer the question
a, ba is at the store
b, he wants some beef and eggs
c, he wants 200 grams of beef
d, he wants a dozen eggs
3. Practice
S + want/ need + N.
How much/ many + N ...?
S + want/ need + N.
How much/ many + N ...?
c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 11: What do you eat?
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ss can ask and answer about food and drink they need and want. Talk quantities and prices.
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer
Ss: Go to the board and answer
Question:
Make dialouge with a partner
Key:
S2: Can I help you?
S1: Yes, I like some rice
S2: How much do you want?
S1: 5 kiloes please
S2: 5 kiloes of rice. Is there any thing else?
S1: Yes need some apples
S2: How many do you want?
S1: 3 apples please
S1: Here you are
S2: Thank you
Others Ss giving the opinions.
T: check and give mark
* Warm up(2’) T: Introduce the lesson
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Ask the Ss to look at the picture in the book.
T: Ask the Ss listen to the tape and find the new words, using the picture.
Ss: listen to the tape and find the new words, using the picture.
T: Open the tape or read
Ss: Listen and repeat.
T: Read and write the new words on the board
Ss: Copy and read.
T: Guide Ss to read Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Check and correct their pronunciation
T: Ask Ss to read their answer
T: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss look at A4 and practice the dialouge
Ss: Practice
S1: Mom
S2:Nam
T: Ask Ss to read the dialouge carefully then write the shopping list
Ss: Write the shopping list
Some Ss write on the board
T: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss make new dialouge depend on dialouge in the book
Ss: Make new dialouge depend on dialouge in the book
S1: Can I help you?
S2: I need some rice
S1: How much rice do you want?
S2: 5 kilos of rice
S1: Is there any thing else?
S2: Yes. I need some oranges
S1: How many do oranges you want?
S2: One kilo, please.
Etc…
10’
15’
10’
1. Listen a. Newwords
Half: Một nửa
A can of coca: Một lon coca
Cookies: bỏnh quy
b. Key
a. Phuong wants a tube of toothpaste.
b. Ly wants a bar of soaf and a box of chocolate.
c. Mai wants a can of soda.
d. Nam wants a packet of cookies
2. Read
A bottle of cooking iold.
Some rice.
Half a kilo of beef.
Half a dozen of eggs.
3. Practice
S + want/ need + N.
How much/ many + N ...?
S + want/ need + N.
How much/ many + N ...?
c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 11: What do you eat?
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ss can ask and answer about food and drink they need and want. Talk quantities and prices.
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer
Ss: Go to the board and answer
Question:
Make dialouge with a partner
Key:
S2: Can I help you?
S1: Yes, I like some rice
S2: How much do you want?
S1: 5 kiloes please
S2: 5 kiloes of rice. Is there any thing else?
S1: Yes need some apples
S2: How many do you want?
S1: 3 apples please
S1: Here you are
S2: Thank you
Others Ss giving the opinions.
T: check and give mark
* Warm up(2’) T: Introduce the lesson
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Ask the Ss to look at the picture in the book.
? What is this?
? What are they?
Ss: Look at picture and call the name of things in the picture
T: Ask the Ss write the name of things in the picture.
Ss: Write
T: Go around the class and correct on the pictures.
T: Ask the Ss look at the picture and read again.
T: Call some Ss read aloud the sentences that they have done.
T: Ask the Ss look at A2 and listen to the tape and find the new words
Ss: listen to the tape and find the new words
T: Open the tape or read
Ss: Listen and repeat.
T: Read and write the new words on the board
Ss: Copy and read.
T: Guide Ss to read Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Check and correct their pronunciation
T: Ask Ss to read their answer
T: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss look at B2 and practice the dialouge
Ss: Practice
S1: Salegirl S2: Lan T: Introduce the new stucture how much Ss: Look listen and copy
T: Ask Ss practice in pairs to ask and answer ? what would you like for breakfast?
Lunch?
Dinner?
I’d like…
S1: what would y like for lurch?
S2: I’d like some rice and some water
T: Ask Ss look at b2 and listen to the tape then number pictures you hear
Ss: listen to the tape then number pictures you hear
T: Check and correct
5’
13’
10’
7’ 1. Write the name of things in the picture.
a. rice; b, noodles; c. meat etc….
2. Listen and Repeat
a. Newwords:
Sandwich:
A glass of lemon juce: 1 ly nước chanh.
b. Grammar
How much are they?
They are + Price.
How much is it?
It is + price.
3. Practice
What would you like for breakfast?
Lunch?
Dinner?
I’d like…
4. Listen E; b; I; c; f; j; h; l
Fish – noodles – orange juice – beef – vegetables – milk – bananas – water c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 11: What do you eat?
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ss can ask and answer about food and drink they need and want. Talk quantities and prices.
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer
Ss: Go to the board and answer
Question:
T: Ask Ss practice in pairs to ask and answer
? what would you like for breakfast?
Lunch?
Dinner?
Key:
I’d like some rice and some water etc…
Others Ss giving the opinions.
T: check and give mark
* Warm up(2’) T: Ask Ss to match
Ss: Match
Abottle of milk
Soda
Water
A kilo of beef
Meat (oranges)
Rice
A doza eggs
Apples
oranges
T: Introduce the lesson c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Ask the Ss to look at the picture in the book.
? What is this?
? What are they?
Ss: Look at picture and call the name of things in the picture ( in Vietnamese) Ss: listen to the tape and find the new words
T: Open the tape or read
Ss: Listen and repeat.
T: Read and write the new words on the board
Ss: Copy and read.
T: Guide Ss to read Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Check and correct their pronunciation
T: Write on board there numbers and read
A hundred : 100
Two hundred : 200
A thousand : 1000
Three thousand : 3000
T: Have Ss guess meaning of “ humdred” “ thousand”
T: Write some example. Have Ss read
Ss: Read
T: Introduce the stucture how much
Ss: Look listen and copy
T: Have Ss point at pic B5 – 121 call name of food or drink and it’s price Ss: Read aloud
A fried rice is 2500
play tape B5 ( 2time)
T: Have Ss look at pictures B5 practice in pair ask and answer about the price
Ss: Practice inpairs
S1: How much is fried rice?
S2: It is two thousand five hundred dong
Etc…
T: Ask Ss practice ask and answer about the price or make similar dialogues as B2 120
a. A kilo of sugar/ 6500đ
b. a dozen eggs/ 1400đ
c. a tube of tod’paste/ 800
d. a bowl of noodle/ 700
Ss: Practice
T: Check and correct 15’
10’
10’ 1. Newwords Fried rice: cơm rang
A bowl of noodle: bát phở
Sandwich:
Cake: bánh ngọt
Ice – cream: kem
400: four hundred
900: nine humdred
1000: a thousand
1500: one thousand five hundred
2200: two thousand two hundred
b. Grammar
How much hỏi giá cả
How much are they? (Danh từ đếm được số nhiều) → They are + Price.
How much is it? (Danh từ không đếm được)
→ It is + price.
Ex: How much is an apple?
How much are 2 eggs?
3. Practice
How much is a cake/
It’s 500d
4. Practice further S1: How much is a kilo of sugar?
S2: It is 65000
c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Period 70: GRAMMAR PRACTICE 1. Objectives:
a. knowledge:
By the End of the lesson Ss can cousolidate vocabulary and structures on topics they have learnt from U9 -> U11
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c . Behavior:
Student like studying the subject and use English correctly
2. Preparations: a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture, chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids.
3. Steps of teaching:
a. Oral test: (3’)
T: call 1s go to the board and ask some questions
Questions:
1. What would you like for breakfast?
Lunch?
Dinner?
2. How much is a bowt of moodle?
A kilo of oranges?
Key:
1. I’d like some…..
2. It’s 15000d……….
T: check and correct
* Warm up: (1’)
T: Ask students to remind the form of the Present simple
Ss: Retell
b. New lesson: (38’)
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Ask the Ss retell the Present simple
Ss: Retell
T: Write on the board
T: Ask Ss give example
Ss: do
T: Ask Ss practice to do exercise in the work book
T: Ask the Ss retell a, an, some, any
Ss: Retell
T: Write on the board
T: Ask Ss give example
Ss: do
T: Ask Ss practice to do exercise in the work book
T: Correct the answers
T: Ask the Ss retell adjectives
Ss: Retell
T: Write on the board
T: Ask Ss give example
Ss: do
T: Ask Ss practice to do exercise in the work book
T: Correct the answers
T: Ask the Ss retell question words
Ss: Retell
T: Write on the board
T: Ask Ss give example
Ss: do
T: Ask Ss practice to do exercise in the work book
T: Correct the answers
T: Have Ss compare present simple and resent progressive tenses T: Ask Ss do ex 5 – 123
some Ss read aloud
T: Correct the answers
10’
8’ 7
6
7’ I. The simple tense
1. Grammar
S + like/ likes S + Don’t/ like…
Doesn’t
Do + S + like…?
Does
Yes, S + do/ does
No, s + don’t/ doesn’t like
2. Exercise 1
a, - like
- like
- do … like
- … I don’t like
b, - does … like
- … likes ….
- … doesn’t like
II. a, an, some, any
1. Grammar
Để nói về số lượng
a, A/ AN : Một ( mạo từ không xác định) đứng trước danh từ số ít đếm được
- A: đanh từ bất đầu = 1 fụ âm : a banana
- AN: trước danh từ bắt đầu = 1 fụ am: an orange
b, Some/ any: 1 vài, 1 chút (tính từ không sác định)
- some: dùng trong câu KĐ
- any: PĐ và câu hỏi
2. Exercise 2
a, - … any …
- … any … some
- …are …
b, - …any …
- … some …
c, - … any …
- … some …
- … a …
III. Ajectives Dùng để chỉ T/C , đ đ của người hoặc vật
Exercise 3
a, short e, full
b, thin f, cold
c, light g, thin
d, strong h, long
IV. Question words Where; how; what; who; which; when
Exercise 4
a, who …
b, what …
c, How…
d, what
e, where V. Contrast: present simple and resent progressive tenses + thì hiện tại đơn: diễn tả hành động lặp đi lặp lại. thói quen hay 1 sự rất hiển nhiên
+ thì hiện đại tiếp diễn: diễn tả hành động đang xẩy ra tại thời điểm nói ( now/ at the moment)
S + tobe + V-ing
Exercise 5
a, … is eating …
b, … are drinking …
c, … is riding …
d, … is going …
e, … is getting …
f, … is traveting …
c. Summary: (2’) T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: (1’)
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: …………………… Period 71: A FORTY - FIVE MINUTE TEST 1. Objectives
a. Knowledge:
All the language items from unit 9 to 11
b. Skill:
Reading, listening, writing, language focus
c. Behavior:
Educate students use English correctly to do the test
2. Questions 45’ I. Listening: Listen and fill in the gap the suitable word(2pts). Nghe và điền vao chỗ trống
Miss Loan is …...and…… She has around face and long…….. hair, she has …….eyes and …. big nose. She has…….lips and …….white teeth. She is………
II. Reading: Read the passage
1. Fill in the blanks with the suitable words (2pts). Điền từ thích hợp vào chỗ trống
Storekeeper : Good morning.(1) ……I help you?
Lan : Yes. I want (2)…….apples, please
Storekeeper : How(3)………. do you want?
Lan : Yes, I’d (4)……half a dozen apples. Do you have(5)…….rice?
Storekeeper : Yes, I have some rice. How(6)………. do you want?
Lan : 10 kilos of rice, please
Storekeeper : Is there anything (7)…………..?
Lan : No, thank. How(8)………..are they?
Storekeeper : Sixty five thousand dong, please
2. Read the passage and answer the question (1pts). Trả lời các câu hỏi sau
a. What does Lan want?
b. How much are they?
III. Language focus:
1. Put a. an, some, any in a suitable blank(1pt). Điền a. an, some, any vào chỗ trống
a. Do you have……beef?
b. She wants………...rice
c. I would like…….bottle of cooking oil
d. He’d like ……..apple
2. Put the verb in the blank with suitable tense(2pts). Chia động từ trong ngoặc ở thì đúng
a. He (want)………some chicken
b. They(walk) ………to school
c. we ….. ………by car (travel)
d. She ….. ……..video games (play)
IV. Writing: Describe about your friend(apperiance, favorite food and drink) (2pts)
Em hãy tả về vẻ bề ngoài, món ăn, đồ uống yêu thích của bạn em
3. Answer key and mark guide
I. Listening: (2ps) Listen and fill in the gap the suitable word ( Each correct answer get mark 0.25)
Thin; short; black; brown; a; thin; small; strong II Reading (3ps)
1. Fill in the blanks with the suitable words ( Each correct answer get mark 0.25)
1. can; 2 some; 3. many; 4. like; 5. any; 6. much; 7. else; 8. much II. Answer the questions ( Each correct answer get mark 0,5)
1. Lan wants some apples and some rice 2. they are sixty five thousand dong III. Language focus (3ps)
1. Put a. an, some, any in a suitable blank (Each correct answer get mark 0.25)
a. any; b. some; c. a; d. an II. Put the verb in the blank with suitable tense ( Each correct answer get mark 0.5)
a. wants; b. walk; c. are traveling; d. is playing IV. Writing: Describe about your friend(apperiance, favorite food and drink) 2marks Depend on Ss’s writing 4. Comment
* Knowledge:
* Skill:
- Listening:
- Reading:
- Language focus:
- Writing:
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Period 72: CORRECT THE TEST 1. Objectives
a. Knowledge:
Help Ss correct the mistakes in their test, Ss will know mistake and correct them, Ss can get more experiment for next tests
b. Skill:
Reading, listening, writing, language focus
c. Behavior:
Educate students use English correctly and get more experiment for next tests
2. Correction (43’) T gives Ss test papers and commend
T: Ask Ss go to the board do again the test
Ss: do again
T: Give test to Ss and get Ss pairs compare
Ss: Compare in pairs
T: Check and correct
*Keys
I. Listening: (2ps) Listen and fill in the gap the suitable word ( Each correct answer get mark 0.25)
Thin; short; black; brown; a; thin; small; strong
II Reading (3ps)
1. Fill in the blanks with the suitable words ( Each correct answer get mark 0.25)
1. can; 2 some; 3. many; 4. like; 5. any; 6. much; 7. else; 8. much
II. Answer the questions ( Each correct answer get mark 0,5)
1. Lan wants some apples and some rice
2. they are sixty five thousand dong III. Language focus (3ps)
1. Put a. an, some, any in a suitable blank (Each correct answer get mark 0.25)
a. any; b. some; c. a; d. an
II. Put the verb in the blank with suitable tense ( Each correct answer get mark 0.5)
a. wants; b. walk; c. are traveling; d. is playing
IV. Writing: Describe about your friend(apperiance, favorite food and drink) 2marks Depend on Ss’s writing
3. Guide to do at home(2’) Do again the test in your exercise book
Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 12: SPORT AND PASTIMES
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: Use the present progressive tense and sport vocabularies to talk about their pastimes b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
* Warm up T: Ask Ss to say again form of the present progressive tense
Ss: Retell T: Ask Ss to think about the sport
Ss: Answer: soccer, volleyball Ss: Answer in Vietnamese c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Ask the Ss to look at the picture in the book.
? What are they doing?
Ss: Look at picture and call the name of activities in the picture ( in Vietnamese)
Ss: listen to the tape and find the new words
T: Open the tape or read
Ss: Listen and repeat.
T: Read and write the new words on the board
Ss: Copy and read.
T: Guide Ss to read Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Check and correct their pronunciation
T: remind the present progressive tense and ask Ss to read the picture Ss: Read
T: Have Ss look at pictures A1 practice in pair ask and answer about the activities Ss: Practice inpairs
S1: What is he doing?
S2: He is skipping rope.
S4: What is she doing?
S5: She is playing badminton Etc…
Etc ….. T: Check and correct
T: Have Ss look at pictures A3 answer about the activities
Ss: Look at th picture and answer about the sports they play
I skip
I do aerobics
Etc… 15’
10’
10’ 1. Newwords Badminton table tennis
aelobics
volleyball
tennis skip
Jog
b. Grammar
Present progressive tense S + tobe + V-ing
2. Practice
+) What is he/she doing?
She/he + is + Ving
Eg: He is skipping
+) What are they doing?
They + are + Ving
3. Listen and repeat Which sport do you play? I play socccer
Etc….
c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 12: SPORT AND PASTIMES
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: Use the present progressive tense and sport vocabularies to talk about their pastimes b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: call 1s go to the board and ask some questions
Questions:
1. Write the sentences with the present continuous tense
a, Mss Giang/ Jog
b, The children/ shop
c, They/ play/ soccer
d, Hoa & Mai are planning table tennis
2. Which sport do you play?
Key:
1. a, Mss Giang is Jogging
b, The children are shopping
c, They are playing soccer
d, Hoa & Mai are Playing table tennis
2. I skip and I do aerobics……………
T: check and correct
* Warm up( 2’) 1. Retell the new words
Ss: Do ex: Badminton; table tennis; aelobics; volleyball……
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Ask the Ss to look at the picture in the book.
Introduce about Nam & Lan. Than ask the Ss to read the information about them call some Ss to read
? Which sport does she/he play?
Ss: Look at picture and call the name of activities in the picture T: Ask Ss to read the text Ss: Read
Listen and correct their mistakes T: Ask some Ss to read before the class
T? What grammar is used in this text
Ss: look at the text and answer: the present simple tense T: Remind the present simple tense T: Ask Ss to read again and answer the questions
Ss: Read the answer the questions Ss: Practice inpairs
S1: Which sport does Lan play? S2: Lan swim, she does aerobics and play badminton
Etc …..
T: Check and correct
T: Have Ss look at A5 ask and answer about the activities they play Ss: answer about the sports they play
S1: Which sport do you play?
I skip
I do aerobics
Etc…
Call some Ss to talk about their favorite sport 20’
15’
1. Read a. Lan swim, she does aerobics and play badminton
b. No, she doesn’t
c. Nam plays soccer. He jogs and play table tennis
d. yes, he does
2. Practice
Which sport do you play?
I play soccer
c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 12: SPORT AND PASTIMES
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: Name of sport activities and pastime.
Talk and write about what they or others do in the free time.
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: call 1s go to the board and ask some questions
Questions:
Answer the question about you
1: What sport do you play?
2: Do you play tennis?
3: Do you play soccer?
4: Do you play aerobics?
Key:
1: I play badminton
2: Yes, I do
3: yes, I do
4: No, I don’t
Other Ss give comment and give mark
T: check and correct
* Warm up( 2’) T: Ask Ss to talk about their free time. What about Phuong, Ly, Nam, Tuan, Long?
Ss: Listen & talk by Vietnamese
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Ask the Ss to look at the picture in the book.
Introduce some new words:
What do they do in their free time?
Ss: Look at picture and call the name of activities in the picture
T: Ask Ss to read the text
Ss: Read
Listen and correct their mistakes T: Ask some Ss to read before the class
T: Ask Ss practice in pairs to ask and answer Ss: Practice inpairs
S1: What do you do in your free time?
S2: I watch TV
Etc …..
T: Check and correct
T: Have Ss look at B3 ask and answer about the activities they do in their free time ?What do they do in their free time?
Ss: answer about the activites they do in their free time S1: What does Phuong do in his free time? He goes to the movies Etc…
Call some Ss to talk about their favorite activites T: Ask Ss to listen
Play the tape
- Tan reads
- Minh & Nam play video games
- Lien watches T.V
- Lan & Mai listen to music
Ss: Listen and answer before the class
T: Check and correct 10’
7
13’
5’ 1. New words Free time(n)
- Movies (n)
- Fishing (n)
- Video game (n)
2. Practice
What do you do in your free time? I watch TV 3. Listen and read What does Phuong do in his free time?
He goes to the movies
Etc…
4. Listen
Tan – f, Minh & Nam – e
Lien – a, Lan & mai – b
c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 12: SPORT AND PASTIMES
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: Describe time table. Present simple tense. How often. Adverb of one, twice talk and write about freequency b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: call 1s go to the board and ask some questions
Questions:
Answer the question about you
1. Which sport do you play?
2. What do you do in your free time?
Key:
1. I play…..
2. I read etc…
Other Ss give comment and give mark
T: check and correct
* Warm up( 2’) T: What do you do in your free time?
How often do you do?
Ss: Listen & talk by Vietnamese
Eg: I go to the movie twice a week
I go to school twice a day c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. Introduce about Ly’s diary
T: Ask the Ss to look at the picture in the book.
? How often does Ly go jogging?
? How often does she listen to music?
What do they do in their free time?
Ss: Look at picture and call the name of activities in the picture
T: Ask Ss to read the text
Ss: Read
T: Ask Ss practice in pairs
Ss: Practice inpairs
Listen and correct their mistakes
T: Ask Ss to look at Ly’s diary ask and answer about Ly’s activities Ss: Look at Ly’s diary ask and answer about Ly’s activities
S1: How often does Ly go fishing?
S2: She goes fishing once a week 15’
20’ 1. How often + How often …? Dùng để hỏi mức độ thường xuyên – bao nhiêu lần?
From: How often + do/ does + s ….?
S + V ……
Once, twice, 3 times ….
Eg: I go to the movie twice a week
I go to school twice a day
- once = one time
- Twice = two times
2. Practice
How often does Ly go to school?
She goes to chool six times a week
Etc… c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 12: SPORT AND PASTIMES
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
- Use well the Adv of frequency: always, uswally, often, some time, newer
- Use the question and answer with “How often …?”
- Reading comprehension the conversation talk about the activities had use the adv of frequency
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: call 1s go to the board and ask some questions
Questions:
Answer the question about you
How often does Ly go to school/go fishing …..?
Key:
She goes to chool six times a week
Etc…
Other Ss give comment and give mark
T: check and correct
* Warm up( 2’) Ask Ss to look at Ly’s diary then do
How of ten does Ly do the thing
Introduce Adv of frequency depend on the sentences by Ss given
Look at the picture then talk about ly
- ly goes to chool 6 time a week
- Ly plays badminton 3 time a week
- She watches T.V twice a week
- she jogs once a week
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Introduce the adv of frequency
T: Read
Call Ss to read the Adv of frequency
Ss: Listen, read & copy
T: Introduce the content of the text
(point to picture then introduce)
- play the tape/ read
Call some Ss to read the text
Guide Ss to ask & answer about Ba & Lan
Call some pair to do
S1: How often do they go to the park?
S2: They often go to the park Other Ss do the same T: Ask Ss look at the questions in the C4 and answer
Ss: Look at the questions then write the answer in the book
How often do you go to the zoo?
- How often do you go to the park?
- How often do you play sport?
- How often do you go camping?
10’
15’
10’ 1. Adv of frequency
Always (adv) Luôn luôn.
- Usually (adv) Thường thường.
- Often (adv) Hay.
- Some time (adv) Thỉnh thoảng.
- never (adv) Chưa bao giờ.
2. Listen and read
* New words:
Year(n)
Have a picnic: Đi pin nic.
Fly the kite: tha diều
Camp: Đi cắm trại.
Tent: Cái lều.
Late:
Ex: How often do Ba & Lan go to the zoo?
- they go to the zoo 3 times a year
Etc… 3. Write
- I go to the zoo 5 times a year
- I go to the park twice a month
- I play sport oncea day
- I go camping twice a year
Etc… c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 12: SPORT AND PASTIMES
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
- Use well the Adv of frequency: always, uswally, often, some time, newer
- Use the question and answer with “How often …?”
- Reading comprehension the conversation talk about the activities had use the adv of frequency
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: call 1s go to the board and ask some questions
Questions:
Complete the sentences about you with once a week, twice a week three … time a week, everyday
a, I go to chool
b, I eat meat
c, I study English
Key:
a, I go to school six times aweek (3m)
b, I eat meat four times aweek (3m)
c, I study English three time aweek (3m)
read well
Other Ss give comment and give mark
T: check and correct
* Warm up( 2’) Ask Ss to retell the adv of frequency Ss: Retell
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Aks Ss to book at the picture (p 132) then listen & fill the Adv of frequency given to each pictures
- play the tape/ read
call some Ss todo exercise
ss: Listen then compare the result to each o ther listen & tell their result
T: Listen & correct their mistakes
tape crip:
a, Nga & Lan never go camping
b, They some time go to the zoo
c, They often go to the park
d, they often play sport
e, They usually have apicnic in the park
T: Introduce the content of the text
Minh likes walking on the weekend
Minh & his friends often go walking in the mountains
? What do they do there? Let’s listen
Read the text the first time
T: Call some S Listen & read after in chorus
Ss: Read in silents
Answer the given
Listen & do in pairs to answers T: Check and correct
10’
25’
1. Listen
a, Never d, some time
b, Some time e, usually
c, often
2. Read
2.1. New words:
On the weekend:
Wear boot:
Warm:
Take:
A camping stove:
Overnight:
Friends:
2.2. Answer the questions
a, Minh likes walking
b, they always wear strong boots & warm clothers
c, he goes on the weekend
d, He usually goes with 2 frinds
e, he often goes walking in the mountains
f, They always take food & water & a camping stove c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 13: ACTIVITES AND THE SEASONS
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: Present simple tense. Use the temperature and season vocabulary. Talk, write about the weather in each season.
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: call 1s go to the board and ask some questions
Questions:
1. What do you like doing? 2. etc….
Key:
1. I like jogging…… Other Ss give comment and give mark
T: check and correct
* Warm up( 2’) Ask Ss to retell the adj of felling Ss: Retell
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Aks Ss to book at the picture (p 134) then T introduce the new words
What’s the season?
Ss: Look and answer
T: Read the new word Ss: Listen, repeat and copy
Some Ss read before the class T: Check and correct
T: guide Ss to match the words
Ss: Match the words
T: Ask Ss look at A1 listen and repeat
T: Read
Ss: Listen and read in chorus
T: Ask some Ss to read before the class
T: Guide Ss to play the game Wordsquare by find the words they have learnt T: Check and correct
Key: → fall; cold; warm; spring; cool; weather
↓season; summer 15’
5’
15 1. New words
a. The weather and seasons
Weather:
Summer:
Fall:
Spring:
Winter:
Cool:
The season:
2. Matching
a. Cold Summer.
b. Cool Spring.
c. Warm Fall.
d. Hot Winter.
3. Listen and Reapeat * Practice: Wordsquare F
A
L
L
C
O
L
D
X
W
A
R
M
A S
S
S P R I N G U
E
O D E H K H M
A
B C W I D O M
S
C
O
O
L
S T E
O
W
E
A
T
H
E
R
N
c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 13: ACTIVITES AND THE SEASONS
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: Present simple tense. Use the temperature and season vocabulary. Talk, write about the weather in each season.
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: call 1s go to the board and ask some questions
Questions:
Retell the new words
Key:
Weather:
Summer:
Fall:
Spring:
Winter:
Cool:
Other Ss give comment and give mark
T: check and correct
* Warm up( 2’) Pelmanism:
Spring warm summer hot winter cold fall T: Guide Ss to play game Ss: Play game c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Introduce the srtucture to ask and answer about the westher and seasons What’s the season?
What the weather like in the….
Ss: Look and answer
T: guide Ss to practice to ask and answer about the westher and seasons Ss: Practice to ask and answer about the westher and seasons
S1: What’s the weather like in the winter? S2: It’s cold
Etc….. T: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss look at A3 listen and repeat
T: Read
Ss: Listen and read in chorus
T: Ask some Ss to read before the class
T: Guide Ss to ask and answer the questions Ss: Practice
S1: What weather do you like?
S2: I like…..
T: Check and correct
15’
5’
15
1. Grammar
* Hỏi và trả lời về thời tiết
What’s the weather like in + Season ?
Thời tiết vào mùa ...như thế nào?
- It’s + adj ( chi thoi tiet)
Ex: What’s the weather like in the summer? It’s hot 2. Practice What’s the weather like in the fall?
It’s cool
What’s the weather like in the winter?
It’s cold
What’s the weather like in the spring?
It’s warm
3. Listen and Reapeat
What weather do you like? I like + adj + weather c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 13: ACTIVITES AND SEASONS
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
- Practice in adverb of freequency. Simple past.
- Use the sport and season vocabulary.
- Use “ When ” clause in possitive statement
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: call 1s go to the board and ask some questions
Questions:
a. what weather do you like?
b. what is the weather like in the summer?
c. what is the weather like in the fall?
d. what is the weather like in the winter?
e. what is the weather like in spring?
f. what weather like today?
Key:
a, I like hot weather
b it’s hot
c, it’s cool d. it’s cold e. it’s warm
f. It’s…….. Other Ss give comment and give mark
T: check and correct
* Warm up( 2’) T: Ask Ss to retell about pastimes Ss: Retell c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Aks Ss to book at the picture (p 136) then read T: read
Ss: Listen
T: Guide Ss to read
Ss: Read Some Ss read before the class
T: Ask Ss to look at the picture and say what What does Ba do when it’s……… Ss: Practice in pairs to ask and answer S1: What does Ba do when it’s hot?
S2: When it’s hot He goes swimming
Etc….
T: Ask Ss practice to ask and answer about themselves Ss: Practice to ask and answer about themselves
S1: What do you do when it’s cool ?
When it’s hot I go jogging
Etc….
T: Ask Ss to write about activites they do in each weather
Ss: Write
T: Ask Ss to read their writing
Ss: Read
T: Check and correct 10’
15’
10’ 1. Read What does Ba do when it’s hot? When it’s hot He goes swimming Etc….
2. Practice What do you do when it’s ….?
When it’s….. I ……
Eg: What do you do when it’s hot?
When it’s hot I go swimming
Etc….
3. futher Practice
Sugession:
when it’s hot I go swimming
when it’s cold I play soccer when it’s cool I go jogging when it’s warm I go fishing
c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 13: ACTIVITES AND SEASONS
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
- Practice in adverb of freequency. Simple past.
- Use the sport and season vocabulary.
- Use “ When ” clause in possitive statement
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: call 1s go to the board and ask some questions
Questions:
a. what weather do you like?
b. what do you do when it’s hot?
c. what do you do when it’s cold?
d. what do you do when it’s warm?
e. what do you do when it’s cool?
f. what weather like today?
Key:
a, I like hot weather
b, when it’s hot I go swimming
c, when it’s cold I play soccer etc….
f. It’s…….. Other Ss give comment and give mark
* Warm up( 2’) Ask Ss to retell the adv of frequency
Ss: Retell
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Aks Ss to book at the picture (p 138) then listen & repeat
T: play the tape or read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Introduce some new words
T: Read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Ask Ss to look at the picture and say what people do.
Ss: Read
We often play volleyball in the spring.
they sometimes Go sailling in the fall.
I often Go swimming in the summer.
She always plays badminton in the fall
We always play basketball in the winter.
Etc….
10’
10’
15’ 1. Listen and repeat
* New words
Go sailing: Bơi thuyền.
Basketball: Chơi bóng rổ.
2. Write the list of things you do in the different seasons
a. Spring
b. Summer
c. fall
d. Winter
ex. A: What do you do in the spring?
B: I usually play badminton the spring
Etc….
3. Practice
Game: Lucky numbers
1. What is the weather like in BY?
2. …………..the fall?
3. Lucky number.
4. What is the weather do you like?
5. What sport do you do in the spring?
6. Lucky number.
7. What’s the weather like in the winter?
8. Where do you often Go in the summer? c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 14: MAKING PLANS
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: Going to future( near future).
Possitive statement and WH question to talk about vacation plan.
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: call 1s go to the board and ask some questions
Questions:
a. what weather do you like?
b. what do you do when it’s hot?
c. what do you do when it’s cold?
d. what do you do when it’s warm?
e. what do you do when it’s cool?
f. what weather like today?
Key:
a, I like hot weather
b, when it’s hot I go swimming
c, when it’s cold I play soccer etc….
f. It’s…….. Other Ss give comment and give mark
* Warm up( 2’) Ask Ss to talk about some places in VN
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Aks Ss to book at the picture (p 140) then listen & repeat
T: play the tape or read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Introduce some new words
T: Read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Ask Ss to look at the picture and say what is this?/ Where is this? Ss: Read the picture T: Ask Ss to match the new words with the words inVietnamese
Ss: Matching
T: Ask Ss to practice the dialouge
Ss: Read before the class
T: Introduce the grammar structure “going to”
Ss: Look, listen and copy
T: Ask Ss to read again and answer the questions
Ss: Read then and answer the questions in groups T: Ask Ss to give their answer on the board
T: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss to read the dialouge again then complete the dialouge Ss: Write
T: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss to practice coplete the open dialouge
Ss: Complete
T: Check and correct 20’
15’
I. Listen and repeat
1. New words
The summer vacation:
Stay with:
Stay for:
Visit: Aunt: Uncle:
Citadel:
2. Grammar
Going to: Sẽ
Dùng để hỏi vê dự dịnh kế hoạch What + tobe + S + going to + do?
S + tobe + going to + V-inf
Eg: What are you going to do?
I’m going to visit Hue
3. Answer the questions a. She is going to vsit Hue
b. She is going to stay
c. She is going to stay with her aunt and uncle
d. She is going to visit the citadel
II. Write 1. Complete the dialouge A: What are you going to do this summer vacation? B: .....................visit HL Bay
A: Where are you going to stay?
B: ………………………. in a hotel
A: How long are you going to stay?
B: ……………….for two weeks
A: What are you going to do?
B: ………visit the beach and swim
3. Practice the open dialogue S1: What are you …………...?
S2: I …………………Nha Trang.
S1: Where ……………....... stay?
S2: …………………. in a hotel.
S1: How long………………………?
S2: For ……
S1: What …………………… ?
S2: I …………….go swimming. c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 14: MAKING PLANS
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: Going to future( near future).
Possitive statement and WH question to talk about vacation plan.
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: call 1s go to the board and ask some questions
Questions:
a. what is Lan going to do? b. Where is she going to stay? c. How long is she going to stay? d. what is she going to do?
e. what are you going to do this summer vacation? Key:
a. She is going to vsit Hue
b. She is going to stay
c. She is going to stay with her aunt and uncle
d. She is going to visit the citadel
e, I’m going to…………………… Other Ss give comment and give mark
* Warm up( 2’) Ask Ss to talk about some places they are going to visit in VN
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Aks Ss to book at the picture (p 142) then listen & read T: play the tape or read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Introduce some new words
T: Read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Ask Ss to look at the picture and say what is this?/ Where is this?
Ss: answer T: Ask Ss to read the tex then complete the table
Ss: Read then complete
T: Guide Ss to read the text
Ss: Read
T: Ask Ss to practice ask and answer Ss: practice in pairs S1: Where are they going to visit first?
S2: They are going to visit Ha Long bay
Etc….
T: Check and correct
10’
10’ 15’
1. Listen and read * New words
First: Then:
Next:
After that:
See:
Grandmother
Grandfather:
2. complete the table Place
Where to stay
How long
Activity
Ha long
Uncle’s house
2 days
Visit the bay
Hanoi
hotel
3 days
See Ngoc son temple
Hue
Friend’s house
2 days
See the citadel
Nha trang
Friend’s house
3 days
Visit friends
HCM
Grand’ house
One week
Visit grands
3. Answer the questions What places are they going to visit?
Where are they going to stay?
Etc…. c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 14: MAKING PLANS
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: Speak with Going to. ( near future).
Talk about plan for the near future.
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: call 1s go to the board and ask some questions
Questions:
a. what are they going to do?
b. Where are they going to stay in Ha Long Bay?
c. How long are they going to stay in Ha Noi?
d. what are they going to do in Hue?
e. what are they going to stay in HCM city?
Key:
a. They are going on vacation this summer b. They are going to stay with their aunt and uncle etc……..
Other Ss give comment and give mark
* Warm up( 2’) Ask Ss to talk about their plans in free time c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Aks Ss to book at the picture (p 144) then listen & repeat T: play the tape or read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Introduce some new words
T: Read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Ask Ss to practice reading Ss: read T: Ask Ss to ask and answer about their plans in B2
Ss: practice inpairs
S1: What are you going to do to night?
S2: I’m going to help my mom
S1: What are you going to do tomorrow?
S2: I’m going to go walking
T: Ask Ss to read the text B3 Ss: Read
T: Ask Ss make the plans for the weekend Ss: making plans T: Ask Ss to practice talk about their plans on the weekend Ss: Read their plans
On Saturday morning I’m going to go to school
On Saturday afternoon I’m going to go fishing
Etc….
T: Check and correct
10’
10’
15’
1. Listen and repeat
* New words
Tomorrow Tonight
2. Practice a. What are you going to do to night?
I’m going to see a movie.
What are you going to do tomorrow?
I’m going to go walking
b. What are you going to do to night?
I’m going to help my mom
What are you going to do tomorrow?
I’m going to play volleyball
3. Making plan for the weekend On Saturday morning I’m going to… On Saturday afternoon I’m going to… On Saturday everning I’m going to…
On Sunday morning I’m going to…
On Sunday afternoon I’m going to…
On Sunday everning I’m going to… c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 14: MAKING PLANS
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: Speak with Going to. ( near future).
Talk about plan for the near future.
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: call 1s go to the board and ask some questions
Questions:
What are you going to do on the weekend?
Key:
On Saturday morning I’m going to…
On Saturday afternoon I’m going to…
On Saturday everning I’m going to…
On Sunday morning I’m going to…
On Sunday afternoon I’m going to…
On Sunday everning I’m going to…
Other Ss give comment and give mark
* Warm up( 2’) Ask Ss to talk about their plans in free time
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Aks Ss to book at the picture (p 145) then listen & read
T: play the tape or read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Introduce some new words
T: Read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Ask Ss to practice reading
Ss: read
T: Ask Ss to ask and answer about their plans in B5 Ss: practice inpairs
S1: What is Minh going to do / bring?
S2: he is going to ……
Etc… T: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss to listen and match the name with the right picture Ss: Listen
T: Check and correct
15’
10’
10’
1. Listen and repeat
* New words
Camera:
Take photo:
Bring:
2. Practice ask and answer
What is ….. going to bring?
He is going to ………..
Ex: What is Minh going to bring?
Minh is going to bring some food
3. Listen Vui: A tent, some food.
Ly: Camara.
Lan: A ball.
Nga and Mai: Some drink. c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 14: MAKING PLANS
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: Make suggetions with let’s.
Further practice: - Want to do, what about, why don’t we?
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: call 1s go to the board and ask some questions
Questions:
What are you going to do on the weekend?
Key:
On Saturday morning I’m going to…
On Saturday afternoon I’m going to…
On Saturday everning I’m going to…
On Sunday morning I’m going to…
On Sunday afternoon I’m going to…
On Sunday everning I’m going to…
Other Ss give comment and give mark
* Warm up( 2’) Ask Ss to talk about their plans in free time
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Aks Ss to book at the picture (p 145) then listen & read
T: play the tape or read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Introduce some new words
T: Read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Ask Ss to practice reading
Ss: read
T: Ask Ss to ask and answer about suggestion in c1 Ss: practice
S1: Let's go camping S2: What bout going camping? Etc…
T: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss to read again and answer the questions Ss: Read again and answer the questions T: Check and correct
15’
10’
10’
1. Listen and read
a. New words
Pagoda:
Minibus
Too = Very:
Too far:
Good idea
b. Grammar
Let’s + V-inf
What about + Ving…?
Why don’t we + V-inf….?
E.g:Let's go camping! Why don't we go to Huong pagoda? 2. Practice ask and answer
a. He wants to go to Hue b. She wants to go to Huong Pagoda c. She wants to walk there
d. Because it’s too far
e. He wants to travel by bike
f. Because it’s too hot
g. He wants to travel by minibus
3. Make suggestons a. Let’s go to the beach b. What about going to the museum
c. Why don’t we play volleyball
etc…. c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
1. Objectives:
a. knowledge:
By the End of the lesson Ss can cousolidate vocabulary and structures on topics they have learnt from U12 -> U14
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c . Behavior:
Student like studying the subject and use English correctly
2. Preparations: a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture, chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids.
3. Steps of teaching:
a. Oral test: 2’
* Warm up Ask Ss to talk about the adv of freequency
c. New lesson: 40’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Aks Ss to look at the book (p 145) then retell the simple tense
Ss: Look at the book (p 145) then retell the simple tense
T: Guide Ss to do ex in group
Ss: Do ex
T: Check and correct
A. Huong : (1) …… you like sports ?
Ba : Yes. I (2) …… sports.
Huong : What (3) ……you play?
Ba : I (4) ……badminton.
Huong : (5) … you play volleyball?
Ba : No, I (6) ………
C. Minh : (1) ……they like sports?
Ha : Yes, they (2) ……
Minh : What (3) ….. they play?
Ha : They swim.
Minh : Do they dive?
Ha : No, they (4) ……
T: Aks Ss to look at the book (p 146) then retell the present progressivetense
Ss: Look at the book (p 146) then retell the simple tense
T: Guide Ss to do ex
Ss: Do ex
T: Check and correct
A. Hung : What are you watching ?
Mai : I ( 1) …….this TV sports.
Hung : What are they playing?
Mai : They are (2) ………………. soccer.
Hung : Who is winning ?
Mai : My favorite team (3) ……… the match.
B. Vui : What is Mom cooking ?
Nam : She (1) ……… a chicken.
Vui : Are we having some rice, too?
Nam : No, we (2) ……We are having noodles.
Vui : Is she cooking some vegetables ?
Nam : Yes, she (3) ……she is cooking some beans.
C. Nhan : Are you doing your homework?
Thanh : Yes, I (1) ………….. My math. What are you reading?
Nhan : I (2) ……………….. My history book.
T: Aks Ss to look at the book (p 146) then retell going to
Ss: Look at the book (p 145) then retell
T: Guide Ss to do ex in pairs
Ss: Do ex
T: Check and correct
EX : S1 : What are they going to do?
S2 : They are going to play soccer.
T Guide Ss to play a game lucky numbers use 12 numbers 2,5,9,10 are lucky numbers
Ss: Play game 8’
7’
8’
10’
7’ I. Present simple tense ( Thì hiện tại đơn) 1. Grammar
a. Form : (+) S + V / Vs, es + O.
(-) S + do/ does + not + O…
(?) Do / Does + S + V…?
Yes, S + Do/does
No, S + Don’t/doesn’t
b. Usage: Thì hiện tại đơn diễn tả sự thật, chân lý hay hành động, sự việc xảy ra theo thói quen hàng ngày
2. Practice exercise1 Complete the dialogue, using the present simple tense
B. Thu : (1) …… he like sports?
Tuan : Yes, he (2) ……
He (3) ………sports.
Thu : What (4) ……he play?
Tuan : He (5) …… soccer.
Thu : (6) …… he play tennis?
Tuan : No, he (7) ……
II. Adverbs of frequency 1. Network 2. Practice exercise 2
How often do you + V…….?
I + always/usually…. + V…. III. Present progressive tense
( thì hiện tại tiếp diễn)
1. Grammar a. Form :
(+) : S + am / is / are + V-ing + O
(-) : S + am /is /are + not +V-ing + O
(?) : Am / is /are + S + V-ing + O?
b. Usage : (thì hiện tại tiếp diễn, diễn tả hành động, sự việc đang diễn ra ở hiện tại)
2. Practice exercise 3
Complete the dialogue, using the present progressive tense.
IV. Going to 1. Grammar
a. Form : What + is /are /am + S + going to + do? ( S + is /are /am + going to + V . b. Usage: Diễn tả dự định trong tương lai. 2. Practice excerise 4
a. What are they going to do? b. Complete the dialouge Han : What are you going to do?
Vui : I (1) ………… visit HaNoi.
Han : Where are you going to stay?
Vui : I (2) ……… stay in a hotel.
Han : How long are you going to stay.
Vui : I (3) ……… stay for a week.
* Answer the questions :
What is Vui going to do ?
Where is she going to stay ?
How long is she going to stay? V. Lucky numbers 1. What׳s the weather like in the spring ? 2. Lucky number 3. What׳s the weather like in the summer? 4. What׳s the weather like in the fall? 5. Lucky number
6. What׳s the weather like in the winter? 7. What are you going to do this evening? 8. What are you going to do on the weekend? 9. Lucky number
10. Lucky number
11. What are you going to do tomorrow? 12. What are you going to do in the vacation? c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Period 89: A FORTY - FIVE MINUTE TEST 1. Objectives
a. Knowledge:
All the language items from unit 12 to 14
b. Skill:
Reading, listening, writing, language focus
c. Behavior:
Educate students use English correctly to do the test
2. Questions 45’ A. Listening: Listen and complete the table.(2pts) Name Place to visit? Where to stay? How long to stay? Lan (1)…....................... Friend’s house For five days Hoa Hue (2)….......................... for three days Mai (3)…………. With her uncle for two weeks Ba Ho Chi Minh city With his grandfather. For (4)…………. B. Reading: Read the passage (3pts) There are four seasons in a year. They are spring, summer, fall and winter. It is warm in the spring. Sometimes, it is cold but not very cold. There are many flowers in the spring. After spring comes summer. In the summer, the day is long and the night is short. They often go swimming in the summer. It is cool in the fall. In the winter, It is usually very cold. The day is short and the night is long.
I. Choose the best answer (1 pts) 1. There are ……………. seasons in a year.
a. three b. four c. five d. six
2. It is………………. in the fall
a. hot b. cold c. cool d. warm
II. Answer the questions: (2 pts)
2. What’s the weather like in the spring? -> …………………………………………………………
4. What do they often do in the summer? -> ………………………………………………………… C. Language focus: I. Choose the best answer.( 1pts) 1. Lan ………………… aerobics every morning.
a, do b. does c. to do d. doing
2. It is ……………. in the summer.
a. hot b. warm c. cold d. cool
3. What about………………….by car?
a. go b. to go c. going d. goes
4. Let’s…………………our homeworks
a. to do b. do c. does d. doing
II. Put the verb in the blank with suitable tense(2pts)
1. He (go)………walking in the mountain every week
2. They always (play) ………badminton in the fall
3. Mai(like)….. ……… traveling by car
4. Everyday, Ba (do) ………………not get up early
D. Writing: Write a passage about your vacation, using the following cues.( 2 pts)
This summer/ vacation/I / visit / Ha Noi city
I / stay/ with my friend / three weeks
I/ see/ Ngoc Son temple and parks
I/ play games / there.
3. Answer key and mark guide
I. Listening: (2ps) ( Each correct answer get mark 0. 5)
(1) Ha Noi; (2) in a hotel; (3) Ha Long Bay; (4) Two days II Reading (3ps)I. Choose the best answer (1 pts) ( Each correct answer get mark 0.5)
1. can; 2 some; 3. many; 4. like; 5. any; 6. much; 7. else; 8. much
II. Answer the questions ( Each correct answer get mark 0,5)
1. It is warm in the spring
2. They often go swimming in the summer III. Language focus (3ps)
1 I. Choose the best answer (Each correct answer get mark 0.25)
1. b 2.a 3. c 4. b II. Put the verb in the blank with suitable tense ( Each correct answer get mark 0.5)
a. goes; b. play; c. likes ; d. does IV. Writing: Write a passage about your vacation, using the following cues. ( Each correct answer get mark 0.5) This summer vacation Iam going to visit Ha Noi city. I am going to stay with my friend for three weeks. I’m going to see Ngoc Son temple and parks. I’m going to play games there 4. Comment
* Knowledge:
* Skill:
- Listening:
- Reading:
- Language focus:
- Writing:
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Period 90: CORRECT THE TEST 1. Objectives
a. Knowledge:
Help Ss correct the mistakes in their test, Ss will know mistake and correct them, Ss can get more experiment for next tests
b. Skill:
Reading, listening, writing, language focus
c. Behavior:
Educate students use English correctly and get more experiment for next tests
2. Correction (43’) T gives Ss test papers and commend
T: Ask Ss go to the board do again the test
Ss: do again
T: Give test to Ss and get Ss pairs compare
Ss: Compare in pairs
T: Check and correct
*Keys
I. Listening: (2ps) ( Each correct answer get mark 0. 5)
(1) Ha Noi; (2) in a hotel; (3) Ha Long Bay; (4) Two days
II Reading (3ps)I. Choose the best answer (1 pts) ( Each correct answer get mark 0.5)
1. can; 2 some; 3. many; 4. like; 5. any; 6. much; 7. else; 8. much
II. Answer the questions ( Each correct answer get mark 0,5)
1. It is warm in the spring
2. They often go swimming in the summer
III. Language focus (3ps)
1 I. Choose the best answer (Each correct answer get mark 0.25)
1. b 2.a 3. c 4. b
II. Put the verb in the blank with suitable tense ( Each correct answer get mark 0.5)
a. goes; b. play; c. likes ; d. does
IV. Writing: Write a passage about your vacation, using the following cues. ( Each correct answer get mark 0.5) This summer vacation Iam going to visit Ha Noi city. I am going to stay with my friend for three weeks. I’m going to see Ngoc Son temple and parks. I’m going to play games there
3. Guide to do at home(2’) Do again the test in your exercise book
Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 15: COUNTRIES 1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to ask and answer about the nationality and languages of some countries in the world
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 2’
* Warm up T: Show the pictures on page 154 and ask some question.
1- Do you know where these people come from ?
2- Do you want to know where they are fom ?
Ss: Work in groups and discuss the Qs
c. New lesson: 40’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: use the picture in the book to introduce the name of some countries Ss: Look at picture and call the name of countries ( in Vietnamese)
T: Open the tape or read
Ss: Listen and repeat.
T: Read and write the new words on the board
Ss: Copy and read.
T: Guide Ss to read the picture with people from other countries Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Check and correct their pronunciation
Some Ss read before the class T: Introduce the form to ask and answer about where someone from T: Write on the board
Ss: Look, listen and copy
T: Give Model sentences and ask Ss to practice
Ss: Practice to ask and answer
S1: Where is Laura from?
S2: She is from Canada Etc…
T; Check and correct T: Ask Ss to look in the book (page 155) and read about Minh
Ss: Look and listen
T: Introduce nationality and language of some coutries in A3
T: Read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Ask Ss to read before the class
Some Ss read
T: Introduce new form to ask and answer about nationality and language
Ss: Look, listen and copy
T: Ask Ss practice to ask and answer about nationality and language of some people from other countries Ss: Practice inpairs S1: Who’s that?
S2: That’s Yoko S1: Where is she from?
S2: She is from Japan S1: What’s her nationality?
S2: She is Japanese
S1: Which language does she speak?
S2: She speaks Japanese Etc… T: Ask Ss to look at pictures of some famous people from many coutries and say about their countries; nationalities and languages Ss: Look at pictures and practice
Eg: T shows a picture of president from The USA Barack Obama and ask
Where is he from?
What’s his nationality?
Which language does he speak?
He is from The USA
He is American
He speaks English Etc… T: Ask Ss to introduce themselvse by answer some questions Ss: Practice
T: Check and correct 20’
20’
I. Countries 1. New words Canada: France
China:
USA:
Japan:
Great Britain
Australia:
2. Hỏi và trả lời ai đó đến từ đâu Where + tobe + S + from? S + tobe + from + country
Ex: Where are you from? I’m from Viet nam
Model sentences Where is Laura from?
She is from Canada 3. Hỏi và trả lời về quốc tịch và ngôn ngữ
Nationality(n): Quốc tịch Language(n): Ngôn ngữ
a. Hỏi và trả lời về quốc tịch
What + His/her/your/their + nationality ?
(Quốc tịch của anh ấy/cô ấy/bạn/họ là gì)
S + tobe + nationality(quốc tịch)
b. Hỏi và trả lời về ngôn ngữ Which language + do/does + S + speak?
S + speak (s) + language(ngôn ngữ)
II. Practice 1. Mapped dialogue
A: Who’s that?
B: That’s ……… A: Where … … from?
B: … … from ………… A: What’s … .. nationality?
B: He/she is …………
A: Which language does …. speak?
B: … .. speaks ……………. 2. Further practice She is from Viet Nam.
She is Vietnamese.
She speaks Vietnamese. 3. Answer about you Where are you from?
I’m from …………
What’s your nationality?
I’m …………….
Which language do you speak?
I speak …………….
c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 15: COUNTRIES
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to ask and answer about the nationality and languages of some countries in the world
Write a postcard about being on vacation to their friends.
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer Ss: Go to the board and answer Questions: Show the picture of some people and ask Ss to answer about their countries; nationalities and languages Introduce about youself Key:
She is from Viet Nam.
She is Vietnamese.
She speaks Vietnamese. I speak …………….
I’m from …………
Etc…
Others S giving the opinions
T: Correct the answers and give mark
* Warm up T: Show the letter in page 156 and ask ? What is this?
Ss: Look and discuss the Qs
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Ask Ss look at the letter and read T: Introduce some new words
T: Write on the board
Ss: Look, listen and copy
T: Ask some Ss to read the letter Ss: Read
T: Guide Ss to write similar postcard for Minh depend on the postcard from Nhan Ss: Write
T: Ask Some Ss to read their reading
Ss: Read before the class
T: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss to look in A3 answer the questions Ss: Look and answer in pairs
S1: What is your name?
S2: a. My name is…
S1: How old are you?
S2: I’m….. years old
Etc…
T: Check and correct
10’
15’ 10’
1. Read the postcard
A postcard: Interesting place: A lot of:
2. Write a postcard Dear Nhan, I’m on vacationn in…….
3. Answer the questions
a. My name is… b. I’m….. years old
c. I’m from…..
etc… c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 15: COUNTRIES
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to :Use the comparative and superlative form of short adjectives
Compare places using comparative and superlative adjective
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer Ss: Go to the board and answer Questions:
1. Read the postcard they have written in the last lesson 2. Answer some questions
Key:
1. Dear Nhan,
I’m on vacationn in…….
2. a. My name is…
b. I’m….. years old
c. I’m from…..
Etc…
Others S giving the opinions
T: Correct the answers and give mark
* Warm up T: Show the picture in page 158 and ask Ss to compare the buildings and houses Ss: Look and discuss
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Ask Ss look at pictures and compare the building and house Ss: Look and compare
T: Read
Ss: Listen and repeat
Some Ss read before the class
T: Introduce the structures of The comparative and superlative form of short adjectives Ss: Look listen and copy T: Give ex and ask Ss give some ex
Ss: Give ex
T: Ask Ss to look at B2 and ask
? Where is this?
Ss: Look and answer
T: Read the passage
Ss: Listen
T: Introduce some new words
Ss: Look listen and copy
T: Guide Ss to read the passage
Some Ss read before the class
T: Ask Ss to answer the questions
Ss: Read again and answer in pairs T: Check and correct
T: Introduce Sears tower in Chicago and
Petronas Twin towers in Kuala Lumpur T: Ask Ss to read
Ss: Reas T: Ask ss to guess which is taller: Sear towers or Petronas twin towers?
Ss: Read and check
+ Sears tower is 442 meters high
+ Petronas twin towers is 452 meters high
Ss Answer Petronas twin towers is taller than Sears tower
T: Ask ss to look at the picture in B4 and guess what is it? And Where is it?
T: Introduce the Great wall in China T: Read and introduce some new words Ss: Look listen and copy
T: Guide Ss to read
Ss: Read
T; Ask Ss to read again then answer the questions
Ss: Answer in pairs
S1: How long is the Great wall?
S2: It is over 6,000 kilometers long
Etc…
10’
10’
15’
1. The comparative and superlative form of short adjectives
a. Comparative: short adj+er
big→bigger
small→smaller
S1 +be +short adj-er +than +S2
E.g: Hoa is taller than Nga
b. superlative: short adj + est
big→bigest
small→smallest S + tobe + the + adj-est
E.g: Hoa is the tallest
Big = > bigger = > the biggest.
Wet = > wetter => the wettest.
Hot = > hotter = > the hottest.
Cold = > colder = > the coldest.
Small = > smaller = > the smallest.
Tall = > taller = > the talest.
2. Listen and read a. New words
In the world: Population:
Capital:
b. Answer the questions
a. No, it isn’t b. Mexico City is the biggest city in the world
c. Tokyo is bigger 3. Some world famous places a. Towers Sears tower:
Petronas Twin towers:
Which is taller Sear towers or Petronas twin towers?
b. The Great wall of China
The Great wall:
High:
Thick: How + long is the Great wall? high
thick
c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 15: COUNTRIES
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: • By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: Introduce about the country, use some place nouns and talk about some natural features of VN
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer Ss: Go to the board and answer Questions:
1. Retell the structures of The comparative and superlative form of short adjectives 2. Change some adj in to comparative and superlative
a. Cold; b. Small; c. Tall; d. Wet; e. big Key:
1. S + tobe + the + adj-est
S1 +be +short adj-er +than +S2
2. Change some adj in to comparative and superlative Cold - colder - the coldest
Small - smaller - the smallset.
Tall - taller - the tallest.
big - bigger - the biggest.
Wet - wetter - the westest.
Etc…
Others S giving the opinions
T: Correct the answers and give mark
* Warm up(2) T: Show the picture in page 162 and ask ? Where is it?
Ss: Look and answer c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Ask Ss look at pictures and read Ss: Look and read T: Read
Ss: Listen
T: Introduce some new words and the structure lots of E.g:We have lots of beaches
T: Guide Ss to read the passage
Some Ss read before the class
T: Ask ss to do exercise in C1: Complete the passage
Call on some ss to give answers
T: Check and correct T: Ask Ss to practice in pairs to ask and answer
Ss: Practice in pairs
S1: Does VN have any rain?
S2: Yes, it does
Etc… 25’
10’ I. Listen and read 1. New words Lots of: Red/Mekong River:
Rain:
Forest:
Desert:
2. Complete the passage a. mountains
b. rivers
c. lakes
d. rain
e. forests
f. beaches
g. deserts
II. Ask and answer Does VN have any…? Yes, it does/No, it doesn’t c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 15: COUNTRIES
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: • By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: Introduce about the country, use some place nouns and talk about some natural features of VN and in the world
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer Ss: Go to the board and answer Questions:
1. Complete the passage using pictures
2. Does VN have any…?
Key:
1. a. mountains b. rivers etc…
2. Yes, it is/ No, it isn’t Etc…
Others S giving the opinions
T: Correct the answers and give mark
* Warm up(2) Ask ss some questions:
1.Which is the highest mountain in the world?
2.Which is the longest river in VietNam?
3.Which is longer:The Red river or the Mekong river?
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Ask Ss look at the book page 165 and listen
Ss: Look and read
T: Read
Ss: Listen
T: Introduce some new words
T: Write on the board
T: Read the new words
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Guide Ss to read the passage
Some Ss read before the class
T: Check and correct
T: Ask ss to do exercise in C3: answer the questions T: Ask Ss to practice in pairs to ask and answer
Ss: Practice in pairs
Call on some ss to give answers
T: Check and correct
20’
15’
1. New words
Flow to: Chảy xuống.
The sea:
Tibet:
North of africa:
Mediteranean
It starts in Tibet.
The Nile river.
The Mediteranean sea. Địa trung hải Mount Everest: 2. Answer the questions a.The Mekong river is the longest river in VN
b. The Mekong river startes in China
c.The Nile river is the longest river in the world
d. The Nile river flow to The Mediterranean sea
e. Mount Everest is the highest mountain in the world f. Phanxipang is the highest mountain in VN
c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 16: MAN AND THE ENVIRONMENT
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: • By the end of the lesson, students will be able to :
+Use How much and How many question with some quantity adjs(some, a lot, a little, a few) Countable and uncountable quantifiers b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer Ss: Go to the board and answer Questions:
1.Which is the highest mountain in the world?
2.Which is the longest river in VietNam?
3.Which is longer:The Red river or the Mekong river?
Key:
1. Mount Everest is the highest mountain in the world 2. The Mekong river is the longest river in VN
Etc…
Others S giving the opinions
T: Correct the answers and give mark
* Warm up(2) Ask Ss to list some countable and uncountable nouns about food
Ss: Make a list
b. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Ask ss to look at the picture in A1 and comment about rice and egg in each
T: Present the use of Some/a lot/a few/little S: Look listen and copy T: Read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Ask ss to say again How much; How many questions
T: Write on the board
Ss: Copy
T: Ask Ss to look at a3 listen and write the letter of picture under the right heading Ss: Listen and write the letter of picture under the right heading Some Ss read their listening T: Check and correct 10’
15’
10’ 1. Some quantity adjs
- Some/a lot/a few+plural countable nouns
- Some/a lot of/a little+uncountable nouns Lots of = a lot of:
2. How much and How many question with some quantity adjs
How much + uncountable nouns?
How many+ countable nouns..?
*Model sentence:
+ How much rice is there?
There is some.
+ How many eggs are there?
There are some.
There are alot of/ lots of / a few eggs 3. Practice
*Keys:
A lot of.
Some.
A lot of.
A few.
A litte.
Some.
c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 16: MAN AND THE ENVIRONMENT
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: • By the end of the lesson, students will be able to :
+Use How much and How many question with some quantity adjs(some, a lot, a little, a few) and to know about castle and plant vocabulary
Countable and uncountable quantifiers
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer Ss: Go to the board and answer Questions:
1. Retell again the use of Some/a lot/a few/little 2. Make question with How much + uncountable nouns?/How many+ countable nouns..?
Key:
1. - Some/a lot/a few+plural countable nouns
- Some/a lot of/a little+uncountable nouns
2. + How much rice is there?
There is some.
+ How many eggs are there? Etc…
Others S giving the opinions
T: Correct the answers and give mark
* Warm up(2) Ask Ss to list some countable and uncountable nouns about food
Ss: Make a list
b. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Ask Ss to look at the picture in A2 and ask what does he do?
T: Ask Ss the questions in Vietnamese
?What do farmers produce?
Ss: Answer T: Read the passage
T: Ask Ss to find the new words
Ss: Find the new words
T: Introduce the new words
S: Look listen and copy
T: Read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Ask Ss to read the passage
Ss: Read T: Ask Ss to answer the questions Ss: Practice in pairs to answer the questions
S1:
T: Check and correct 20’
15’
1. New words
On the farm: ở trang trại
Animals: Động vật. Buffalo: Con trâu.
Cow: Con bò.
Pull a card: Kéo xe bò.
Produce: Sản xuất.
Plow: Cày.
2. Answer the questions a. He produces a lot of rice b. Yes, he does
c. He produces a little fruit
d. His cows produce a little milk
e. His chickens produce a lot of eggs c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 16: MAN AND THE ENVIRONMENT
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: • By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: Further practice in present progressive to talk about environment and know how to protect the invironment b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject and know how to protect the invironment 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer Ss: Go to the board and answer Questions:
1. Retell again the use of Some/a lot/a few/little 2. Answer the questions
a. How much rice does Mr. Hai produce?
b. How much fruit does he produce?
c. How many eggs do his chickens produce?
Key:
1. - Some/a lot/a few+plural countable nouns
- Some/a lot of/a little+uncountable nouns
2. a. He produces a lot of rice b. He produces a little fruit
c. His chickens produce a lot of eggs Others S giving the opinions
T: Correct the answers and give mark
* Warm up(2) Ask Ss to talk about some important problems that the man face nowadays
Ss: Talk about some important problems that the man face nowadays b. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Ask Ss to look at the picture in A4 and discuss the topic
T: Read the passage
T: Ask Ss to find the new words
Ss: Find the new words
T: Introduce the new words
S: Look listen and copy
T: Read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Ask Ss to read the passage
Ss: Read
T: Introduce the questions with why and because Ss: Listen and copy
T: Ask Ss to answer the questions
Ss: Practice in pairs to answer the questions
S1: Why do we need more land? S2: Because……….
T: Check and correct 20’
15’
1. New words
More: Nhiều hơn.
Need: Cần.
Land: Đất.
Cut down: Chặt xuống.
Burn: Đốt .
Destroy: Phá huỷ.
Asian: Châu á.
Danger: Nguy hiểm
2. Answer the questions with why and because Why + V…..?: Tại sao?
Because: Tại vì a. Because there are more people b. Because they need more fields
c. Because we are destroying plants and animals c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 16: MAN AND THE ENVIRONMENT
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to :
+Know some vocabulary about the environment and some imperatives about the environment. Pollution of invironment, protect the invironment and present progressive b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject and know how to protect the invironment 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer Ss: Go to the board and answer Questions:
1. Why do we need more land?
2. Why do farmer burn the forest?
3. Why are these Asian animal in danger?
Key:
1. Because there are more people
2. Because they need more fields
3. Because we are destroying plants and animals Others S giving the opinions
T: Correct the answers and give mark
* Warm up(2) Ask Ss to talk about some important problems that the man face nowadays
Ss: Talk about some important problems that the man face nowadays b. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Ask Ss to look at the picture in B1 and discuss the topic
T: Read the passage
T: Ask Ss to find the new words
Ss: Find the new words
T: Introduce the new words
S: Look listen and copy
T: Read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Ask Ss to read the passage
Ss: Read
T: Introduce the questions with and ask Ss to read carefully then answer the questions Ss: Practice in pairs to answer the questions
S1: Ask S2: Answer
T: Check and correct
T: Ask ss to look at the pictures on page 170 and say what we should or shouldn't do to our environment?
T: Introduce some new words
T: Ask Ss do matching
Ss: Do matching
T: Check and correct 15’
10’
10’ 1. New words
Invironment: Môi trường.
Wild animal: Động vật hoang dã.
Wasting: Phí phạm.
Coal: Than dầu.
Oil: Dầu.
Gas: Ga.
Power: Điện năng.
Gases: Các chất khí.
Trash: Rác.
Ocean: Đại dương.
2. Answer the questions a. Because we are destroying the forests
b. Gases are polluting the air
c. The pollution come from coal, oil, gas
d.We are producing too much trash
3. Listen and read Pick: Hái
Throw: Ném, vứt
Keep off the grass: Ko dẫm lên cỏ Save water:
Collcet the paper Follow these rule:Theo quy định.
A-c B-f C-a D-h E-e F-b G-g H-d
c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 16: MAN AND THE ENVIRONMENT
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to :
+ Know some vocabulary about the environment, Pollution of invironment, protect the invironment + Use Should, shouldn’t; talk about some activities to protect the envi ronment in Vietnam
b. skill: Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject and know how to protect the invironment 2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer Ss: Go to the board and answer Questions:
1. Why are wild animals and plants in danger?
2. What is polluting the air?
3. Where does the pollution come from?
d. What is polluting the land, the rivers and the oceans
Key:
1. Because we are destroying the forests
2. Gases are polluting the air
3. The pollution come from coal, oil, gas
4.We are producing too much trash
Others S giving the opinions
T: Correct the answers and give mark
Warm up(2)
T: Ask ss to do the Matching A B Collect Trash on the street Don't pick Water Don't throw The grass Save Flowers Keep off paper b. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Ask Ss to look at B4 and discuss the topic
T: Read the passage
T: Ask Ss to find the new words
Ss: Find the new words
T: Introduce the new words
S: Look listen and copy
T: Read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Ask Ss to read the passage
Ss: Read in groups S1: Lan
S2: Ba
S3: Nga
S4: Nam
T: Introduce should and shouldn't
Ss: Listen and copy
T: Ask Ss to write rules for the pictures Ss: Practice to write rules for the pictures T: Check and correct
10’
10’ 15’
1. New words
Leaves: Xả, bỏ.
Put: Để, Đặt.
Trash can: Thùng rác
2. Should and shouldn’t Shold/sholdn’t + V + O
E.g:We should save water
3. Read Recycle: Tái chế.
Waste food: Thức ăn thừa.
Feed: Cho ăn.
Pig: Con Lợn.
Empty: Trống rỗng.
Scrap: Phế thải.
Metal: Sắt thép.
Plastic Nhựa.
*Answer the questions a. In VN, we collect empty bottles, cans, waste paper, scrap metal and old plastice and recycle them
b, We feed it to pigs
c. Factories recycle them
d. Yes I do
e. We collect waste paper for school mini- project(kế hoạch nhỏ) c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
1. Objectives:
a. knowledge:
By the End of the lesson Ss can cousolidate vocabulary and structures on topics they have learnt from U14-> U16
Further practice in Present simple,present progressive,comparative and superlative forms of adjs and indefinite quantifiers:a few/a little/a lot/lots
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c . Behavior:
Student like studying the subject and use English correctly
2. Preparations: a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture, chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids.
3. Steps of teaching:
a. Oral test: 2’
* Warm up Ask Ss to talk about the adv of freequency
c. New lesson: 40’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Aks Ss to look at the book (p 174) then retell the simple tense
Ss: Look at the book (p 174) then retell the simple tense
T: Guide Ss to do ex in group
Ss: Do ex
T: Check and correct
E.g: a. Nam:Where are you from?
Tom:I am from Canada
Nam:Do you speak Vietnamese?
Tom:No,I don't.I speak English and
French
T: Aks Ss to retell the present progressivetense
Ss: Retell T: Guide Ss to do ex
Ss: Do ex
T: Check and correct
E.g: a. What is her name?
Her name is Susan
T: Introduce the structures of The comparative and superlative form of short adjectives Ss: Look listen and copy
T: Ask Ss to do ex Ss: Do ex
T: Check and correct
adj comparative superlative Long Short Tall Small Big High
thick Longer Shorter Taller Smaller Bigger Higher
thicker The longest The shortest The tallest The smallest The biggest The highest
The thickest T: Aks Ss to retell the use of Some/a lot/a few/little Ss: Retell
T: Guide Ss to do ex
T: Ask ss to complete the passage in exercise
4 with a partner
*The street of HN are very busy.There is a lots of traffic. Most people only *The street of HN are very busy.There is a lots of traffic. Most people only have a little money to
spend on transportation. As a result,there are only a few private cars on the roads.
The bike is the cheapest form of transportation,so there are a lots of bikes. There are a lots of motobikes, too. There are a lots of taxis, but they are expensive
Ss: Do ex
T: Check and correct 10’
10’
10’
10’
I. Present simple tense ( Thì hiện tại đơn) 1. Grammar
(+) S + V / Vs, es + O.
(-) S + do/ does + not + O…
(?) Do / Does + S + V…?
Yes, S + Do/does
No, S + Don’t/doesn’t
2. Practice exercise1 b. speaks
c. speaks Chinese d.speaks Japenese
e.speaks Vietnamese f.speaks English
II. Present progressive tense
( thì hiện tại tiếp diễn)
1. Grammar (+) : S + am / is / are + V-ing + O
(-) : S + am /is /are + not +V-ing + O
(?) : Am / is /are + S + V-ing + O?
2. Practice excerise 2 b.lives
c.is-is staying d.is
e.does-teaches
f.does-teach-doesn't- teaches
III. Adjectives: Comparatives and superlatives a. Comparative: short adj+er
big→bigger
small→smaller
S1 +be +short adj-er +than +S2
E.g: Hoa is taller than Nga
b. superlative: short adj + est
big→bigest
small→smallest S + tobe + the + adj-est
E.g: Hoa is the tallest
Big = > bigger = > the biggest.
2. Practice excerise 3
a. longer-the longest
b. the longest c. the tallest-taller-the tallest
d. the biggest-bigger-the IV. Some quantity adjs
- Some/a lot/a few+plural countable nouns
- Some/a lot of/a little+uncountable nouns
Lots of = a lot of
c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
1. Objectives:
a. knowledge:
• By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: further practice with the verb "To be" in present simple tense,asking and answering about quantity,some i mperatives;asking and aswering about things with This/That/These/Those and quesstion words; Possesive pronouns and greeting
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c . Behavior:
Student like studying the subject and use English correctly. Ss have feeling that It's easy to learn the subject 2. Preparations: a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture, chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids.
3. Steps of teaching:
a. Oral test: 2’
* Warm up Ask ss to play Simon say with some imperatives
a.come in b.sit down
c.stand up d.open your book e.close your book f.bye/good by e
c. New lesson: 40’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Ask ss to work in groups and practice greeting each other by using some greeting sentences
1.Hello
2.How are you?I'm fine ,thanks
3.Good morning ..
Ask ss to revise the meaning and form of the verb"To be" am/are/is
-Ask ss to give examples
E.g:I'm eleven years old
-Ask them to read the answers and the questions from h to n on page 176
Ss:Work in groups and practice with a partner
T: Check and correct
T: Request Ss to say again the way of asking and answering about quantity then ask them to give examples
Ss: Give examples then do ex
T: Check and correct
T: Point to things and practice asking and answering with This/That/These/Those
-Ask ss to practice asking and answering about things in the class
E.g:What is this? -This is a table
T: Call on some pairs to practice to class
Ss: Practice T: Revise some question words then ask Ss to practice themselves
Ss: Practice
T: Ask Ss to revise Prossessive pronouns Ss: Retell
T: Ask ss to make sentences with these possessive pronouns Ss: Make sentence
10’
8’
10’
8’ 4’ I. Present simple tense with tobe 1. Grammar
(+) S + am/is/are + O.
(-) S + am/is/are + not + O…
(?)am/is/are + S + O?
Yes, S + am/is/are No, S + am/is/are + not 2. Practice exercise1 E.g:S1:Hello!my name is Lan
S2:Hi,Lan!My name is Nga
How are you,Lan?
S1:I'm fine,Thanks and you?
S2:Fine,thanks
Ec… II. There There is + DT số it There are + DT số nhiều
There is one
There are two
III. This/that/these/those
*Note:This/That+singular countable nouns
These/Those+plural countable nouns
+This/These to talk about thing that is near the speaker
+That/Those to talk about thing that far from the speaker
IV. Question words What/how/where/when…..
Eg: S1: How old are you?
S: I’m 12
Etc…
V. Prossessive pronouns
I You We They She He It
My your our their her his its
c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
1. Objectives:
a. knowledge:
• By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: Further practice in present simple tense,days of the week; some modal verbs; adverb of frequency and indefinite quantifiers
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c . Behavior:
Student like studying the subject and use English correctly. Ss have feeling that It's easy to learn the subject 2. Preparations: a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture, chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids.
3. Steps of teaching:
a. Oral test: 2’
* Warm up T: Ask Ss to find in the book which part use present simple tense c. New lesson: 40’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Ask ss to say again the use and form of the present simple tense. Guide ss to read part 9,14,19,25 and 30 chorally
Ss: Retell and read
T: Ask ss to work in pairs, practice asking and asnwering the Qs about themselves
Ss: Practtice
T: Guide Ss to retell days of the week
Ss: Retell
T: Guide Ss to practice ask and answer about subjectat school with “when” T: Show the Ly's timetable and ask ss to practice asking and answering about her with a friend
E.g:S1:When does Ly have English?
S2:She has E on Monday and Friday
T: Call on some pairs to practice
T: Ask Ssto retell Adverbs of frequency T: Call on some pairs to practice to class
Ask ss to work in pairs and practice asking and answering about their habits
E.g:S1:How often do you help your mom?
S2:I often help my mom
T: Call on some ss to practice in front of the class
And ask ss to say again the way of offering and giving advice
Ss: Practice in pairs T: Ask Ss to retell modal verbs
Ss: Retell
T: Ask ss to give some countble and uncountable nouns
T: Revise the way of using a/an/some/any/a few/a little,a lot/lots of
Ss: Retell
10’
8’
5’’
5’ 8’
4’
I. Present simple tense ( Thì hiện tại đơn) 1. Grammar
(+) S + V / Vs, es + O.
(-) S + do/ does + not + O…
(?) Do / Does + S + V…?
Yes, S + Do/does
No, S + Don’t/doesn’t
2. Practice Do you like noodles? Yes, I do
Ec… II. Days of the week Monday; Tuesday; Wednesday; Thursday; Friday; Saturday; Sunday
Form:
When do we have + subject?
We’ve it on + day in the week.
Does/ do + S + on + ....
Eg : When do we have english ?
We have english on Tuesday, Thursday and Saturday
III. Adverbs of frequency Always,usually, often Etc…
IV. Would/want/need S+Would+Like+O
E.g: What do you want/need?
I'd like an apple
V. Modal verbs: can/must/should Can/must/should + V + O
Giving advice
S+Should/shouldn't+V+O
VI. Indefinite quantifiers
A/an/some/any/a few/a little,a lot/lots of
E.g:apple,banana,orange, meat, rice…
c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
1. Objectives:
a. knowledge:
• By the end of the lesson, students will be able to :
further practice in the present progressive tense;preposition;adjectives;comparative and superlative forms;expressing a future action;weather and the seasons
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c . Behavior:
Student like studying the subject and use English correctly. Ss have feeling that It's easy to learn the subject 2. Preparations: a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture, chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids.
3. Steps of teaching:
a. Oral test: 2’
* Warm up T: Ask Ss to retell some prepositions Ss: Retell: in/on /next to/etc… c. New lesson: 40’
Teacher and students’s actives. Contents. T: Ask Ss to retell the present progressive tense
Ss: Retell
T: Ask ss to give examples
T: Guide ss to read part 15 and 27
Ss: Read
T: Ask ss to work in pairs and practice the Qs about themselves. Call on some pairs to practice to class
Ss: Practice Ask ss to say again the way of expressing
a future action
-Ask them to give examples
E.g:?What are you going to do?
I'm going to visit Hue
T: Ask ss to play Noughts and Crosses
Ss: Play game
T: Ask ss some Qs
1.Which season do you like best?
2.Why?
T: Ask ss the question:What's the weather like in the[spring]?
T: Request ss to write a short paragraph about the season they like best T: Ask Ss to retell the adjs
Ss: Retell
T: Ask Ss to give ex
Ss: Give ex
Ex: He is tall
T: Use the picture and ask ss to compare the house and the store
E.g:The house is taller than the store
-Ask them to say again the superlative and comparative form of adjs
-Request ss to make 5sentences using these forms to compare their friends E.g:Hoa is taller than Lan
Hung is the tallest person 10’
8’
8’
6’
8’
I. Present progressive tense 1. Grammar
(+) S + tobe + V-ing
(-) S + tobe + not + V-ing
(?) tobe + S + V-ing?
Yes, S + tobe / No, S + tobe + not
I am + V-ing
She/he/it + is + V-ing
You/we/they + are + V-ing
E.g(+)We are learning English now
(-)I'm not reading book
(?)What is he doing?
2. Practice What are you doing?
I'm reading an English book Ec… II. Going to What + is /are /am + S + going to + do? ( S + is /are /am + going to + V
E.g:?What are you going to do?
+I'm going to visit Hue
III. Weather and seasons Hot; warm; cool; cold; summer etc… E.g:I like spring.It's warm.I often go
fishing and go camping with my friends IV. Adjectives Big; sall; etc…
V. Comparative and superlative forms
1. Comparative: short adj+er
big→bigger
small→smaller
S1 +be +short adj-er +than +S2
E.g: Hoa is taller than Nga
2. superlative: short adj + est
big→bigest/small→smallest
S + tobe + the + adj-est
E.g: Hoa is the tallest
c. Summary: 2’ T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
PAGE 5
Ss: Look and answer
T: Introduce the new words
T: Use picture to introduce other new words
(road signs) the same
Ss: Listen and write
T: Read Ss listen and repeat
T: Check and correct
T: Ask some Ss to read the new words
Ss: Read
T: Guide Ss to read the passage
Ss: Read before the class
T: Introduce the modal verbs must and must not
Ss: Listen and coppy
T: Ask Ss look at C4 and listen
Ss: listen and nuber the sign
T: Correct if necessary
25’
10’
1. Road signs
a. New words
Interection(n): Ngó tư
Dangerous(adj): Nguy hiểm
Accident(n): Tai nạn
slow down >
Stop(v): Dừng lại
b. Must and must not
Must(v): Được phép
must not (v): Ko được phép
+ Yêu cầu ai đó phải làm việc gỡ?
S + must + v
+ yêu cầu ai đó ko được phép làm việc gỡ
S + must not (mustn't) + v…
Eg. You must stop
You must not go ahead
2. Listen
1-c: You can’t turn right here
2-d: There’s a stop sign. I must stop
3-h: You can’t park here
4-a: You must slow down. There’s an intersection
5-g; You can go a head
6-b; we can turn left
7-f: You can’t ride motobike
c. Summary: 2’
T: Retells the content of the lesson
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
Learn the lesson
Do exercise in your work book.
Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………Period 49: GRAMMAR PRACTICE
1. Objectives:
a. knowledge:
By the enf of the lesson Ss can consolidate words and forms from U6- U8 do ex well
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c . Behavior:
Student like studying the subject and use English correctly
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture, chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids.
3. Steps of teaching:
a. Oral test: 5’
* Warm up:
T: Ask the Ss to retell all the grammar structure that they have learn from U6 toU8
Ss: Retell
b. New lesson: 37’
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Ask Ss retell the present simple tense
Ss: Retell
T: Write on the board
T: Ask Ss to do ex 1 in the book
Ss: Listen to teacher and do ex in the book
Ss: Work individually to do ex
T: correct their mistakes
T: Ask Ss retell the present progressive tense
Ss: Retell
T: Write on the board
T: Ask Ss to do ex 2 in the book
Ss: Listen to teacher and do ex in the book
Ss: Work individually to do ex
Other Ss give command
T: correct their mistakes
T: Ask Ss to do ex 5 in the book contract present simple tense and present progressive tense
Ss: Listen to teacher and do ex in the book
Ss: Work pairs to do ex
Other Ss give command
T: correct their mistakes
T: Ask Ss retell the prepositions of place
Ss: Retell
T: Write on the board
T: Ask Ss to do ex 3 in the book
Ss: Listen to teacher and do ex in the book
Ss: Work in groups to do ex
Other Ss give command
T: correct their mistakes
T: Ask Ss retell must and must not
Ss: Retell
T: Write on the board
T: Ask Ss to do ex 6 in the book
Ss: Listen to teacher and do ex in the book
Ss: Work individually to do ex
Other Ss give command
T: correct their mistakes
T: Ask Ss retell can and can’t
Ss: Retell
T: Write on the board
T: Ask Ss to do ex 7 in the book
Ss: Listen to teacher and do ex in the book
Ss: Work individually to do ex
Other Ss give command
8’
10’
8’
6’
5’
I. Present simple tense
1. Grammar
+) S (I / you / we/ they) + V
+) She / he / it + V (s/es)
-) I/ you / we / they + do not + V - listen copy.
-) She / he/ it+ does not + V
?)Do + I / you / we / they + V?
Yes, S + do / No, S + do + not
?)Does + she / he / it + V?
Yes, S + does/No, S + does + not
- Thỡ hiện tại đơn diễn đạt thói quen hay hành động thường sảy ra thường lập đi lập lại
2. Practic. Exercise 1
a. go, go
b. travel, travels
c. walk, don’t walk, does …walk, walks
II. Present progressive
1. Grammar
(+) S + tobe + V-ing
(-) S + tobe + not + V-ing
(?) tobe + S + V-ing?
Yes, S + tobe / No, S + tobe + not
I am + V-ing
She/he/it + is + V-ing
You/we/they + are + V-ing
Usage: Thỡ HT tiếp diễn diễn tả hành động đang diễn ra tại thời điểm nói thường có từ ‘now’ bây giờ; ‘at the moment’ ngay lúc này
Ex: I’m playing video games
2. Practice.
*Exercise 2
a. is riding; b. Are waiting; c. Is watching;
d. Are playing; e. Is listening; f. Are walking; g. Is traveling;
*Exercise 5. Contract present simple tense and present progressive tense
a. Play, is playing; b. rides, is riding
c. go, are going; d. walk, am walking
e. drives, is driving
III. Prepositions
a. Prepositions of place
to the left of; in; behind; in front of;
to the right of; opposite;
b. Exercise 4
In infront of / behind /opposite / to the right of/ to the left of.
VI. Must and must not
1. Grammar
+ Yêu cầu ai đó phải làm việc gỡ?
S + must + v
+ yêu cầu ai đó ko được phép làm việc gỡ
S + must not (mustn't) + v…
2. Practice
a. must; must not
b. must; must not; must not
c. must; must not
V. Can and can’t
1. Grammar
Can(v): Cú thể
Can’t(v): Ko thể
+) S + can + V-infi
-) S + can not + V-infi
can not = can’t
2. Practice
Can’t; can; can’t
c. Summary: 2’
T: Retells the content of the lesson
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
Learn the lesson
Do exercise in your work book.
Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………Period 50: REVISION
1. Objectives:
a. knowledge:
By the end of the lesson Ss can consolidate and prepare well for test of the first term
b. skill:
Language focus, writing, speaking and reading.
c . Behavior:
Student like studying the subject and use English correctly
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, board, picture, chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids.
3. Steps of teaching:
a. Oral test: 5’
* Warm up:
T: Ask the Ss to retell all the grammar structure that they have learn from unit 1 This/that/these/thoes and tobe
Ss: Retell
b. New lesson: 37’
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Ask Ss retell how to use of This/that/these/thoes
Ss: Retell
T: Write on the board
T: Ask Ss give example
Ss: Give example
These are my teachers
Are they your teachers?
Yes, they are or No, they are not
T: Ask Ss to do ex
Ss: Listen to teacher and do ex Ss: Work individually to do ex
T: correct their mistakes
T: Ask Ss retell to be
Ss: Retell
T: Write on the board
T: Ask Ss to do ex
Ss: Listen to teacher and do ex
* Exercise 1. Complete the sentences
This/Loan’s family
There/4people/her family
Her father/a doctor
He/40
Her mother/teacher
She/thirty
* Exercise 2. Put am, is, are in the blank
a. I ....... a student
b. They .......... books.
c. He ........ Nam?
d. This ......... my pen
Other Ss give command
T: correct their mistakes
17’
20’
I. This/that/these/thoes
1. Grammar
This: Đây. chỉ vật ở gần
That: Kia. chỉ vật ở xa
These là số nhiều của This
Those là số nhiều của that
Usage: Dùng để giới thiệu về người và vật
This/that + is + N/these/thoes+are+N(s;es)
Is + This/that + N?/Are+ these/thoes+N?
Yes. This/that/it + is/ Yes. They are
No. This/that/it +is + not/No. They are not
E.g: This is my teacher
Is this your teacher?
Yes, this is
or No, this isn’t
2. Practic
Exercise 1( page 14, 15)
a. a board
b. a ruler
etc …
Exercise 2( page 15)
a. Is this your classroom?
b. Is this your bag?
Etc…
II. To be
1. Grammar
(+) S + tobe + N
(-) S + tobe + not + N
(?) tobe + S +N?
Yes, S + tobe / No, S + tobe + not
Is not = isn’t / Are not = aren’t
I am
She/he/it + is
You/we/they + are
Ex: I’m a student
She is a teacher
Is she a teacher?
Yes, She is / No. She is not
She is not a teacher
2. Practice.
Key: * Exercise 1. Complete the sentences
a. is; b. are, in; c. is; d. is; e. is; f. is
* Exercise 2. Put am, is, are in the blank
a. am; b. are; c. is; d. is
c. Summary: 2’
T: Retells the content of the lesson
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
Learn the lesson
Do again all exercises in your work book.
Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………Period 51: REVISION
1. Objectives:
a. knowledge:
By the end of the lesson Ss can consolidate and prepare well for test of the first term
b. skill:
Language focus, writing, speaking and reading.
c . Behavior:
Student like studying the subject and use English correctly
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, board, picture, chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids.
3. Steps of teaching:
a. Oral test: 5’
* Warm up:
T: Ask the Ss to retell all the grammar structure that they have learn from unit 1
How many and time
Ss: Retell
b. New lesson: 37’
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Ask Ss retell how to use of how many
Ss: Retell
T: Write on the board
T: Ask Ss give example
Ss: Give example
How many people in your family?
There are 4
T: Ask Ss to practice
Ss: Listen to teacher and practice
T: correct their mistakes
T: Ask Ss retell ask and answer about time
Ss: Retell
T: Write on the board
T: Ask Ss to practice ask and answer about time
Ss: Practice
17’
20’
I. How many
1. Grammar
How many + Ns + are there... ?
There are + Ns.
There is an / an + N
E.g. How many students are there in your class?
There are 34 students in my class.
How many people are there in your family?
There are 4
2. Practice
a. How many people in your family?
b. How many people are there in your class?
II. Time
What time is it? Bõy giờ là mấy giờ
a. Giờ chẵn:
It’s + số giờ + o’clock
e.g. What time is it:
It’s eight o’clock.
b. Giờ lẻ: Có giờ hơn và giờ kém
Giờ hơn: Có 2 cách
+ Cỏch 1:
It’s + số giờ + số phỳt
e.g. What time is it:
It’s eight thirty.
+ Cỏch 2:
It’s + số phỳt + past + số giờ
e.g. What time is it:
It’s thirty past eight
Giờ kộm:
It’s + số phỳt + to + số giờ
e.g. What time is it:
It’s ten to eight
* Note: a quarter = fifteen: 15’
Half = thirty: 30’
e.g. What time is it:
It’s a quarter to eight
What time does Ba get up?
He gets up at 6 o’clock.
c. Summary: 2’
T: Retells the content of the lesson
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
Learn the lesson
Do again all exercises in your work book.
Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………Period 52: REVISION
1. Objectives:
a. knowledge:
By the end of the lesson Ss can consolidate and prepare well for test of the first term
b. skill:
Language focus, writing, speaking and reading.
c . Behavior:
Student like studying the subject and use English correctly
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, board, picture, chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids.
3. Steps of teaching:
a. Oral test: 5’
* Warm up:
T: Ask the Ss to retell all the grammar structure that they have learn from unit 1
Ss: Retell
b. New lesson: 37’
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Ask Ss retell the present simple tense
Ss: Retell
T: Write on the board
T: Ask Ss to do ex
Exercise: Put the verb in the bracket with suitable form
a. he (go) to school by bike
b. she (walk) to school
c. they (go) to school by bus
d. We ( travel) by train
ss: Do ex
t: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss retell the wh’ questions
Ss: Retell
T: Write on the board
Ss: Listen and copy
T: Ask Ss retell the prepositions of place
Ss: Retell
T: Write on the board
T: Ask Ss describe the things around their house
Ss: Describe
15’
8’
14’
I. Present simple tense
1. Grammar
+) S (I / you / we/ they) + V
+) She / he / it + V (s/es)
-) I/ you / we / they + do not + V - listen copy.
-) She / he/ it+ does not + V
?)Do + I / you / we / they + V?
Yes, S + do / No, S + do + not
?)Does + she / he / it + V?
Yes, S + does/No, S + does + not
- Thỡ hiện tại đơn diễn đạt thói quen hay hành động thường sảy ra thường lập đi lập lại
2. Practice
Key:
a. he goes to school by bike
b. she walks to school
c. they go to school by bus
d. We travel by train
II. ‘Wh’ questions
Where; how; what; who; which; when
III. Prepositions
1. Prepositions of place
to the left of; in; behind; in front of;
to the right of; opposite;
2. Practice
My house is big/small
To the right of the house there is/are….
Etc…
c. Summary: 2’
T: Retells the content of the lesson
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
Learn the lesson
Do again all exercises in your work book.
Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………Period 53: REVISION
1. Objectives:
a. knowledge:
By the end of the lesson Ss can consolidate and prepare well for test of the first term
b. skill:
Language focus, writing, speaking and reading.
c . Behavior:
Student like studying the subject and use English correctly
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, board, picture, chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids.
3. Steps of teaching:
a. Oral test: 5’
* Warm up:
T: Ask the Ss to retell all the grammar structure that they have learn from unit 1
Present siple tense; present progressive tense and modal verbs: must, can
Ss: Retell
b. New lesson: 37’
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Ask Ss retell the present simple tense
Ss: Retell
T: Write on the board
T: Ask Ss to do ex
Ss: Do ex
Mai (be) a student. She(live) in Bac Yen. She(be) 11 years old. Every day she(get) up at 5.30. She (do) morning exercise at 5.45. She(brush) her teeth, (wash) her face and (have) breakfast at 6.30. She(go) to school at 6.45. the classes (start) at 7.00 and (end) at 11.30. She(go) home at 12.00 and (have) lunch at 12.30
T: Check and correct
Exercise: write about Minh's daily activities
Activities
Time
Get up
Have breakfast Go to school Play soccer
Do home work
Go to bed
At 6.00
At 6.30
At 7.00
In the afternoon
In the evening
At 10.00
Minh gets up at
6.00.He has breakfast at 6.30.He goes to school at 7.00.He plays soccer in the afternoon,he does his home work in the
T: Ask Ss retell present progressive
Ss: Retell
T: Write on the board
T: Ask Ss to practice to do ex
Ss: Practice
Change the sentence from present simple tense to present progressive
a. Do you play soccer?
b. She rides her bike
c. we walk to school
d. Does he play video games?
e. They load vegetable
15’
15’
7’
I. I. Present simple tense
1. Grammar
+) S (I / you / we/ they) + V
+) She / he / it + V (s/es)
-) I/ you / we / they + do not + V - listen copy.
-) She / he/ it+ does not + V
?)Do + I / you / we / they + V?
Yes, S + do / No, S + do + not
?)Does + she / he / it + V?
Yes, S + does/No, S + does + not
2. Practice
Is, lives, is, gets, does, brushes, washes, has, goes, start, end, goes, has
II. Present progressive
1. Grammar
(+) S + tobe + V-ing
(-) S + tobe + not + V-ing
(?) tobe + S + V-ing?
Yes, S + tobe / No, S + tobe + not
2. Practice.
Key: a. Are you playing soccer?
b. She is riding her bike
c. We are walking to school
d. Is he playing video games?
e. They are loading vegetable
III. Must and can
+) S + must / must not (mustn't) + V-infi
+) S + can / can not + V-infi
c. Summary: 2’
T: Retells the content of the lesson
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
Learn the lesson
Do again all exercises in your work book.
Prepare for the first term test
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Period 54. THE FIRST TERM TEST
1. Objectives
a. Knowledge:
All the language items from unit 1 to 8
b. Skill:
Reading, listening, writing, language focus
c. Behavior:
Educate students use English correctly to do the test
2. Questions
A. Listening (2 marks)
Listen and fill in the missing words from the box
In; To the left of; To the right of; in front of; Behind; Opposite
Look at the house. A girl is ………. the house. A boy is waiting ……………. The house. There are some mountains ……………. the house and there is a market …………… it. …………….... the house there is a well, …………………. There are trees.
B. Reading (3 marks)
His name is Toan. He is a student. He lives in the city with his parents. Every morning he get up at six and goes to school at 6.45. His house is not near the school so he goes to school by bike.On the street, there is a restaurant, a store, a book store and a zoo. His house is next to a store
I. Answer the questions
1, What is his name?
2, Where does he live?
3, What time does he go to school?
4. How does he go to school?
II. Complete the sentences
1. His house is … …. .… ..…..so he goes to school by bike
2. On the street, there is a…………., ………….., ………….. and ……….
C. Language focus (3 marks)
I. Put the correct form of the words in bracket to complete the following sentences use simple tense 1. I (go) ……….. to school by bike
2. Lan (walk) ………… to school
II. Put the correct form of the words in bracket to complete the following sentences use present progressive tense
1. He …… ……. TV (watch)
2. They …… …….. by plane (travel)
III. Choose a suitable word then put in the blank to complete these questions
What where who how
………… old are you?
………… does she live?
………… is your name?
………… is that?
D. Writing (2ps). Write about your house
3. Answer key and mark guide
Listening (2 marks). Listen and fill in the missing words (2 mark)
In; in front of; Behind; Opposite; To the left of; To the right of;
B Reading
I. Read the passage carefully then answer the questions
1. His name is Toan
2. He lives in the city with his parents
3. He goes to school at 6.45
4. He he goes to school by bike
II. Complete the sentences
1. His house is not near the school so he goes to school by bike
2. On the street, there is a restaurant, a store, a book store and a zoo
C. Language focus (3 marks) Mỗi câu đúng 0.5 điểm
I. Put the correct form of the words in bracket to complete the following sentences use simple tense
1. go ; 2. Walks
II. Put the correct form of the words in bracket to complete the following sentences use present progressive tense
1. is watching 2. are travelling
III. Choose a suitable word then put in the blank to complete these questions
1. how; 2. where; 3. What; 4. who
D. Writing (2 marks). Chấm theo bài HS
Vớ dụ: My house is big/small. It’s old. It is in the country/city.
To the lefl of the house there is/are ………
To the right of the house there is/are ………
Behind the house there is/are ………
In front of the house there is/are ………
4. Comment
* Knowledge:
* Skill:
- Listening:
- Reading:
- Language focus:
- Writing:
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 9: The bodyPeriod 55: A. Parts of the body (A1,2)
1. Objectives:
Knowledge:
Identify parts of the body
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test:5’
* Warm up:
T: Show the picture of a man in the book page 96 and ask ss some questions about parts of the body. ?What is that? What are those?
Ss: Look at the book and answer
T: Introduce the lesson.Today we will learn about parts of the body
c. New lesson: 37’
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Introduce parts of the body by showing picture of a body and ask
? What is this ?
Ss: Observe and answer the questions in Vietnamese
T: Guide Ss to read the new words
Ss: Liten and repeat
T: Ask Ss practice to ask and answer about parts of the body
Ss: Work in pairs do the ex follow the ex.
S1: What are these?
S2: they are his arm
S1: What is that?
S2: It’s his head
Etc…
T: check and correct
T: ask Ss practice about themselves and answer about parts of the body
Ss: Practice in pairs
S1: What are these?
S2: they are my arm
S1: What is that?
S2: It’s my head
Etc…
T: check and correct
15’
12’
10’
1. Parts of the body
Head: Đầu
Shouder: Vai
Arm: Cỏnh tay
Leg: cẳng chõn
Toe: Ngún chõn
Finger: Ngún tay
Body: Thõn thể
Chest: ngực
Hand: bàn tay
Foot: Bàn chõn → feet số nhiều của foot
2. Practice
What is that? It is an his arm.
What are these? They/ These are his toes and fingers.
3. Futher practice
What are these? They are my legs
What is that? That is my arm
c. Summary: 2’
T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 9: The bodyPeriod 56: A. Parts of the body (A3,4,5)
1. Objectives:
Knowledge:
Adjectives to describe apperance
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer
Ss: G to the board and answer
Question:
Can you name the parts of the body? What are they?
Key:
Head; Shouder; Arm; Leg; Toe; Finger; Chest; Body…..
Others Ss giving the opinions.
T: check and give mark
* Warm up(2’)
T: Show the picture of people in A3 and ask
?What do they look like?
Ss: Look at the book and answer
T: Introduce the lesson.Today we will learn about adjectives to describe apperance
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Introduce adj to describe people by showing picture of people in page 97 and ask
? What does she/he look like ?
Ss: Observe and answer the questions in Vietnamese
T: Guide Ss to read the new words
Ss: Liten and repeat
T: Ask Ss practice to talk about apearance of a peson
Ss: Work individually
S1: He’s short
S2: She is tall
Etc…
T: check and correct
T: Ask Ss look at pictures in A4. Listen and choose the right picture
Ss: Listen and choose the right picture
Tape scrip: a. She is an old woman
b. He is a short man
c. He is a tall young man
d. She is a fat girl
some Ss answer before the class
T: check and correct
T: Ask Ss look at A5 and read the text about 2 people Chi and Tuan
Ss: Read and find the new words
T: Introduce the new words
T: Read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Ask Ss to read the text before the class
Ss: Practice reading
T: Ask Ss to read the dialouge in A6 then discribe Tuan in A5 depend on dialouge to ask and answer about Chi
Ss: Practice in pairs
S1: Who is that?
S2: That is Tuan
S1: What does he do?
S2:………
Etc
10’
5’
5’
8’
7’
1. Listen and repeat
Thin: Gầy.
Short: Thấp.
Tall: Cao.
Heavy: Nặng cõn.
Fat: Bộo.
Light: Nhẹ cõn.
2. Practice
S + tobe + adj
Ex: He’s short
I’m fat
3. Listen. Which picture?
1. d; 2. c; 3. b; 4. a
4. Listen and read
Gymnast: Vận động viên thể dục.
Weak > < Strong: Yếu > < Khoẻ.
Wieght lifter: Vận động viên cử tạ
5. Practice
A: Who is that?
B: That is Tuan
A: What does he do?
B:………
Etc
c. Summary: 2’
T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 9: The bodyPeriod 57: B. Faces (B1)
1. Objectives:
Knowledge:
Face vocabulary to describe faces
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer
Ss: Go to the board and answer
Question:
Ask and answer about Tuan in A5
Key:
S1: Who is that?
S2: That is Tuan
S1: What does he do?
S2: He is weighlifter
S1: Is he short?
S2: yes he is
Others Ss giving the opinions.
T: check and give mark
* Warm up(2’)
T: Show the picture of people in B1 and ask
?What is this ?
Ss: Look at the book and answer
T: Introduce the lesson.Today we will learn about vocabulary to describe faces
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Introduce new words by showing picture in page 100 and ask
?What is this?
Ss: Observe and answer the questions in Vietnamese
T: Guide Ss to read the new words
Ss: Liten and repeat
T: Ask Ss to read
Ss: Read before the classs
T: check and correct their pronunciation
T: Guide Ss to practice to ask and answer about appearance by introducing the form
Ss: Listen and copy
T: ask Ss give example
Ss: Give example
S1: I have full lips
S2: He has short hair
Etc…
T: Ask Ss to do ex 1,2(page 85)in workbook
Ss: Do ex in workbook
T: Check and correct
20’
10’
5’
1. Listen and repeat
Face: Khuụn mặt
ear (s): Tai
hair: Túc
eye (s) Mắt.
nose: Mũi.
Mouth: Miệng
lip (s) Mụi.
tooth → teeth Răng.
Around face: Khuụn mặt trũn.
An oval face. Khuụn mặt trỏi xoan
Full lip: Môi đầy đặn.
Thin lip: Mụi mỏng
Long hair: túc dài.
Short hair: túc ngắn
2. Practice
S + Have/has + adj + N
Ex: I have a round face
She has long hair
Etc…
3. Exercise
c. Summary: 2’
T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 9: The bodyPeriod 58: B. Faces (B2,3)
1. Objectives:
Knowledge:
Identify color to describe people and things
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer
Ss: Go to the board and answer
Question:
Retell the new words you learnt in last lesson
Key:
Face; ear(s); hair; eye(s); nose; Mouth; lip(s); tooth → teeth; Around face; An oval face; Full lip
Etc…
Others Ss giving the opinions.
T: check and give mark
* Warm up(2’)
T: Use picture with color to ask Ss
What color is it?
Ss: Look at the picture and answer
T: Introduce the lesson.Today we will learn vocabulary about color
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Introduce new words
?What is this?
Ss: Observe and answer the questions in Vietnamese
T: Write the new words
Ss: Listen and copy
T: Guide Ss to read the new words
Ss: Liten and repeat
T: Ask Ss to read
Ss: Read before the classs
T: check and correct their pronunciation
T: Introduce the form to ask and answer about color
T: Write on the board
Ss: Look, listen and copy
T: Ask Ss to give example
Ss: Give example
Ex: What color is his hair?
It’s brown
What color is his eyes?
They are green
Etc…
T: Guide Ss to practice to ask and answer about color of hair and eyes of the picture in B3
Ss: Listen and practice in pairs
S1: What color is her hair?
S2: It’s black
Etc…
T: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss practice to ask and answer about themselves
Ss: practice
20’
15’
1. Color
Black: Đen
Yellow: Vàng
White: Trắng
Grey: Xỏm
Blue: Xanh dương
Red: Đỏ
Brown: Nõu
Green: Xanh lỏ cõy
Purple: Tớm
Orange: Cam
2. Practice
What color + is + N?
It’s + color
What color + are + N?
They are + color
Ex: What color is her hair?
It’s black
What color is her eyes?
They are brown
+ What color is your hair?
It’s black
+ What color is your eyes?
They are brown
Etc…
c. Summary: 2’
T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 9: The bodyPeriod 59: B. Faces (B4,5,6)
1. Objectives:
Knowledge:
Identify color to describe people and things
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer
Ss: Go to the board and answer
Question:
Retell the new words you learnt in last lesson
a. What color is your hair?
b. What color is your eyes?
Key:
Black; white; red …..
a. It’s black
b. They are brown
Others Ss giving the opinions.
T: check and give mark
* Warm up(2’)
T: Ask 2 Ss go to the board to play game slap the board( use the words in B1,2)
Ss: Play game
T: Introduce the lesson.Today we will practice more about adjectives to describe appearance of a person
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Ask Ss to look in the picture of Chi in the book and describe 5 sentences about Chi
Ss: Describe
She has long black hair.
She is tall.
She has a round face.
Her eye is brown.
She is thin.
T: Read the text
Ss: Listen
T; Ask Ss to read the text
Ss: Read
T: Ask some Ss to read before the class
Ss: Read
T: Ask ss look at the questions about Chi in page 102 to ask and answer
Ss: Ask and answer in pairs
S1: Is Miss Chi’s hair long or short?
S2: a. It’s long
Etc…
T: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss look at A5 and listen
T: open the tape or T reads
Ss: Listen and write the letter of the picture
25’
10’
1. Listen and read
a. It’s long
b. her hair is black
c. Her eyes are brown.
d. It is small.
e. They are thin.
2. Listen
Tape transcrip:
1. He has short hair. He has a round face. He has big nose. He has full lips
2. He has short hair. He has an oval face. He has a small nose. He has thin lips
3. She has long hair. She has an oval face. He has a bis nose. She has thin lips
4. She has long hair. She has a round face. She has a small nose. She has full lips
1. c; 2. a; 3. d; 4. b
c. Summary: 2’
T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 10: Staying healthyPeriod 60: A. How do you feel (A1,2,5)
1. Objectives:
Knowledge:
Talk about feeling.
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer
Ss: Go to the board and answer
Question:
Describe 5 sentences about Chi
Key:
She has long black hair.
She is tall.
She has a round face.
Her eye is brown.
She is thin.
Others Ss giving the opinions.
T: check and give mark
* Warm up(2’)
T: Ask Ss look at the picture and ask
What are they doing?
How do they feel?
Ss: Look and answer
T: Introduce the lesson.Today we learn about the feeling
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Ask Ss to look in the picture of people in the book and introduce the new words
T: Show the picture a and ask
What is he doing?
Ss: Anwer in Vietnamese. Cậu ấy ăn bánh mỡ
T: ? How does he feel?
Ss: Cậu ấy đói
T: Introduce the new word “ hungry”
T: Read and write on the board
T: Guide Ss to read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Introduce other new word the same
Some Ss read before the class
T: Check and correct their pronunciation
T: Introduce the form to ask and asnwer about felling
T: Write on the board
Ss: Listen and copy
T: Ask Ss to give example
Ss: Give example
Ex: How does he feel?
He is/feel hot
Some Ss practice
S1: How does she feel?
S2: She is/feels thirsty
T: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss look at a5 listen and match the name with the right picture
T: Open the tape or T reads
Ss: Listen and check
15’
10’
10’
1. How do you feel?
Feel: Cảm thấy.
Hungry: Đói.
Thirsty: Khỏt.
Full: No.
Hot: Núng.
Cold: Lạnh.
Tired: Mệt mỏi.
2. Practice
How + do/does + S + feel?
S + tobe/feel(s) + adj
Ex: How do you feel?
I am/feel hungry
How does she feel?
She is/feels thirsty
3. Listen
Tape transcrip:
Nhan is hungry. He’d like noodles
Phuong is thirsty. She’d like a drink
Ba is full
Huong is cold
Phuong b; Nhan a; Ba f; Huong d
c. Summary: 2’
T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 10: Staying healthyPeriod 61: A. How do you feel (A3,4,6)
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge:
Talk about feeling. Talk about the things you want and need.
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer
Ss: Go to the board and answer
Question:
a. How does she feel?
b. How do they feel ?
c. How do you feel?
d. How does he feel?
Key:
a. She is thirsty
b. They are full
c. I’m cold
d. He is hungry
Others Ss giving the opinions.
T: check and give mark
* Warm up(2’)
T: Ask Ss look at the picture and ask
Where are they?
What are they doing?
How do they feel?
Ss: Look and answer
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Ask Ss to look in the picture of people in the book and answer
T: Introduce the new words
T: Read and write on the board
T: Guide Ss to read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Introduce other new word the same
Some Ss read before the class
T: Check and correct their pronunciation
T: Show the picture a and ask
What are they saying?
Ss: Anwer in Vietnamese.
T: Introduce the form “What would you like?”
T: Write on the board
Ss: Listen and copy
T: Ask Ss to give example
Ss: Give example
Ex: What would you like?
I’d like some orange juice
Some Ss practice
S1: How does she feel?
S2: She is/feels thirsty
S1: What would she like?
She’d like some orange juice
Etc…
T: Check and correct
T: Guide Ss to read the dialouge
T reads Ss listen and repeat
T: Ask Ss to read before the class
Some Ss practice reading before the class
T: Listen and check
T: Ask Ss look at a5 listen and match the name with the right picture
T: Open the tape or T reads
Ss: Listen and check
T: Ask Ss to read the dialouge again then practice to ask and answer about people in the dialouge
Ss: Practice to ask and answer
S1: How does Nam feel?
S2: He feels hungry
S1: What would he like?
S2: He’d like some noodles
Etc…
T: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss look at A6 listen and repeat
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Ask Ss to make new dialouge depend on the dialouge in the book
Ss: Make new dialouge depend on the dialouge in the book
T: Check and correct
15’
10’
10’
1. What would you like?
a. New words
Some: Một vài.
Orange juice: Nước cam.
Noodle:
Drink: Uống.
Want: Muốn
Need: Cần
Noodles: Mỡ, phở
b. Grammar
How do/ does + S + feel?
S + be/ Feel + adj.
What would you like? =
What do/ does +S+want?: Muốn, Cần gỡ
S + want/ like/ need + N.
Ex: What would you like? Bạn muốn cỏi gỡ?
I’ d like some noodles: Tôi muốn ăn phở
2. Practice
How does Nam feel?
He feels hungry
What would he like?
He’d like some noodles
Etc…
3. Listen and repeat
a. Mai: What the matter. Nam?
Nam: I’m hot
Mai: What do you want?
Nam: I want a cold drink
b. Lan: What the matter. Na?
Na: I’m hungry
Lan: What do you want?
Na: I want some noodles
c. Linh: What the matter. Tung?
Tung: I’m thirsty
Linh: What do you want?
Tung: I want a drink
c. Summary: 2’
T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 10: Staying healthyPeriod 62: B. Food and drink (B1,2,3)
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge:
Name of food and drink
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer
Ss: Go to the board and answer
Question:
a. How does she feel?
b. What would she like?
c. Would she like noodles?
d. What would you like?
e. Would you like a drink?
Key:
a. She is thirsty
b. She’d like some orange juice
c. No, she wouldn’t
d. I’d like noodles
e. Yes, I would
Others Ss giving the opinions.
T: check and give mark
* Warm up(2’)
T: Ask Ss look at the picture and ask
What are these?
Ss: Look and answer
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Ask Ss to look in the picture in the book and
introduce the new words
T: Read and write on the board
T: Guide Ss to read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Introduce other new word the same
Some Ss read before the class
T: Check and correct their pronunciation
T: Guide Ss to practice
Ss: Practice to ask and answer
S1: What would you like?
S2: I’ d like some oranges
Etc…
T: Listen and check
T: Ask Ss look at B2 listen and repeat
Ss: Listen and repeat
Some Ss practice reading before the class
T: Listen and check
T: Introduce “some” and “any”
Ss: Look, listen and copy
T: Give example then ask Ss to give example
Ss: Give example
T: Check and correct
T; Ask Ss practice in pair to ask and answer
Ss: Practice
S1: Is there any water?
S2: Yes, there is some water
Etc…
T: Check and correct
15’
10’
10’
1. New words
Apple: Quả tỏo.
Orange: Quả cam.
Banana: Quả chuối.
Meat: Thịt.
Water: Nước.
Milk: Sữa.
Vegetable: Rau.
What would you like?
I’ d like some meat
Etc…
2. Listen and repeat
a. Practice
b. Grammar
Some: đứng trước câu khẳng định
Any: đứng trước câu phủ định và cõu hỏi
+ Is there any…?
Yes, there is some…
No, there isn’t any…
+ Are there any…?
Yes, there are some…
No, there aren’t any…
2. Practice
+ Is there any water?
Yes, there is some water
+ Are there any oranges?
No, there aren’t any oranges
c. Summary: 2’
T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 10: Staying healthyPeriod 63: B. Food and drink (B4,5)
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge:
Name of food and drink
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer
Ss: Go to the board and answer
Question:
a. How do you feel?
b. What would you like?
c. Would you like a drink?
d. Are there any apples?
e. Is there any meat?
Key:
a. I’m thirsty
b. I’d like some orange juice
c. Yes. I would
d. No, there aren’t any apples
e. Yes, there is some meat
Others Ss giving the opinions.
T: check and give mark
* Warm up(2’)
T: Ask Ss look at the picture and ask
What are these?
Ss: Look and answer
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Ask Ss to look in the picture in the book and
introduce the new words
T: Read and write on the board
T: Guide Ss to read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Introduce other new word the same
Some Ss read before the class
T: Check and correct their pronunciation
T: Guide Ss to practice depend on dialouge in the book
Ss: Practice to ask and answer depend on dialouge in the book
S1: I’m hungry. I’d like some rice. What would you like?
S2: I’m hungry, too. I’d like some chicken
Etc…
T: Listen and check
T: Ask Ss look at B5 listen and match the names of the people with what they would like
Ss: Listen and match the names of the people with what they would like
T: Play the tape or read
Ss: Listen and match
T: Call some pairs read aloud the sentences they have done.
Some pairs read aloud the sentences they have done.
T: Check and correct
Keys:
Nhan: Would you like some chicken and some rice
Tuan: Would you like some meat and some vegetables
Huong: Would you like some fruit and some milk
Mai: Would you like some fish and an orange juice
T; Ask Ss practice in pair to ask and answer
Ss: Practice
S1: Is there any water?
S2: Yes, there is some water
Etc…
T: Check and correct
15’
10’
10’
1. New words
Fish: Cỏ.
Fruit: Trỏi cõy.
Menu: Thực đơn.
Chicken: thịt gà.
A: I’m hungry. I’d like some bread
What would you like?
B: I’m not hungry, But I’m thirsty I’d like some water
Etc…
2. Listen
Nhan: c,f; Tuan: a,d; Huong: e,g
Mai: b,h
2. Practice
Some: đứng trước câu khẳng định
Any: đứng trước câu phủ định và câu hỏi
+ Is there any…?
Yes, there is some…
No, there isn’t any…
+ Are there any…?
Yes, there are some…
No, there aren’t any…
Example: + Is there any water?
Yes, there is some water
+ Are there any oranges?
No, there aren’t any oranges
c. Summary: 2’
T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 10: Staying healthyPeriod 64: C. My favorite food
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge:
Name of food and drink
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer
Ss: Go to the board and answer
Question:
a. How do you feel?
b. What would you like?
c. Would you like a drink?
d. Are there any apples?
e. Is there any meat?
Key:
a. I’m thirsty
b. I’d like some orange juice
c. Yes. I would
d. No, there aren’t any apples
e. Yes, there is some meat
Others Ss giving the opinions.
T: check and give mark
* Warm up(2’)
T: Ask Ss look at the picture and ask
What are these?
Ss: Look and answer
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Ask Ss to look in the picture in the book and
introduce the new words
T: Read and write on the board
T: Guide Ss to read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Introduce other new word the same
Some Ss read before the class
T: Check and correct their pronunciation
T: Ask Ss to look at C2 and introduce “What is your favorite food?”
Ss: Listen and copy
T: Guide Ss to practice the dialouge in the book
Ss: Practice to ask and answer depend on dialouge in the book
S1: What is your favorite food?
S2: I like potato
S1: Do you like chicken?
S2: Yes, I do
Etc…
T: Listen and check
T: Ask Ss practice to ask and answer about the food and drink they like or dislike
Ss; Practice
S1: What is your favorite food?
S2: I like fish
S1: What is your favorite drink?
S2: I like apple juice
Etc…
T: Check and correct
15’
10’
10’
1. New word
Favorite: Sở thớch
* Vegetables
Carrot: Củ cà rốt
Tomato: Cà chua
Potato: Khoai tõy
Lettuce: Xà lỏch.
Bean: Đậu hà Lan
Pea: Đỗ.
Cabbage: Bắp cải.
Onion: Hành.
* Drink
Ice: Đá lạnh
Lemonade: Nước chanh
Iced tea: Trà đá
Iced coffee; Cà phê đá
Apple juice: Nước táo ép
Soda: Nước sô đa
What are these/thoes?
They are + Ns
2. Listen and repeat
What is your favorite food?
I like + N
Do you like…?
Yes, I do/ No, I don’t
3. Practice
+ What is your favorite food/drink?
+ Do you like…?
Yes, I do/ No, I don’t
+ What do you like?
c. Summary: 2’
T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 11: What do you eat?Period 65: A. At the store (A1)
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge:
By the end of the lesson Ss can buy food and drink at a store
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer
Ss: Go to the board and answer
Question:
a. How do you feel?
b. What would you like?
c. What is your favorite food?
d. What is your favorite drink?
e. Do you like chicken?
Key:
a. I’m thirsty
b. I’d like some orange juice
c. I like fish
d. I like apple juice
e. Yes, I do
Others Ss giving the opinions.
T: check and give mark
* Warm up(2’)
T: Ask Ss look at the picture and ask
Where are they?
What are these?
Ss: Look and answer
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Ask Ss to look in the picture in the book and
introduce the new words by showing picture and ask
What is this?
Ss: Look and answer
T: Read and write on the board
T: Guide Ss to read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Introduce other new word the same
Some Ss read before the class
T: Check and correct their pronunciation
T: Explain: Khi muốn kết hợp cỏc từ chỉ vật , chứa k/lượng t/lượng các đơn vị đong đo đếm với các dt khác ta để các từ chỉ đơn vị đứng trước và nối với các dt khác bằng giới từ “ of ” < trừ trường hợp a dozen ko có gt đi kèm >
Ex: A kilo of rice
200 grams of beef
T: Have Ss matching
Ss: Matching
T: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss look at pic A1 a and introduce
Vui wants some food and drink she goes to the store. Look at this man. He is a “store keeper”. Can you guess meaning of “storekeeper
Ss: Listen and guess ‘Chủ tệm, người bán hàng’
T: Introduce the new words
Ss: Listen and copy
T: Là người bán hàng gặp khách hàng em nói như thế nào?
Ss: Tụi cú thể giỳp gỡ cho anh/ chị khụng?
T: Write: can i help you?
T: Play the tape A1 or T reads
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Guide Ss to practice the dialouge in the book
T: Ask Ss practice to ask and answer
Ss: Practice to ask and answer depend on dialouge in the book
S1: Can I help you?
S2: Yes, I like a kilo of rice
S1: Here you are
S2: Thank you
Etc…
T: Listen and check
T: Have Ss close the book. Complete this dialogue
Ss: Practice
T: Check and correct
15’
5’
10’
5’
1. New word
A bottle of cooking oil: chai, lọ
A packet of tea: 1 gúi chố
A box of chocolates: 1 hộp sụ cụ la
A kilo of rice: 1 cõn gạo
200 gram of beef: 2 lạng thịt bũ
A dozen eegs: một tỏ trứng
A can of peas: 1 hộp, lon đỗ
A bar of soap: 1thanh, thỏi xà phũng
A tube of toothpaste: 1 tuýp kem đánh răng
2. Matching
A bottle toothpaste
A packet beef
A box tea
A kilo eggs
A gram chocolate
A dozen water
3. Listen and repeat
Storekeeper(n): Chủ tệm, người bán hàng
Can I help you? Tụi cú thể giỳp gỡ cho anh/ chị khụng?
Here you are: của anh/ chị đây
4. Practice
Complete this dialogue
A: … I help you?
B: … a ….. of …… please.
A: ……………………
B: …………………….
c. Summary: 2’
T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 11: What do you eat?Period 66: A. At the store (A2)
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge:
By the end of the lesson Ss can ask and answer about food and drink they need and want. Talk quantities and prices. Using “How many …?”
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer
Ss: Go to the board and answer
Question:
a. Retell the new words
b. Make dialouge with teacher
Key:
a. A bottle of cooking oil; A kilo of rice; A packet of tea; A box of chocolates etc…
b. T: Can I help you?
S: Yes, I like a kilo of rice
T: Here you are
S: Thank you
Others Ss giving the opinions.
T: check and give mark
* Warm up(2’)
T: Ask Ss to play game slap the board
Ss: Play game
T: Ask Ss to look in the picture in the book and ? Where is this?Have Ss say words people often say when they buy food or drink
Ss: số lượng, gía cả
T: Introduce the lesson
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Ask the Ss to look at the dialouge in the book.
T: Ask the Ss listen to the tape and find the new words, using the picture.
Ss: listen to the tape and find the new words, using the picture.
T: Open the tape or read
Ss: Listen and repeat.
T: Read and write the new words on the board
Ss: Copy and read.
T: Guide Ss to read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Check and correct their pronunciation
T: Introduce “ How much” and “how many”
Ss: Look listen and copy
T: Ask Ss to give example
Ss: Give example
T: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss look at A2 and practice the dialouge
Ss: Practice
S1: Salegirl
S2: Ba
T: Ask Ss to read the dialouge carefully then answer the questions
Ss: Answer the questions in pairs
T: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss make new dialouge depend on dialouge in the book
Ss: Make new dialouge depend on dialouge in the book
S1: Can I help you?
S2: I need some rice
S1: How much rice do you want?
S2: 5 kilos of rice
S1: Is there any thing else?
S2: Yes. I need some oranges
S1: How many do oranges you want?
S2: One kilo, please.
Etc…
15’
10’
10’
1. At the store
a. Newwords
Salegirl = Shopkeeper: Nhõn viờn bỏn hàng.
Is there any thing else?: Cũn gỡ nữa khụng?
b. Grammar
- Danh từ trong tiếng anh được chia làm 2 loại chính: Dt đếm được và dt ko đếm được
Ex: bread, water, coffee, tra, rice, noodle, soap, oil…. Là những dt ko đếm được.
+ Dt ko đếm đc luôn ở số it và khụng dựng với a/an
+ Danh từ đếm đc có 2 dạng: số ít và số nhiều
How much…: Dùng để hỏi số lượng với dt ko đếm đc
How many…: Dùng để hỏi số lượng với dt đếm đc
Ex: + How much beff do you want?
+ how many eggs do you want?
2. Answer the question
a, ba is at the store
b, he wants some beef and eggs
c, he wants 200 grams of beef
d, he wants a dozen eggs
3. Practice
S + want/ need + N.
How much/ many + N ...?
S + want/ need + N.
How much/ many + N ...?
c. Summary: 2’
T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 11: What do you eat?Period 67: A. At the store (A3,4)
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge:
By the end of the lesson Ss can ask and answer about food and drink they need and want. Talk quantities and prices.
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer
Ss: Go to the board and answer
Question:
Make dialouge with a partner
Key:
S2: Can I help you?
S1: Yes, I like some rice
S2: How much do you want?
S1: 5 kiloes please
S2: 5 kiloes of rice. Is there any thing else?
S1: Yes need some apples
S2: How many do you want?
S1: 3 apples please
S1: Here you are
S2: Thank you
Others Ss giving the opinions.
T: check and give mark
* Warm up(2’)
T: Introduce the lesson
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Ask the Ss to look at the picture in the book.
T: Ask the Ss listen to the tape and find the new words, using the picture.
Ss: listen to the tape and find the new words, using the picture.
T: Open the tape or read
Ss: Listen and repeat.
T: Read and write the new words on the board
Ss: Copy and read.
T: Guide Ss to read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Check and correct their pronunciation
T: Ask Ss to read their answer
T: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss look at A4 and practice the dialouge
Ss: Practice
S1: Mom
S2:Nam
T: Ask Ss to read the dialouge carefully then write the shopping list
Ss: Write the shopping list
Some Ss write on the board
T: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss make new dialouge depend on dialouge in the book
Ss: Make new dialouge depend on dialouge in the book
S1: Can I help you?
S2: I need some rice
S1: How much rice do you want?
S2: 5 kilos of rice
S1: Is there any thing else?
S2: Yes. I need some oranges
S1: How many do oranges you want?
S2: One kilo, please.
Etc…
10’
15’
10’
1. Listen
a. Newwords
Half: Một nửa
A can of coca: Một lon coca
Cookies: bỏnh quy
b. Key
a. Phuong wants a tube of toothpaste.
b. Ly wants a bar of soaf and a box of chocolate.
c. Mai wants a can of soda.
d. Nam wants a packet of cookies
2. Read
A bottle of cooking iold.
Some rice.
Half a kilo of beef.
Half a dozen of eggs.
3. Practice
S + want/ need + N.
How much/ many + N ...?
S + want/ need + N.
How much/ many + N ...?
c. Summary: 2’
T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 11: What do you eat?Period 68: B. At the canteen (B1,2,3,4)
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge:
By the end of the lesson Ss can ask and answer about food and drink they need and want. Talk quantities and prices.
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer
Ss: Go to the board and answer
Question:
Make dialouge with a partner
Key:
S2: Can I help you?
S1: Yes, I like some rice
S2: How much do you want?
S1: 5 kiloes please
S2: 5 kiloes of rice. Is there any thing else?
S1: Yes need some apples
S2: How many do you want?
S1: 3 apples please
S1: Here you are
S2: Thank you
Others Ss giving the opinions.
T: check and give mark
* Warm up(2’)
T: Introduce the lesson
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Ask the Ss to look at the picture in the book.
? What is this?
? What are they?
Ss: Look at picture and call the name of things in the picture
T: Ask the Ss write the name of things in the picture.
Ss: Write
T: Go around the class and correct on the pictures.
T: Ask the Ss look at the picture and read again.
T: Call some Ss read aloud the sentences that they have done.
T: Ask the Ss look at A2 and listen to the tape and find the new words
Ss: listen to the tape and find the new words
T: Open the tape or read
Ss: Listen and repeat.
T: Read and write the new words on the board
Ss: Copy and read.
T: Guide Ss to read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Check and correct their pronunciation
T: Ask Ss to read their answer
T: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss look at B2 and practice the dialouge
Ss: Practice
S1: Salegirl
S2: Lan
T: Introduce the new stucture how much
Ss: Look listen and copy
T: Ask Ss practice in pairs to ask and answer
? what would you like for breakfast?
Lunch?
Dinner?
I’d like…
S1: what would y like for lurch?
S2: I’d like some rice and some water
T: Ask Ss look at b2 and listen to the tape then number pictures you hear
Ss: listen to the tape then number pictures you hear
T: Check and correct
5’
13’
10’
7’
1. Write the name of things in the picture.
a. rice; b, noodles; c. meat etc….
2. Listen and Repeat
a. Newwords:
Sandwich:
A glass of lemon juce: 1 ly nước chanh.
b. Grammar
How much are they?
They are + Price.
How much is it?
It is + price.
3. Practice
What would you like for breakfast?
Lunch?
Dinner?
I’d like…
4. Listen
E; b; I; c; f; j; h; l
Fish – noodles – orange juice – beef – vegetables – milk – bananas – water
c. Summary: 2’
T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 11: What do you eat?Period 69: B. At the canteen (B5)
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge:
By the end of the lesson Ss can ask and answer about food and drink they need and want. Talk quantities and prices.
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer
Ss: Go to the board and answer
Question:
T: Ask Ss practice in pairs to ask and answer
? what would you like for breakfast?
Lunch?
Dinner?
Key:
I’d like some rice and some water etc…
Others Ss giving the opinions.
T: check and give mark
* Warm up(2’)
T: Ask Ss to match
Ss: Match
Abottle of milk
Soda
Water
A kilo of beef
Meat (oranges)
Rice
A doza eggs
Apples
oranges
T: Introduce the lesson
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Ask the Ss to look at the picture in the book.
? What is this?
? What are they?
Ss: Look at picture and call the name of things in the picture ( in Vietnamese)
Ss: listen to the tape and find the new words
T: Open the tape or read
Ss: Listen and repeat.
T: Read and write the new words on the board
Ss: Copy and read.
T: Guide Ss to read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Check and correct their pronunciation
T: Write on board there numbers and read
A hundred : 100
Two hundred : 200
A thousand : 1000
Three thousand : 3000
T: Have Ss guess meaning of “ humdred” “ thousand”
T: Write some example. Have Ss read
Ss: Read
T: Introduce the stucture how much
Ss: Look listen and copy
T: Have Ss point at pic B5 – 121 call name of food or drink and it’s price
Ss: Read aloud
A fried rice is 2500
play tape B5 ( 2time)
T: Have Ss look at pictures B5 practice in pair ask and answer about the price
Ss: Practice inpairs
S1: How much is fried rice?
S2: It is two thousand five hundred dong
Etc…
T: Ask Ss practice ask and answer about the price or make similar dialogues as B2 120
a. A kilo of sugar/ 6500đ
b. a dozen eggs/ 1400đ
c. a tube of tod’paste/ 800
d. a bowl of noodle/ 700
Ss: Practice
T: Check and correct
15’
10’
10’
1. Newwords
Fried rice: cơm rang
A bowl of noodle: bát phở
Sandwich:
Cake: bánh ngọt
Ice – cream: kem
400: four hundred
900: nine humdred
1000: a thousand
1500: one thousand five hundred
2200: two thousand two hundred
b. Grammar
How much hỏi giá cả
How much are they? (Danh từ đếm được số nhiều)
→ They are + Price.
How much is it? (Danh từ không đếm được)
→ It is + price.
Ex: How much is an apple?
How much are 2 eggs?
3. Practice
How much is a cake/
It’s 500d
4. Practice further
S1: How much is a kilo of sugar?
S2: It is 65000
c. Summary: 2’
T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Period 70: GRAMMAR PRACTICE
1. Objectives:
a. knowledge:
By the End of the lesson Ss can cousolidate vocabulary and structures on topics they have learnt from U9 -> U11
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c . Behavior:
Student like studying the subject and use English correctly
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture, chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids.
3. Steps of teaching:
a. Oral test: (3’)
T: call 1s go to the board and ask some questions
Questions:
1. What would you like for breakfast?
Lunch?
Dinner?
2. How much is a bowt of moodle?
A kilo of oranges?
Key:
1. I’d like some…..
2. It’s 15000d……….
T: check and correct
* Warm up: (1’)
T: Ask students to remind the form of the Present simple
Ss: Retell
b. New lesson: (38’)
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Ask the Ss retell the Present simple
Ss: Retell
T: Write on the board
T: Ask Ss give example
Ss: do
T: Ask Ss practice to do exercise in the work book
T: Ask the Ss retell a, an, some, any
Ss: Retell
T: Write on the board
T: Ask Ss give example
Ss: do
T: Ask Ss practice to do exercise in the work book
T: Correct the answers
T: Ask the Ss retell adjectives
Ss: Retell
T: Write on the board
T: Ask Ss give example
Ss: do
T: Ask Ss practice to do exercise in the work book
T: Correct the answers
T: Ask the Ss retell question words
Ss: Retell
T: Write on the board
T: Ask Ss give example
Ss: do
T: Ask Ss practice to do exercise in the work book
T: Correct the answers
T: Have Ss compare present simple and resent progressive tenses
T: Ask Ss do ex 5 – 123
some Ss read aloud
T: Correct the answers
10’
8’
7
6
7’
I. The simple tense
1. Grammar
S + like/ likes
S + Don’t/ like…
Doesn’t
Do + S + like…?
Does
Yes, S + do/ does
No, s + don’t/ doesn’t like
2. Exercise 1
a, - like
- like
- do … like
- … I don’t like
b, - does … like
- … likes ….
- … doesn’t like
II. a, an, some, any
1. Grammar
Để nói về số lượng
a, A/ AN : Một ( mạo từ không xác định) đứng trước danh từ số ít đếm được
- A: đanh từ bất đầu = 1 fụ âm : a banana
- AN: trước danh từ bắt đầu = 1 fụ am: an orange
b, Some/ any: 1 vài, 1 chút (tính từ không sác định)
- some: dùng trong câu KĐ
- any: PĐ và câu hỏi
2. Exercise 2
a, - … any …
- … any … some
- …are …
b, - …any …
- … some …
c, - … any …
- … some …
- … a …
III. Ajectives
Dùng để chỉ T/C , đ đ của người hoặc vật
Exercise 3
a, short e, full
b, thin f, cold
c, light g, thin
d, strong h, long
IV. Question words
Where; how; what; who; which; when
Exercise 4
a, who …
b, what …
c, How…
d, what
e, where
V. Contrast: present simple and resent progressive tenses
+ thì hiện tại đơn: diễn tả hành động lặp đi lặp lại. thói quen hay 1 sự rất hiển nhiên
+ thì hiện đại tiếp diễn: diễn tả hành động đang xẩy ra tại thời điểm nói ( now/ at the moment)
S + tobe + V-ing
Exercise 5
a, … is eating …
b, … are drinking …
c, … is riding …
d, … is going …
e, … is getting …
f, … is traveting …
c. Summary: (2’)
T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: (1’)
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Period 71: A FORTY - FIVE MINUTE TEST
1. Objectives
a. Knowledge:
All the language items from unit 9 to 11
b. Skill:
Reading, listening, writing, language focus
c. Behavior:
Educate students use English correctly to do the test
2. Questions 45’
I. Listening: Listen and fill in the gap the suitable word(2pts). Nghe và điền vao chỗ trống
Miss Loan is …...and…… She has around face and long…….. hair, she has …….eyes and …. big nose. She has…….lips and …….white teeth. She is………
II. Reading: Read the passage
1. Fill in the blanks with the suitable words (2pts). Điền từ thích hợp vào chỗ trống
Storekeeper : Good morning.(1) ……I help you?
Lan : Yes. I want (2)…….apples, please
Storekeeper : How(3)………. do you want?
Lan : Yes, I’d (4)……half a dozen apples. Do you have(5)…….rice?
Storekeeper : Yes, I have some rice. How(6)………. do you want?
Lan : 10 kilos of rice, please
Storekeeper : Is there anything (7)…………..?
Lan : No, thank. How(8)………..are they?
Storekeeper : Sixty five thousand dong, please
2. Read the passage and answer the question (1pts). Trả lời các câu hỏi sau
a. What does Lan want?
b. How much are they?
III. Language focus:
1. Put a. an, some, any in a suitable blank(1pt). Điền a. an, some, any vào chỗ trống
a. Do you have……beef?
b. She wants………...rice
c. I would like…….bottle of cooking oil
d. He’d like ……..apple
2. Put the verb in the blank with suitable tense(2pts). Chia động từ trong ngoặc ở thì đúng
a. He (want)………some chicken
b. They(walk) ………to school
c. we ….. ………by car (travel)
d. She ….. ……..video games (play)
IV. Writing: Describe about your friend(apperiance, favorite food and drink) (2pts)
Em hãy tả về vẻ bề ngoài, món ăn, đồ uống yêu thích của bạn em
3. Answer key and mark guide
I. Listening: (2ps) Listen and fill in the gap the suitable word ( Each correct answer get mark 0.25)
Thin; short; black; brown; a; thin; small; strong
II Reading (3ps)
1. Fill in the blanks with the suitable words ( Each correct answer get mark 0.25)
1. can; 2 some; 3. many; 4. like; 5. any; 6. much; 7. else; 8. much
II. Answer the questions ( Each correct answer get mark 0,5)
1. Lan wants some apples and some rice
2. they are sixty five thousand dong
III. Language focus (3ps)
1. Put a. an, some, any in a suitable blank (Each correct answer get mark 0.25)
a. any; b. some; c. a; d. an
II. Put the verb in the blank with suitable tense ( Each correct answer get mark 0.5)
a. wants; b. walk; c. are traveling; d. is playing
IV. Writing: Describe about your friend(apperiance, favorite food and drink) 2marks
Depend on Ss’s writing
4. Comment
* Knowledge:
* Skill:
- Listening:
- Reading:
- Language focus:
- Writing:
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Period 72: CORRECT THE TEST
1. Objectives
a. Knowledge:
Help Ss correct the mistakes in their test, Ss will know mistake and correct them, Ss can get more experiment for next tests
b. Skill:
Reading, listening, writing, language focus
c. Behavior:
Educate students use English correctly and get more experiment for next tests
2. Correction (43’)
T gives Ss test papers and commend
T: Ask Ss go to the board do again the test
Ss: do again
T: Give test to Ss and get Ss pairs compare
Ss: Compare in pairs
T: Check and correct
*Keys
I. Listening: (2ps) Listen and fill in the gap the suitable word ( Each correct answer get mark 0.25)
Thin; short; black; brown; a; thin; small; strong
II Reading (3ps)
1. Fill in the blanks with the suitable words ( Each correct answer get mark 0.25)
1. can; 2 some; 3. many; 4. like; 5. any; 6. much; 7. else; 8. much
II. Answer the questions ( Each correct answer get mark 0,5)
1. Lan wants some apples and some rice
2. they are sixty five thousand dong
III. Language focus (3ps)
1. Put a. an, some, any in a suitable blank (Each correct answer get mark 0.25)
a. any; b. some; c. a; d. an
II. Put the verb in the blank with suitable tense ( Each correct answer get mark 0.5)
a. wants; b. walk; c. are traveling; d. is playing
IV. Writing: Describe about your friend(apperiance, favorite food and drink) 2marks
Depend on Ss’s writing
3. Guide to do at home(2’)
Do again the test in your exercise book
Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 12: SPORT AND PASTIMESPeriod 73: A. What are you doing? (A1,2,3)
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge:
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: Use the present progressive tense and sport vocabularies to talk about their pastimes
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
* Warm up
T: Ask Ss to say again form of the present progressive tense
Ss: Retell
T: Ask Ss to think about the sport
Ss: Answer: soccer, volleyball
Ss: Answer in Vietnamese
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Ask the Ss to look at the picture in the book.
? What are they doing?
Ss: Look at picture and call the name of activities in the picture ( in Vietnamese)
Ss: listen to the tape and find the new words
T: Open the tape or read
Ss: Listen and repeat.
T: Read and write the new words on the board
Ss: Copy and read.
T: Guide Ss to read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Check and correct their pronunciation
T: remind the present progressive tense and ask Ss to read the picture
Ss: Read
T: Have Ss look at pictures A1 practice in pair ask and answer about the activities
Ss: Practice inpairs
S1: What is he doing?
S2: He is skipping rope.
S4: What is she doing?
S5: She is playing badminton Etc…
Etc …..
T: Check and correct
T: Have Ss look at pictures A3 answer about the activities
Ss: Look at th picture and answer about the sports they play
I skip
I do aerobics
Etc…
15’
10’
10’
1. Newwords
Badminton
table tennis
aelobics
volleyball
tennis
skip
Jog
b. Grammar
Present progressive tense
S + tobe + V-ing
2. Practice
+) What is he/she doing?
She/he + is + Ving
Eg: He is skipping
+) What are they doing?
They + are + Ving
3. Listen and repeat
Which sport do you play?
I play socccer
Etc….
c. Summary: 2’
T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 12: SPORT AND PASTIMESPeriod 74: A. What are you doing? (A4,5)
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge:
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: Use the present progressive tense and sport vocabularies to talk about their pastimes
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: call 1s go to the board and ask some questions
Questions:
1. Write the sentences with the present continuous tense
a, Mss Giang/ Jog
b, The children/ shop
c, They/ play/ soccer
d, Hoa & Mai are planning table tennis
2. Which sport do you play?
Key:
1. a, Mss Giang is Jogging
b, The children are shopping
c, They are playing soccer
d, Hoa & Mai are Playing table tennis
2. I skip and I do aerobics……………
T: check and correct
* Warm up( 2’)
1. Retell the new words
Ss: Do ex: Badminton; table tennis; aelobics; volleyball……
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Ask the Ss to look at the picture in the book.
Introduce about Nam & Lan. Than ask the Ss to read the information about them call some Ss to read
? Which sport does she/he play?
Ss: Look at picture and call the name of activities in the picture
T: Ask Ss to read the text
Ss: Read
Listen and correct their mistakes T: Ask some Ss to read before the class
T? What grammar is used in this text
Ss: look at the text and answer: the present simple tense
T: Remind the present simple tense
T: Ask Ss to read again and answer the questions
Ss: Read the answer the questions
Ss: Practice inpairs
S1: Which sport does Lan play?
S2: Lan swim, she does aerobics and play badminton
Etc …..
T: Check and correct
T: Have Ss look at A5 ask and answer about the activities they play
Ss: answer about the sports they play
S1: Which sport do you play?
I skip
I do aerobics
Etc…
Call some Ss to talk about their favorite sport
20’
15’
1. Read
a. Lan swim, she does aerobics and play badminton
b. No, she doesn’t
c. Nam plays soccer. He jogs and play table tennis
d. yes, he does
2. Practice
Which sport do you play?
I play soccer
c. Summary: 2’
T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 12: SPORT AND PASTIMESPeriod 75: B. Free time (B1,2,3,4)
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge:
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: Name of sport activities and pastime.
Talk and write about what they or others do in the free time.
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: call 1s go to the board and ask some questions
Questions:
Answer the question about you
1: What sport do you play?
2: Do you play tennis?
3: Do you play soccer?
4: Do you play aerobics?
Key:
1: I play badminton
2: Yes, I do
3: yes, I do
4: No, I don’t
Other Ss give comment and give mark
T: check and correct
* Warm up( 2’)
T: Ask Ss to talk about their free time. What about Phuong, Ly, Nam, Tuan, Long?
Ss: Listen & talk by Vietnamese
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Ask the Ss to look at the picture in the book.
Introduce some new words:
What do they do in their free time?
Ss: Look at picture and call the name of activities in the picture
T: Ask Ss to read the text
Ss: Read
Listen and correct their mistakes
T: Ask some Ss to read before the class
T: Ask Ss practice in pairs to ask and answer
Ss: Practice inpairs
S1: What do you do in your free time?
S2: I watch TV
Etc …..
T: Check and correct
T: Have Ss look at B3 ask and answer about the activities they do in their free time
?What do they do in their free time?
Ss: answer about the activites they do in their free time
S1: What does Phuong do in his free time?
He goes to the movies
Etc…
Call some Ss to talk about their favorite activites
T: Ask Ss to listen
Play the tape
- Tan reads
- Minh & Nam play video games
- Lien watches T.V
- Lan & Mai listen to music
Ss: Listen and answer before the class
T: Check and correct
10’
7
13’
5’
1. New words
Free time(n)
- Movies (n)
- Fishing (n)
- Video game (n)
2. Practice
What do you do in your free time?
I watch TV
3. Listen and read
What does Phuong do in his free time?
He goes to the movies
Etc…
4. Listen
Tan – f, Minh & Nam – e
Lien – a, Lan & mai – b
c. Summary: 2’
T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 12: SPORT AND PASTIMESPeriod 76: B. Free time (B5)
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge:
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: Describe time table. Present simple tense. How often. Adverb of one, twice talk and write about freequency
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: call 1s go to the board and ask some questions
Questions:
Answer the question about you
1. Which sport do you play?
2. What do you do in your free time?
Key:
1. I play…..
2. I read etc…
Other Ss give comment and give mark
T: check and correct
* Warm up( 2’)
T: What do you do in your free time?
How often do you do?
Ss: Listen & talk by Vietnamese
Eg: I go to the movie twice a week
I go to school twice a day
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
Introduce about Ly’s diary
T: Ask the Ss to look at the picture in the book.
? How often does Ly go jogging?
? How often does she listen to music?
What do they do in their free time?
Ss: Look at picture and call the name of activities in the picture
T: Ask Ss to read the text
Ss: Read
T: Ask Ss practice in pairs
Ss: Practice inpairs
Listen and correct their mistakes
T: Ask Ss to look at Ly’s diary ask and answer about Ly’s activities
Ss: Look at Ly’s diary ask and answer about Ly’s activities
S1: How often does Ly go fishing?
S2: She goes fishing once a week
15’
20’
1. How often
+ How often …? Dùng để hỏi mức độ thường xuyên – bao nhiêu lần?
From: How often + do/ does + s ….?
S + V ……
Once, twice, 3 times ….
Eg: I go to the movie twice a week
I go to school twice a day
- once = one time
- Twice = two times
2. Practice
How often does Ly go to school?
She goes to chool six times a week
Etc…
c. Summary: 2’
T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 12: SPORT AND PASTIMESPeriod 77: C. How often? ( C1,2,3,4)
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge:
By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
- Use well the Adv of frequency: always, uswally, often, some time, newer
- Use the question and answer with “How often …?”
- Reading comprehension the conversation talk about the activities had use the adv of frequency
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: call 1s go to the board and ask some questions
Questions:
Answer the question about you
How often does Ly go to school/go fishing …..?
Key:
She goes to chool six times a week
Etc…
Other Ss give comment and give mark
T: check and correct
* Warm up( 2’)
Ask Ss to look at Ly’s diary then do
How of ten does Ly do the thing
Introduce Adv of frequency depend on the sentences by Ss given
Look at the picture then talk about ly
- ly goes to chool 6 time a week
- Ly plays badminton 3 time a week
- She watches T.V twice a week
- she jogs once a week
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Introduce the adv of frequency
T: Read
Call Ss to read the Adv of frequency
Ss: Listen, read & copy
T: Introduce the content of the text
(point to picture then introduce)
- play the tape/ read
Call some Ss to read the text
Guide Ss to ask & answer about Ba & Lan
Call some pair to do
S1: How often do they go to the park?
S2: They often go to the park
Other Ss do the same
T: Ask Ss look at the questions in the C4 and answer
Ss: Look at the questions then write the answer in the book
How often do you go to the zoo?
- How often do you go to the park?
- How often do you play sport?
- How often do you go camping?
10’
15’
10’
1. Adv of frequency
Always (adv) Luôn luôn.
- Usually (adv) Thường thường.
- Often (adv) Hay.
- Some time (adv) Thỉnh thoảng.
- never (adv) Chưa bao giờ.
2. Listen and read
* New words:
Year(n)
Have a picnic: Đi pin nic.
Fly the kite: tha diều
Camp: Đi cắm trại.
Tent: Cái lều.
Late:
Ex: How often do Ba & Lan go to the zoo?
- they go to the zoo 3 times a year
Etc…
3. Write
- I go to the zoo 5 times a year
- I go to the park twice a month
- I play sport oncea day
- I go camping twice a year
Etc…
c. Summary: 2’
T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 12: SPORT AND PASTIMESPeriod 78: C. How often? (C5,6)
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge:
By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
- Use well the Adv of frequency: always, uswally, often, some time, newer
- Use the question and answer with “How often …?”
- Reading comprehension the conversation talk about the activities had use the adv of frequency
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: call 1s go to the board and ask some questions
Questions:
Complete the sentences about you with once a week, twice a week three … time a week, everyday
a, I go to chool
b, I eat meat
c, I study English
Key:
a, I go to school six times aweek (3m)
b, I eat meat four times aweek (3m)
c, I study English three time aweek (3m)
read well
Other Ss give comment and give mark
T: check and correct
* Warm up( 2’)
Ask Ss to retell the adv of frequency
Ss: Retell
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Aks Ss to book at the picture (p 132) then listen & fill the Adv of frequency given to each pictures
- play the tape/ read
call some Ss todo exercise
ss: Listen then compare the result to each o ther listen & tell their result
T: Listen & correct their mistakes
tape crip:
a, Nga & Lan never go camping
b, They some time go to the zoo
c, They often go to the park
d, they often play sport
e, They usually have apicnic in the park
T: Introduce the content of the text
Minh likes walking on the weekend
Minh & his friends often go walking in the mountains
? What do they do there? Let’s listen
Read the text the first time
T: Call some S Listen & read after in chorus
Ss: Read in silents
Answer the given
Listen & do in pairs to answers
T: Check and correct
10’
25’
1. Listen
a, Never d, some time
b, Some time e, usually
c, often
2. Read
2.1. New words:
On the weekend:
Wear boot:
Warm:
Take:
A camping stove:
Overnight:
Friends:
2.2. Answer the questions
a, Minh likes walking
b, they always wear strong boots & warm clothers
c, he goes on the weekend
d, He usually goes with 2 frinds
e, he often goes walking in the mountains
f, They always take food & water & a camping stove
c. Summary: 2’
T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 13: ACTIVITES AND THE SEASONSPeriod 79: A. The weather and seasons (A1)
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge:
Present simple tense. Use the temperature and season vocabulary. Talk, write about the weather in each season.
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: call 1s go to the board and ask some questions
Questions:
1. What do you like doing?
2. etc….
Key:
1. I like jogging……
Other Ss give comment and give mark
T: check and correct
* Warm up( 2’)
Ask Ss to retell the adj of felling
Ss: Retell
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Aks Ss to book at the picture (p 134) then T introduce the new words
What’s the season?
Ss: Look and answer
T: Read the new word
Ss: Listen, repeat and copy
Some Ss read before the class
T: Check and correct
T: guide Ss to match the words
Ss: Match the words
T: Ask Ss look at A1 listen and repeat
T: Read
Ss: Listen and read in chorus
T: Ask some Ss to read before the class
T: Guide Ss to play the game Wordsquare by find the words they have learnt
T: Check and correct
Key: → fall; cold; warm; spring; cool; weather
↓season; summer
15’
5’
15
1. New words
a. The weather and seasons
Weather:
Summer:
Fall:
Spring:
Winter:
Cool:
The season:
2. Matching
a. Cold Summer.
b. Cool Spring.
c. Warm Fall.
d. Hot Winter.
3. Listen and Reapeat
* Practice: Wordsquare
F
A
L
L
C
O
L
D
X
W
A
R
M
A
S
S
S
P
R
I
N
G
U
E
O
D
E
H
K
H
M
A
B
C
W
I
D
O
M
S
C
O
O
L
S
T
E
O
W
E
A
T
H
E
R
N
c. Summary: 2’
T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 13: ACTIVITES AND THE SEASONSPeriod 80: A. The weather and seasons (A2,3)
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge:
Present simple tense. Use the temperature and season vocabulary. Talk, write about the weather in each season.
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: call 1s go to the board and ask some questions
Questions:
Retell the new words
Key:
Weather:
Summer:
Fall:
Spring:
Winter:
Cool:
Other Ss give comment and give mark
T: check and correct
* Warm up( 2’)
Pelmanism:
Spring
warm
summer
hot
winter
cold
fall
T: Guide Ss to play game
Ss: Play game
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Introduce the srtucture to ask and answer about the westher and seasons
What’s the season?
What the weather like in the….
Ss: Look and answer
T: guide Ss to practice to ask and answer about the westher and seasons
Ss: Practice to ask and answer about the westher and seasons
S1: What’s the weather like in the winter?
S2: It’s cold
Etc…..
T: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss look at A3 listen and repeat
T: Read
Ss: Listen and read in chorus
T: Ask some Ss to read before the class
T: Guide Ss to ask and answer the questions
Ss: Practice
S1: What weather do you like?
S2: I like…..
T: Check and correct
15’
5’
15
1. Grammar
* Hỏi và trả lời về thời tiết
What’s the weather like in + Season ?
Thời tiết vào mùa ...như thế nào?
- It’s + adj ( chi thoi tiet)
Ex: What’s the weather like in the summer?
It’s hot
2. Practice
What’s the weather like in the fall?
It’s cool
What’s the weather like in the winter?
It’s cold
What’s the weather like in the spring?
It’s warm
3. Listen and Reapeat
What weather do you like?
I like + adj + weather
c. Summary: 2’
T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 13: ACTIVITES AND SEASONSPeriod 81: B. The weather and seasons (A4)
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge:
By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
- Practice in adverb of freequency. Simple past.
- Use the sport and season vocabulary.
- Use “ When ” clause in possitive statement
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: call 1s go to the board and ask some questions
Questions:
a. what weather do you like?
b. what is the weather like in the summer?
c. what is the weather like in the fall?
d. what is the weather like in the winter?
e. what is the weather like in spring?
f. what weather like today?
Key:
a, I like hot weather
b it’s hot
c, it’s cool
d. it’s cold
e. it’s warm
f. It’s……..
Other Ss give comment and give mark
T: check and correct
* Warm up( 2’)
T: Ask Ss to retell about pastimes
Ss: Retell
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Aks Ss to book at the picture (p 136) then read
T: read
Ss: Listen
T: Guide Ss to read
Ss: Read
Some Ss read before the class
T: Ask Ss to look at the picture and say what What does Ba do when it’s………
Ss: Practice in pairs to ask and answer
S1: What does Ba do when it’s hot?
S2: When it’s hot He goes swimming
Etc….
T: Ask Ss practice to ask and answer about themselves
Ss: Practice to ask and answer about themselves
S1: What do you do when it’s cool ?
When it’s hot I go jogging
Etc….
T: Ask Ss to write about activites they do in each weather
Ss: Write
T: Ask Ss to read their writing
Ss: Read
T: Check and correct
10’
15’
10’
1. Read
What does Ba do when it’s hot?
When it’s hot He goes swimming
Etc….
2. Practice
What do you do when it’s ….?
When it’s….. I ……
Eg: What do you do when it’s hot?
When it’s hot I go swimming
Etc….
3. futher Practice
Sugession:
when it’s hot I go swimming
when it’s cold I play soccer
when it’s cool I go jogging
when it’s warm I go fishing
c. Summary: 2’
T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 13: ACTIVITES AND SEASONSPeriod 82: B. Activeties and season
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge:
By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
- Practice in adverb of freequency. Simple past.
- Use the sport and season vocabulary.
- Use “ When ” clause in possitive statement
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: call 1s go to the board and ask some questions
Questions:
a. what weather do you like?
b. what do you do when it’s hot?
c. what do you do when it’s cold?
d. what do you do when it’s warm?
e. what do you do when it’s cool?
f. what weather like today?
Key:
a, I like hot weather
b, when it’s hot I go swimming
c, when it’s cold I play soccer
etc….
f. It’s……..
Other Ss give comment and give mark
* Warm up( 2’)
Ask Ss to retell the adv of frequency
Ss: Retell
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Aks Ss to book at the picture (p 138) then listen & repeat
T: play the tape or read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Introduce some new words
T: Read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Ask Ss to look at the picture and say what people do.
Ss: Read
We often play volleyball in the spring.
they sometimes Go sailling in the fall.
I often Go swimming in the summer.
She always plays badminton in the fall
We always play basketball in the winter.
Etc….
10’
10’
15’
1. Listen and repeat
* New words
Go sailing: Bơi thuyền.
Basketball: Chơi bóng rổ.
2. Write the list of things you do in the different seasons
a. Spring
b. Summer
c. fall
d. Winter
ex. A: What do you do in the spring?
B: I usually play badminton the spring
Etc….
3. Practice
Game: Lucky numbers
1. What is the weather like in BY?
2. …………..the fall?
3. Lucky number.
4. What is the weather do you like?
5. What sport do you do in the spring?
6. Lucky number.
7. What’s the weather like in the winter?
8. Where do you often Go in the summer?
c. Summary: 2’
T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 14: MAKING PLANSPeriod 83: A. Vacation destinations (A1,2,3)
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge:
Going to future( near future).
Possitive statement and WH question to talk about vacation plan.
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: call 1s go to the board and ask some questions
Questions:
a. what weather do you like?
b. what do you do when it’s hot?
c. what do you do when it’s cold?
d. what do you do when it’s warm?
e. what do you do when it’s cool?
f. what weather like today?
Key:
a, I like hot weather
b, when it’s hot I go swimming
c, when it’s cold I play soccer
etc….
f. It’s……..
Other Ss give comment and give mark
* Warm up( 2’)
Ask Ss to talk about some places in VN
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Aks Ss to book at the picture (p 140) then listen & repeat
T: play the tape or read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Introduce some new words
T: Read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Ask Ss to look at the picture and say what is this?/ Where is this?
Ss: Read the picture
T: Ask Ss to match the new words with the words inVietnamese
Ss: Matching
T: Ask Ss to practice the dialouge
Ss: Read before the class
T: Introduce the grammar structure “going to”
Ss: Look, listen and copy
T: Ask Ss to read again and answer the questions
Ss: Read then and answer the questions in groups
T: Ask Ss to give their answer on the board
T: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss to read the dialouge again then complete the dialouge
Ss: Write
T: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss to practice coplete the open dialouge
Ss: Complete
T: Check and correct
20’
15’
I. Listen and repeat
1. New words
The summer vacation:
Stay with:
Stay for:
Visit:
Aunt:
Uncle:
Citadel:
2. Grammar
Going to: Sẽ
Dùng để hỏi vê dự dịnh kế hoạch
What + tobe + S + going to + do?
S + tobe + going to + V-inf
Eg: What are you going to do?
I’m going to visit Hue
3. Answer the questions
a. She is going to vsit Hue
b. She is going to stay
c. She is going to stay with her aunt and uncle
d. She is going to visit the citadel
II. Write
1. Complete the dialouge
A: What are you going to do this summer vacation?
B: .....................visit HL Bay
A: Where are you going to stay?
B: ………………………. in a hotel
A: How long are you going to stay?
B: ……………….for two weeks
A: What are you going to do?
B: ………visit the beach and swim
3. Practice the open dialogue
S1: What are you …………...?
S2: I …………………Nha Trang.
S1: Where ……………....... stay?
S2: …………………. in a hotel.
S1: How long………………………?
S2: For ……
S1: What …………………… ?
S2: I …………….go swimming.
c. Summary: 2’
T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 14: MAKING PLANSPeriod 84: A. Vacation destinations (A4,5)
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge:
Going to future( near future).
Possitive statement and WH question to talk about vacation plan.
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: call 1s go to the board and ask some questions
Questions:
a. what is Lan going to do?
b. Where is she going to stay?
c. How long is she going to stay?
d. what is she going to do?
e. what are you going to do this summer vacation?
Key:
a. She is going to vsit Hue
b. She is going to stay
c. She is going to stay with her aunt and uncle
d. She is going to visit the citadel
e, I’m going to……………………
Other Ss give comment and give mark
* Warm up( 2’)
Ask Ss to talk about some places they are going to visit in VN
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Aks Ss to book at the picture (p 142) then listen & read
T: play the tape or read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Introduce some new words
T: Read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Ask Ss to look at the picture and say what is this?/ Where is this?
Ss: answer
T: Ask Ss to read the tex then complete the table
Ss: Read then complete
T: Guide Ss to read the text
Ss: Read
T: Ask Ss to practice ask and answer
Ss: practice in pairs
S1: Where are they going to visit first?
S2: They are going to visit Ha Long bay
Etc….
T: Check and correct
10’
10’
15’
1. Listen and read
* New words
First:
Then:
Next:
After that:
See:
Grandmother
Grandfather:
2. complete the table
Place
Where to stay
How long
Activity
Ha long
Uncle’s house
2 days
Visit the bay
Hanoi
hotel
3 days
See Ngoc son temple
Hue
Friend’s house
2 days
See the citadel
Nha trang
Friend’s house
3 days
Visit friends
HCM
Grand’ house
One week
Visit grands
3. Answer the questions
What places are they going to visit?
Where are they going to stay?
Etc….
c. Summary: 2’
T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 14: MAKING PLANSPeriod 85: B. Free time plans (B1,2,3,4)
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge:
Speak with Going to. ( near future).
Talk about plan for the near future.
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: call 1s go to the board and ask some questions
Questions:
a. what are they going to do?
b. Where are they going to stay in Ha Long Bay?
c. How long are they going to stay in Ha Noi?
d. what are they going to do in Hue?
e. what are they going to stay in HCM city?
Key:
a. They are going on vacation this summer
b. They are going to stay with their aunt and uncle
etc……..
Other Ss give comment and give mark
* Warm up( 2’)
Ask Ss to talk about their plans in free time
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Aks Ss to book at the picture (p 144) then listen & repeat
T: play the tape or read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Introduce some new words
T: Read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Ask Ss to practice reading
Ss: read
T: Ask Ss to ask and answer about their plans in B2
Ss: practice inpairs
S1: What are you going to do to night?
S2: I’m going to help my mom
S1: What are you going to do tomorrow?
S2: I’m going to go walking
T: Ask Ss to read the text B3
Ss: Read
T: Ask Ss make the plans for the weekend
Ss: making plans
T: Ask Ss to practice talk about their plans on the weekend
Ss: Read their plans
On Saturday morning I’m going to go to school
On Saturday afternoon I’m going to go fishing
Etc….
T: Check and correct
10’
10’
15’
1. Listen and repeat
* New words
Tomorrow
Tonight
2. Practice
a. What are you going to do to night?
I’m going to see a movie.
What are you going to do tomorrow?
I’m going to go walking
b. What are you going to do to night?
I’m going to help my mom
What are you going to do tomorrow?
I’m going to play volleyball
3. Making plan for the weekend
On Saturday morning I’m going to…
On Saturday afternoon I’m going to…
On Saturday everning I’m going to…
On Sunday morning I’m going to…
On Sunday afternoon I’m going to…
On Sunday everning I’m going to…
c. Summary: 2’
T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 14: MAKING PLANSPeriod 86: B. Free time plans (B5,6)
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge:
Speak with Going to. ( near future).
Talk about plan for the near future.
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: call 1s go to the board and ask some questions
Questions:
What are you going to do on the weekend?
Key:
On Saturday morning I’m going to…
On Saturday afternoon I’m going to…
On Saturday everning I’m going to…
On Sunday morning I’m going to…
On Sunday afternoon I’m going to…
On Sunday everning I’m going to…
Other Ss give comment and give mark
* Warm up( 2’)
Ask Ss to talk about their plans in free time
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Aks Ss to book at the picture (p 145) then listen & read
T: play the tape or read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Introduce some new words
T: Read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Ask Ss to practice reading
Ss: read
T: Ask Ss to ask and answer about their plans in B5
Ss: practice inpairs
S1: What is Minh going to do / bring?
S2: he is going to ……
Etc…
T: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss to listen and match the name with the right picture
Ss: Listen
T: Check and correct
15’
10’
10’
1. Listen and repeat
* New words
Camera:
Take photo:
Bring:
2. Practice ask and answer
What is ….. going to bring?
He is going to ………..
Ex: What is Minh going to bring?
Minh is going to bring some food
3. Listen
Vui: A tent, some food.
Ly: Camara.
Lan: A ball.
Nga and Mai: Some drink.
c. Summary: 2’
T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 14: MAKING PLANSPeriod 87: C. Suggestions
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge:
Make suggetions with let’s.
Further practice: - Want to do, what about, why don’t we?
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: call 1s go to the board and ask some questions
Questions:
What are you going to do on the weekend?
Key:
On Saturday morning I’m going to…
On Saturday afternoon I’m going to…
On Saturday everning I’m going to…
On Sunday morning I’m going to…
On Sunday afternoon I’m going to…
On Sunday everning I’m going to…
Other Ss give comment and give mark
* Warm up( 2’)
Ask Ss to talk about their plans in free time
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Aks Ss to book at the picture (p 145) then listen & read
T: play the tape or read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Introduce some new words
T: Read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Ask Ss to practice reading
Ss: read
T: Ask Ss to ask and answer about suggestion in c1
Ss: practice
S1: Let's go camping
S2: What bout going camping?
Etc…
T: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss to read again and answer the questions
Ss: Read again and answer the questions
T: Check and correct
15’
10’
10’
1. Listen and read
a. New words
Pagoda:
Minibus
Too = Very:
Too far:
Good idea
b. Grammar
Let’s + V-inf
What about + Ving…?
Why don’t we + V-inf….?
E.g:Let's go camping!
Why don't we go to Huong pagoda?
2. Practice ask and answer
a. He wants to go to Hue
b. She wants to go to Huong Pagoda
c. She wants to walk there
d. Because it’s too far
e. He wants to travel by bike
f. Because it’s too hot
g. He wants to travel by minibus
3. Make suggestons
a. Let’s go to the beach
b. What about going to the museum
c. Why don’t we play volleyball
etc….
c. Summary: 2’
T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………Period 88: Grammar practice
1. Objectives:
a. knowledge:
By the End of the lesson Ss can cousolidate vocabulary and structures on topics they have learnt from U12 -> U14
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c . Behavior:
Student like studying the subject and use English correctly
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture, chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids.
3. Steps of teaching:
a. Oral test: 2’
* Warm up
Ask Ss to talk about the adv of freequency
c. New lesson: 40’
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Aks Ss to look at the book (p 145) then retell the simple tense
Ss: Look at the book (p 145) then retell the simple tense
T: Guide Ss to do ex in group
Ss: Do ex
T: Check and correct
A. Huong : (1) …… you like sports ?
Ba : Yes. I (2) …… sports.
Huong : What (3) ……you play?
Ba : I (4) ……badminton.
Huong : (5) … you play volleyball?
Ba : No, I (6) ………
C. Minh : (1) ……they like sports?
Ha : Yes, they (2) ……
Minh : What (3) ….. they play?
Ha : They swim.
Minh : Do they dive?
Ha : No, they (4) ……
T: Aks Ss to look at the book (p 146) then retell the present progressivetense
Ss: Look at the book (p 146) then retell the simple tense
T: Guide Ss to do ex
Ss: Do ex
T: Check and correct
A. Hung : What are you watching ?
Mai : I ( 1) …….this TV sports.
Hung : What are they playing?
Mai : They are (2) ………………. soccer.
Hung : Who is winning ?
Mai : My favorite team (3) ……… the match.
B. Vui : What is Mom cooking ?
Nam : She (1) ……… a chicken.
Vui : Are we having some rice, too?
Nam : No, we (2) ……We are having noodles.
Vui : Is she cooking some vegetables ?
Nam : Yes, she (3) ……she is cooking some beans.
C. Nhan : Are you doing your homework?
Thanh : Yes, I (1) ………….. My math. What are you reading?
Nhan : I (2) ……………….. My history book.
T: Aks Ss to look at the book (p 146) then retell going to
Ss: Look at the book (p 145) then retell
T: Guide Ss to do ex in pairs
Ss: Do ex
T: Check and correct
EX : S1 : What are they going to do?
S2 : They are going to play soccer.
T Guide Ss to play a game lucky numbers use 12 numbers 2,5,9,10 are lucky numbers
Ss: Play game
8’
7’
8’
10’
7’
I. Present simple tense ( Thì hiện tại đơn)
1. Grammar
a. Form : (+) S + V / Vs, es + O.
(-) S + do/ does + not + O…
(?) Do / Does + S + V…?
Yes, S + Do/does
No, S + Don’t/doesn’t
b. Usage: Thì hiện tại đơn diễn tả sự thật, chân lý hay hành động, sự việc xảy ra theo thói quen hàng ngày
2. Practice exercise1
Complete the dialogue, using the present simple tense
B. Thu : (1) …… he like sports?
Tuan : Yes, he (2) ……
He (3) ………sports.
Thu : What (4) ……he play?
Tuan : He (5) …… soccer.
Thu : (6) …… he play tennis?
Tuan : No, he (7) ……
II. Adverbs of frequency
1. Network
2. Practice exercise 2
How often do you + V…….?
I + always/usually…. + V….
III. Present progressive tense
( thì hiện tại tiếp diễn)
1. Grammar
a. Form :
(+) : S + am / is / are + V-ing + O
(-) : S + am /is /are + not +V-ing + O
(?) : Am / is /are + S + V-ing + O?
b. Usage : (thì hiện tại tiếp diễn, diễn tả hành động, sự việc đang diễn ra ở hiện tại)
2. Practice exercise 3
Complete the dialogue, using the present progressive tense.
IV. Going to
1. Grammar
a. Form : What + is /are /am + S + going to + do?
( S + is /are /am + going to + V .
b. Usage: Diễn tả dự định trong tương lai.
2. Practice excerise 4
a. What are they going to do?
b. Complete the dialouge
Han : What are you going to do?
Vui : I (1) ………… visit HaNoi.
Han : Where are you going to stay?
Vui : I (2) ……… stay in a hotel.
Han : How long are you going to stay.
Vui : I (3) ……… stay for a week.
* Answer the questions :
What is Vui going to do ?
Where is she going to stay ?
How long is she going to stay?
V. Lucky numbers
1. What׳s the weather like in the spring ?
2. Lucky number
3. What׳s the weather like in the summer?
4. What׳s the weather like in the fall?
5. Lucky number
6. What׳s the weather like in the winter?
7. What are you going to do this evening?
8. What are you going to do on the weekend?
9. Lucky number
10. Lucky number
11. What are you going to do tomorrow?
12. What are you going to do in the vacation?
c. Summary: 2’
T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Period 89: A FORTY - FIVE MINUTE TEST
1. Objectives
a. Knowledge:
All the language items from unit 12 to 14
b. Skill:
Reading, listening, writing, language focus
c. Behavior:
Educate students use English correctly to do the test
2. Questions 45’
A. Listening: Listen and complete the table.(2pts)
Name
Place to visit?
Where to stay?
How long to stay?
Lan
(1)….......................
Friend’s house
For five days
Hoa
Hue
(2)…..........................
for three days
Mai
(3)………….
With her uncle
for two weeks
Ba
Ho Chi Minh city
With his grandfather.
For (4)………….
B. Reading: Read the passage (3pts)
There are four seasons in a year. They are spring, summer, fall and winter. It is warm in the spring. Sometimes, it is cold but not very cold. There are many flowers in the spring. After spring comes summer. In the summer, the day is long and the night is short. They often go swimming in the summer. It is cool in the fall. In the winter, It is usually very cold. The day is short and the night is long.
I. Choose the best answer (1 pts)
1. There are ……………. seasons in a year.
a. three b. four c. five d. six
2. It is………………. in the fall
a. hot b. cold c. cool d. warm
II. Answer the questions: (2 pts)
2. What’s the weather like in the spring? -> …………………………………………………………
4. What do they often do in the summer? -> …………………………………………………………
C. Language focus: I. Choose the best answer.( 1pts)
1. Lan ………………… aerobics every morning.
a, do b. does c. to do d. doing
2. It is ……………. in the summer.
a. hot b. warm c. cold d. cool
3. What about………………….by car?
a. go b. to go c. going d. goes
4. Let’s…………………our homeworks
a. to do b. do c. does d. doing
II. Put the verb in the blank with suitable tense(2pts)
1. He (go)………walking in the mountain every week
2. They always (play) ………badminton in the fall
3. Mai(like)….. ……… traveling by car
4. Everyday, Ba (do) ………………not get up early
D. Writing: Write a passage about your vacation, using the following cues.( 2 pts)
This summer/ vacation/I / visit / Ha Noi city
I / stay/ with my friend / three weeks
I/ see/ Ngoc Son temple and parks
I/ play games / there.
3. Answer key and mark guide
I. Listening: (2ps) ( Each correct answer get mark 0. 5)
(1) Ha Noi; (2) in a hotel; (3) Ha Long Bay; (4) Two days
II Reading (3ps)I. Choose the best answer (1 pts) ( Each correct answer get mark 0.5)
1. can; 2 some; 3. many; 4. like; 5. any; 6. much; 7. else; 8. much
II. Answer the questions ( Each correct answer get mark 0,5)
1. It is warm in the spring
2. They often go swimming in the summer
III. Language focus (3ps)
1 I. Choose the best answer (Each correct answer get mark 0.25)
1. b 2.a 3. c 4. b
II. Put the verb in the blank with suitable tense ( Each correct answer get mark 0.5)
a. goes; b. play; c. likes ; d. does
IV. Writing: Write a passage about your vacation, using the following cues. ( Each correct answer get mark 0.5)
This summer vacation Iam going to visit Ha Noi city. I am going to stay with my friend for three weeks. I’m going to see Ngoc Son temple and parks. I’m going to play games there
4. Comment
* Knowledge:
* Skill:
- Listening:
- Reading:
- Language focus:
- Writing:
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Period 90: CORRECT THE TEST
1. Objectives
a. Knowledge:
Help Ss correct the mistakes in their test, Ss will know mistake and correct them, Ss can get more experiment for next tests
b. Skill:
Reading, listening, writing, language focus
c. Behavior:
Educate students use English correctly and get more experiment for next tests
2. Correction (43’)
T gives Ss test papers and commend
T: Ask Ss go to the board do again the test
Ss: do again
T: Give test to Ss and get Ss pairs compare
Ss: Compare in pairs
T: Check and correct
*Keys
I. Listening: (2ps) ( Each correct answer get mark 0. 5)
(1) Ha Noi; (2) in a hotel; (3) Ha Long Bay; (4) Two days
II Reading (3ps)I. Choose the best answer (1 pts) ( Each correct answer get mark 0.5)
1. can; 2 some; 3. many; 4. like; 5. any; 6. much; 7. else; 8. much
II. Answer the questions ( Each correct answer get mark 0,5)
1. It is warm in the spring
2. They often go swimming in the summer
III. Language focus (3ps)
1 I. Choose the best answer (Each correct answer get mark 0.25)
1. b 2.a 3. c 4. b
II. Put the verb in the blank with suitable tense ( Each correct answer get mark 0.5)
a. goes; b. play; c. likes ; d. does
IV. Writing: Write a passage about your vacation, using the following cues. ( Each correct answer get mark 0.5)
This summer vacation Iam going to visit Ha Noi city. I am going to stay with my friend for three weeks. I’m going to see Ngoc Son temple and parks. I’m going to play games there
3. Guide to do at home(2’)
Do again the test in your exercise book
Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 15: COUNTRIESPeriod 91: A. We are the world (A1,2,3,4)
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge:
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to ask and answer about the nationality and languages of some countries in the world
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 2’
* Warm up
T: Show the pictures on page 154 and ask some question.
1- Do you know where these people come from ?
2- Do you want to know where they are fom ?
Ss: Work in groups and discuss the Qs
c. New lesson: 40’
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: use the picture in the book to introduce the name of some countries
Ss: Look at picture and call the name of countries ( in Vietnamese)
T: Open the tape or read
Ss: Listen and repeat.
T: Read and write the new words on the board
Ss: Copy and read.
T: Guide Ss to read the picture with people from other countries
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Check and correct their pronunciation
Some Ss read before the class
T: Introduce the form to ask and answer about where someone from
T: Write on the board
Ss: Look, listen and copy
T: Give Model sentences and ask Ss to practice
Ss: Practice to ask and answer
S1: Where is Laura from?
S2: She is from Canada
Etc…
T; Check and correct
T: Ask Ss to look in the book (page 155) and read about Minh
Ss: Look and listen
T: Introduce nationality and language of some coutries in A3
T: Read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Ask Ss to read before the class
Some Ss read
T: Introduce new form to ask and answer about nationality and language
Ss: Look, listen and copy
T: Ask Ss practice to ask and answer about nationality and language of some people from other countries
Ss: Practice inpairs
S1: Who’s that?
S2: That’s Yoko
S1: Where is she from?
S2: She is from Japan
S1: What’s her nationality?
S2: She is Japanese
S1: Which language does she speak?
S2: She speaks Japanese
Etc…
T: Ask Ss to look at pictures of some famous people from many coutries and say about their countries; nationalities and languages
Ss: Look at pictures and practice
Eg: T shows a picture of president from The USA Barack Obama and ask
Where is he from?
What’s his nationality?
Which language does he speak?
He is from The USA
He is American
He speaks English
Etc…
T: Ask Ss to introduce themselvse by answer some questions
Ss: Practice
T: Check and correct
20’
20’
I. Countries
1. New words
Canada:
France
China:
USA:
Japan:
Great Britain
Australia:
2. Hỏi và trả lời ai đó đến từ đâu
Where + tobe + S + from?
S + tobe + from + country
Ex: Where are you from?
I’m from Viet nam
Model sentences
Where is Laura from?
She is from Canada
3. Hỏi và trả lời về quốc tịch và ngôn ngữ
Nationality(n): Quốc tịch
Language(n): Ngôn ngữ
a. Hỏi và trả lời về quốc tịch
What + His/her/your/their + nationality ?
(Quốc tịch của anh ấy/cô ấy/bạn/họ là gì)
S + tobe + nationality(quốc tịch)
b. Hỏi và trả lời về ngôn ngữ
Which language + do/does + S + speak?
S + speak (s) + language(ngôn ngữ)
II. Practice
1. Mapped dialogue
A: Who’s that?
B: That’s ………
A: Where … … from?
B: … … from …………
A: What’s … .. nationality?
B: He/she is …………
A: Which language does …. speak?
B: … .. speaks …………….
2. Further practice
She is from Viet Nam.
She is Vietnamese.
She speaks Vietnamese.
3. Answer about you
Where are you from?
I’m from …………
What’s your nationality?
I’m …………….
Which language do you speak?
I speak …………….
c. Summary: 2’
T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 15: COUNTRIESPeriod 92: A. We are the world (A5,6)
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge:
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to ask and answer about the nationality and languages of some countries in the world
Write a postcard about being on vacation to their friends.
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer
Ss: Go to the board and answer
Questions: Show the picture of some people and ask Ss to answer about their countries; nationalities and languages
Introduce about youself
Key:
She is from Viet Nam.
She is Vietnamese.
She speaks Vietnamese.
I speak …………….
I’m from …………
Etc…
Others S giving the opinions
T: Correct the answers and give mark
* Warm up
T: Show the letter in page 156 and ask ? What is this?
Ss: Look and discuss the Qs
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Ask Ss look at the letter and read
T: Introduce some new words
T: Write on the board
Ss: Look, listen and copy
T: Ask some Ss to read the letter
Ss: Read
T: Guide Ss to write similar postcard for Minh depend on the postcard from Nhan
Ss: Write
T: Ask Some Ss to read their reading
Ss: Read before the class
T: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss to look in A3 answer the questions
Ss: Look and answer in pairs
S1: What is your name?
S2: a. My name is…
S1: How old are you?
S2: I’m….. years old
Etc…
T: Check and correct
10’
15’
10’
1. Read the postcard
A postcard:
Interesting place:
A lot of:
2. Write a postcard
Dear Nhan,
I’m on vacationn in…….
3. Answer the questions
a. My name is…
b. I’m….. years old
c. I’m from…..
etc…
c. Summary: 2’
T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 15: COUNTRIESPeriod 93: B. Cities, building and people (B1,2,3,4)
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge:
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to :Use the comparative and superlative form of short adjectives
Compare places using comparative and superlative adjective
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer
Ss: Go to the board and answer
Questions:
1. Read the postcard they have written in the last lesson
2. Answer some questions
Key:
1. Dear Nhan,
I’m on vacationn in…….
2. a. My name is…
b. I’m….. years old
c. I’m from…..
Etc…
Others S giving the opinions
T: Correct the answers and give mark
* Warm up
T: Show the picture in page 158 and ask Ss to compare the buildings and houses
Ss: Look and discuss
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Ask Ss look at pictures and compare the building and house
Ss: Look and compare
T: Read
Ss: Listen and repeat
Some Ss read before the class
T: Introduce the structures of The comparative and superlative form of short adjectives
Ss: Look listen and copy
T: Give ex and ask Ss give some ex
Ss: Give ex
T: Ask Ss to look at B2 and ask
? Where is this?
Ss: Look and answer
T: Read the passage
Ss: Listen
T: Introduce some new words
Ss: Look listen and copy
T: Guide Ss to read the passage
Some Ss read before the class
T: Ask Ss to answer the questions
Ss: Read again and answer in pairs
T: Check and correct
T: Introduce Sears tower in Chicago and
Petronas Twin towers in Kuala Lumpur
T: Ask Ss to read
Ss: Reas
T: Ask ss to guess which is taller: Sear towers or Petronas twin towers?
Ss: Read and check
+ Sears tower is 442 meters high
+ Petronas twin towers is 452 meters high
Ss Answer Petronas twin towers is taller than Sears tower
T: Ask ss to look at the picture in B4 and guess what is it? And Where is it?
T: Introduce the Great wall in China
T: Read and introduce some new words
Ss: Look listen and copy
T: Guide Ss to read
Ss: Read
T; Ask Ss to read again then answer the questions
Ss: Answer in pairs
S1: How long is the Great wall?
S2: It is over 6,000 kilometers long
Etc…
10’
10’
15’
1. The comparative and superlative form of short adjectives
a. Comparative: short adj+er
big→bigger
small→smaller
S1 +be +short adj-er +than +S2
E.g: Hoa is taller than Nga
b. superlative: short adj + est
big→bigest
small→smallest
S + tobe + the + adj-est
E.g: Hoa is the tallest
Big = > bigger = > the biggest.
Wet = > wetter => the wettest.
Hot = > hotter = > the hottest.
Cold = > colder = > the coldest.
Small = > smaller = > the smallest.
Tall = > taller = > the talest.
2. Listen and read
a. New words
In the world:
Population:
Capital:
b. Answer the questions
a. No, it isn’t
b. Mexico City is the biggest city in the world
c. Tokyo is bigger
3. Some world famous places
a. Towers
Sears tower:
Petronas Twin towers:
Which is taller Sear towers or Petronas twin towers?
b. The Great wall of China
The Great wall:
High:
Thick:
How + long is the Great wall?
high
thick
c. Summary: 2’
T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 15: COUNTRIESPeriod 94: C. Natural features (C1,2)
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge:
• By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: Introduce about the country, use some place nouns and talk about some natural features of VN
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer
Ss: Go to the board and answer
Questions:
1. Retell the structures of The comparative and superlative form of short adjectives
2. Change some adj in to comparative and superlative
a. Cold; b. Small; c. Tall; d. Wet; e. big
Key:
1. S + tobe + the + adj-est
S1 +be +short adj-er +than +S2
2. Change some adj in to comparative and superlative
Cold - colder - the coldest
Small - smaller - the smallset.
Tall - taller - the tallest.
big - bigger - the biggest.
Wet - wetter - the westest.
Etc…
Others S giving the opinions
T: Correct the answers and give mark
* Warm up(2)
T: Show the picture in page 162 and ask ? Where is it?
Ss: Look and answer
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Ask Ss look at pictures and read
Ss: Look and read
T: Read
Ss: Listen
T: Introduce some new words and the structure lots of E.g:We have lots of beaches
T: Guide Ss to read the passage
Some Ss read before the class
T: Ask ss to do exercise in C1: Complete the passage
Call on some ss to give answers
T: Check and correct
T: Ask Ss to practice in pairs to ask and answer
Ss: Practice in pairs
S1: Does VN have any rain?
S2: Yes, it does
Etc…
25’
10’
I. Listen and read
1. New words
Lots of:
Red/Mekong River:
Rain:
Forest:
Desert:
2. Complete the passage
a. mountains
b. rivers
c. lakes
d. rain
e. forests
f. beaches
g. deserts
II. Ask and answer
Does VN have any…?
Yes, it does/No, it doesn’t
c. Summary: 2’
T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 15: COUNTRIESPeriod 95: C. Natural features (C3)
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge:
• By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: Introduce about the country, use some place nouns and talk about some natural features of VN and in the world
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer
Ss: Go to the board and answer
Questions:
1. Complete the passage using pictures
2. Does VN have any…?
Key:
1. a. mountains b. rivers etc…
2. Yes, it is/ No, it isn’t
Etc…
Others S giving the opinions
T: Correct the answers and give mark
* Warm up(2)
Ask ss some questions:
1.Which is the highest mountain in the world?
2.Which is the longest river in VietNam?
3.Which is longer:The Red river or the Mekong river?
c. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Ask Ss look at the book page 165 and listen
Ss: Look and read
T: Read
Ss: Listen
T: Introduce some new words
T: Write on the board
T: Read the new words
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Guide Ss to read the passage
Some Ss read before the class
T: Check and correct
T: Ask ss to do exercise in C3: answer the questions
T: Ask Ss to practice in pairs to ask and answer
Ss: Practice in pairs
Call on some ss to give answers
T: Check and correct
20’
15’
1. New words
Flow to: Chảy xuống.
The sea:
Tibet:
North of africa:
Mediteranean
It starts in Tibet.
The Nile river.
The Mediteranean sea. Địa trung hải
Mount Everest:
2. Answer the questions
a.The Mekong river is the longest river in VN
b. The Mekong river startes in China
c.The Nile river is the longest river in the world
d. The Nile river flow to The Mediterranean sea
e. Mount Everest is the highest mountain in the world
f. Phanxipang is the highest mountain in VN
c. Summary: 2’
T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 16: MAN AND THE ENVIRONMENTPeriod 96: A. Animals and plants (A1,3)
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge:
• By the end of the lesson, students will be able to :
+Use How much and How many question with some quantity adjs(some, a lot, a little, a few) Countable and uncountable quantifiers
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer
Ss: Go to the board and answer
Questions:
1.Which is the highest mountain in the world?
2.Which is the longest river in VietNam?
3.Which is longer:The Red river or the Mekong river?
Key:
1. Mount Everest is the highest mountain in the world
2. The Mekong river is the longest river in VN
Etc…
Others S giving the opinions
T: Correct the answers and give mark
* Warm up(2)
Ask Ss to list some countable and uncountable nouns about food
Ss: Make a list
b. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Ask ss to look at the picture in A1 and comment about rice and egg in each
T: Present the use of Some/a lot/a few/little
S: Look listen and copy
T: Read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Ask ss to say again How much; How many questions
T: Write on the board
Ss: Copy
T: Ask Ss to look at a3 listen and write the letter of picture under the right heading
Ss: Listen and write the letter of picture under the right heading
Some Ss read their listening
T: Check and correct
10’
15’
10’
1. Some quantity adjs
- Some/a lot/a few+plural countable nouns
- Some/a lot of/a little+uncountable nouns
Lots of = a lot of:
2. How much and How many question with some quantity adjs
How much + uncountable nouns?
How many+ countable nouns..?
*Model sentence:
+ How much rice is there?
There is some.
+ How many eggs are there?
There are some.
There are alot of/ lots of / a few eggs
3. Practice
*Keys:
A lot of.
Some.
A lot of.
A few.
A litte.
Some.
c. Summary: 2’
T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 16: MAN AND THE ENVIRONMENTPeriod 97: A. Animals and plants (A2)
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge:
• By the end of the lesson, students will be able to :
+Use How much and How many question with some quantity adjs(some, a lot, a little, a few) and to know about castle and plant vocabulary
Countable and uncountable quantifiers
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer
Ss: Go to the board and answer
Questions:
1. Retell again the use of Some/a lot/a few/little
2. Make question with How much + uncountable nouns?/How many+ countable nouns..?
Key:
1. - Some/a lot/a few+plural countable nouns
- Some/a lot of/a little+uncountable nouns
2. + How much rice is there?
There is some.
+ How many eggs are there?
Etc…
Others S giving the opinions
T: Correct the answers and give mark
* Warm up(2)
Ask Ss to list some countable and uncountable nouns about food
Ss: Make a list
b. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Ask Ss to look at the picture in A2 and ask
what does he do?
T: Ask Ss the questions in Vietnamese
?What do farmers produce?
Ss: Answer
T: Read the passage
T: Ask Ss to find the new words
Ss: Find the new words
T: Introduce the new words
S: Look listen and copy
T: Read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Ask Ss to read the passage
Ss: Read
T: Ask Ss to answer the questions
Ss: Practice in pairs to answer the questions
S1:
T: Check and correct
20’
15’
1. New words
On the farm: ở trang trại
Animals: Động vật.
Buffalo: Con trâu.
Cow: Con bò.
Pull a card: Kéo xe bò.
Produce: Sản xuất.
Plow: Cày.
2. Answer the questions
a. He produces a lot of rice
b. Yes, he does
c. He produces a little fruit
d. His cows produce a little milk
e. His chickens produce a lot of eggs
c. Summary: 2’
T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 16: MAN AND THE ENVIRONMENTPeriod 98: A. Animals and plants (A4,5)
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge:
• By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: Further practice in present progressive to talk about environment and know how to protect the invironment
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject and know how to protect the invironment
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer
Ss: Go to the board and answer
Questions:
1. Retell again the use of Some/a lot/a few/little
2. Answer the questions
a. How much rice does Mr. Hai produce?
b. How much fruit does he produce?
c. How many eggs do his chickens produce?
Key:
1. - Some/a lot/a few+plural countable nouns
- Some/a lot of/a little+uncountable nouns
2. a. He produces a lot of rice
b. He produces a little fruit
c. His chickens produce a lot of eggs
Others S giving the opinions
T: Correct the answers and give mark
* Warm up(2)
Ask Ss to talk about some important problems that the man face nowadays
Ss: Talk about some important problems that the man face nowadays
b. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Ask Ss to look at the picture in A4 and discuss the topic
T: Read the passage
T: Ask Ss to find the new words
Ss: Find the new words
T: Introduce the new words
S: Look listen and copy
T: Read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Ask Ss to read the passage
Ss: Read
T: Introduce the questions with why and because
Ss: Listen and copy
T: Ask Ss to answer the questions
Ss: Practice in pairs to answer the questions
S1: Why do we need more land?
S2: Because……….
T: Check and correct
20’
15’
1. New words
More: Nhiều hơn.
Need: Cần.
Land: Đất.
Cut down: Chặt xuống.
Burn: Đốt .
Destroy: Phá huỷ.
Asian: Châu á.
Danger: Nguy hiểm
2. Answer the questions with why and because
Why + V…..?: Tại sao?
Because: Tại vì
a. Because there are more people
b. Because they need more fields
c. Because we are destroying plants and animals
c. Summary: 2’
T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 16: MAN AND THE ENVIRONMENTPeriod 99: B. Pollution (B1,2,3)
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge:
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to :
+Know some vocabulary about the environment and some imperatives about the environment. Pollution of invironment, protect the invironment and present progressive
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject and know how to protect the invironment
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer
Ss: Go to the board and answer
Questions:
1. Why do we need more land?
2. Why do farmer burn the forest?
3. Why are these Asian animal in danger?
Key:
1. Because there are more people
2. Because they need more fields
3. Because we are destroying plants and animals
Others S giving the opinions
T: Correct the answers and give mark
* Warm up(2)
Ask Ss to talk about some important problems that the man face nowadays
Ss: Talk about some important problems that the man face nowadays
b. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Ask Ss to look at the picture in B1 and discuss the topic
T: Read the passage
T: Ask Ss to find the new words
Ss: Find the new words
T: Introduce the new words
S: Look listen and copy
T: Read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Ask Ss to read the passage
Ss: Read
T: Introduce the questions with and ask Ss to read carefully then answer the questions
Ss: Practice in pairs to answer the questions
S1: Ask
S2: Answer
T: Check and correct
T: Ask ss to look at the pictures on page 170 and say what we should or shouldn't do to our environment?
T: Introduce some new words
T: Ask Ss do matching
Ss: Do matching
T: Check and correct
15’
10’
10’
1. New words
Invironment: Môi trường.
Wild animal: Động vật hoang dã.
Wasting: Phí phạm.
Coal: Than dầu.
Oil: Dầu.
Gas: Ga.
Power: Điện năng.
Gases: Các chất khí.
Trash: Rác.
Ocean: Đại dương.
2. Answer the questions
a. Because we are destroying the forests
b. Gases are polluting the air
c. The pollution come from coal, oil, gas
d.We are producing too much trash
3. Listen and read
Pick: Hái
Throw: Ném, vứt
Keep off the grass: Ko dẫm lên cỏ
Save water:
Collcet the paper
Follow these rule:Theo quy định.
A-c B-f C-a D-h
E-e F-b G-g H-d
c. Summary: 2’
T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………
Unit 16: MAN AND THE ENVIRONMENTPeriod 100: B. Pollution (B4,5,6)
1. Objectives:
a. Knowledge:
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to :
+ Know some vocabulary about the environment, Pollution of invironment, protect the invironment
+ Use Should, shouldn’t; talk about some activities to protect the envi ronment in Vietnam
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c. Behavior:
Students to have good habits of working and learning
Ss like studying the subject and know how to protect the invironment
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture,chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids
3. Procedure:
a. Oral test: 7’
T: Ask Ss go to the board and answer
Ss: Go to the board and answer
Questions:
1. Why are wild animals and plants in danger?
2. What is polluting the air?
3. Where does the pollution come from?
d. What is polluting the land, the rivers and the oceans
Key:
1. Because we are destroying the forests
2. Gases are polluting the air
3. The pollution come from coal, oil, gas
4.We are producing too much trash
Others S giving the opinions
T: Correct the answers and give mark
Warm up(2)
T: Ask ss to do the Matching
A
B
Collect
Trash on the street
Don't pick
Water
Don't throw
The grass
Save
Flowers
Keep off
paper
b. New lesson: 35’
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Ask Ss to look at B4 and discuss the topic
T: Read the passage
T: Ask Ss to find the new words
Ss: Find the new words
T: Introduce the new words
S: Look listen and copy
T: Read
Ss: Listen and repeat
T: Ask Ss to read the passage
Ss: Read in groups
S1: Lan
S2: Ba
S3: Nga
S4: Nam
T: Introduce should and shouldn't
Ss: Listen and copy
T: Ask Ss to write rules for the pictures
Ss: Practice to write rules for the pictures
T: Check and correct
10’
10’
15’
1. New words
Leaves: Xả, bỏ.
Put: Để, Đặt.
Trash can: Thùng rác
2. Should and shouldn’t
Shold/sholdn’t + V + O
E.g:We should save water
3. Read
Recycle: Tái chế.
Waste food: Thức ăn thừa.
Feed: Cho ăn.
Pig: Con Lợn.
Empty: Trống rỗng.
Scrap: Phế thải.
Metal: Sắt thép.
Plastic Nhựa.
*Answer the questions
a. In VN, we collect empty bottles, cans, waste paper, scrap metal and old plastice and recycle them
b, We feed it to pigs
c. Factories recycle them
d. Yes I do
e. We collect waste paper for school mini- project(kế hoạch nhỏ)
c. Summary: 2’
T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………Period 101: Grammar practice
1. Objectives:
a. knowledge:
By the End of the lesson Ss can cousolidate vocabulary and structures on topics they have learnt from U14-> U16
Further practice in Present simple,present progressive,comparative and superlative forms of adjs and indefinite quantifiers:a few/a little/a lot/lots
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c . Behavior:
Student like studying the subject and use English correctly
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture, chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids.
3. Steps of teaching:
a. Oral test: 2’
* Warm up
Ask Ss to talk about the adv of freequency
c. New lesson: 40’
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Aks Ss to look at the book (p 174) then retell the simple tense
Ss: Look at the book (p 174) then retell the simple tense
T: Guide Ss to do ex in group
Ss: Do ex
T: Check and correct
E.g: a. Nam:Where are you from?
Tom:I am from Canada
Nam:Do you speak Vietnamese?
Tom:No,I don't.I speak English and
French
T: Aks Ss to retell the present progressivetense
Ss: Retell
T: Guide Ss to do ex
Ss: Do ex
T: Check and correct
E.g: a. What is her name?
Her name is Susan
T: Introduce the structures of The comparative and superlative form of short adjectives
Ss: Look listen and copy
T: Ask Ss to do ex
Ss: Do ex
T: Check and correct
adj
comparative
superlative
Long Short Tall Small Big High
thick
Longer Shorter Taller Smaller Bigger Higher
thicker
The longest The shortest The tallest The smallest The biggest The highest
The thickest
T: Aks Ss to retell the use of Some/a lot/a few/little
Ss: Retell
T: Guide Ss to do ex
T: Ask ss to complete the passage in exercise
4 with a partner
*The street of HN are very busy.There is a lots of traffic. Most people only *The street of HN are very busy.There is a lots of traffic. Most people only have a little money to
spend on transportation. As a result,there are only a few private cars on the roads.
The bike is the cheapest form of transportation,so there are a lots of bikes. There are a lots of motobikes, too. There are a lots of taxis, but they are expensive
Ss: Do ex
T: Check and correct
10’
10’
10’
10’
I. Present simple tense ( Thì hiện tại đơn)
1. Grammar
(+) S + V / Vs, es + O.
(-) S + do/ does + not + O…
(?) Do / Does + S + V…?
Yes, S + Do/does
No, S + Don’t/doesn’t
2. Practice exercise1
b. speaks
c. speaks Chinese d.speaks Japenese
e.speaks Vietnamese f.speaks English
II. Present progressive tense
( thì hiện tại tiếp diễn)
1. Grammar
(+) : S + am / is / are + V-ing + O
(-) : S + am /is /are + not +V-ing + O
(?) : Am / is /are + S + V-ing + O?
2. Practice excerise 2
b.lives
c.is-is staying d.is
e.does-teaches
f.does-teach-doesn't- teaches
III. Adjectives: Comparatives and superlatives
a. Comparative: short adj+er
big→bigger
small→smaller
S1 +be +short adj-er +than +S2
E.g: Hoa is taller than Nga
b. superlative: short adj + est
big→bigest
small→smallest
S + tobe + the + adj-est
E.g: Hoa is the tallest
Big = > bigger = > the biggest.
2. Practice excerise 3
a. longer-the longest
b. the longest
c. the tallest-taller-the tallest
d. the biggest-bigger-the
IV. Some quantity adjs
- Some/a lot/a few+plural countable nouns
- Some/a lot of/a little+uncountable nouns
Lots of = a lot of
c. Summary: 2’
T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………Period 102: REVISION
1. Objectives:
a. knowledge:
• By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: further practice with the verb "To be" in present simple tense,asking and answering about quantity,some i mperatives;asking and aswering about things with This/That/These/Those and quesstion words; Possesive pronouns and greeting
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c . Behavior:
Student like studying the subject and use English correctly. Ss have feeling that It's easy to learn the subject
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture, chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids.
3. Steps of teaching:
a. Oral test: 2’
* Warm up
Ask ss to play Simon say with some imperatives
a.come in b.sit down
c.stand up d.open your book e.close your book f.bye/good by e
c. New lesson: 40’
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Ask ss to work in groups and practice greeting each other by using some greeting sentences
1.Hello
2.How are you?I'm fine ,thanks
3.Good morning ..
Ask ss to revise the meaning and form of the verb"To be" am/are/is
-Ask ss to give examples
E.g:I'm eleven years old
-Ask them to read the answers and the questions from h to n on page 176
Ss:Work in groups and practice with a partner
T: Check and correct
T: Request Ss to say again the way of asking and answering about quantity then ask them to give examples
Ss: Give examples then do ex
T: Check and correct
T: Point to things and practice asking and answering with This/That/These/Those
-Ask ss to practice asking and answering about things in the class
E.g:What is this? -This is a table
T: Call on some pairs to practice to class
Ss: Practice
T: Revise some question words then ask Ss to practice themselves
Ss: Practice
T: Ask Ss to revise Prossessive pronouns
Ss: Retell
T: Ask ss to make sentences with these possessive pronouns
Ss: Make sentence
10’
8’
10’
8’
4’
I. Present simple tense with tobe
1. Grammar
(+) S + am/is/are + O.
(-) S + am/is/are + not + O…
(?)am/is/are + S + O?
Yes, S + am/is/are
No, S + am/is/are + not
2. Practice exercise1
E.g:S1:Hello!my name is Lan
S2:Hi,Lan!My name is Nga
How are you,Lan?
S1:I'm fine,Thanks and you?
S2:Fine,thanks
Ec…
II. There
There is + DT số it
There are + DT số nhiều
There is one
There are two
III. This/that/these/those
*Note:This/That+singular countable nouns
These/Those+plural countable nouns
+This/These to talk about thing that is near the speaker
+That/Those to talk about thing that far from the speaker
IV. Question words
What/how/where/when…..
Eg: S1: How old are you?
S: I’m 12
Etc…
V. Prossessive pronouns
I You We They She He It
My your our their her his its
c. Summary: 2’
T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………Period 103: REVISION
1. Objectives:
a. knowledge:
• By the end of the lesson, students will be able to: Further practice in present simple tense,days of the week; some modal verbs; adverb of frequency and indefinite quantifiers
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c . Behavior:
Student like studying the subject and use English correctly. Ss have feeling that It's easy to learn the subject
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture, chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids.
3. Steps of teaching:
a. Oral test: 2’
* Warm up
T: Ask Ss to find in the book which part use present simple tense
c. New lesson: 40’
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Ask ss to say again the use and form of the present simple tense. Guide ss to read part 9,14,19,25 and 30 chorally
Ss: Retell and read
T: Ask ss to work in pairs, practice asking and asnwering the Qs about themselves
Ss: Practtice
T: Guide Ss to retell days of the week
Ss: Retell
T: Guide Ss to practice ask and answer about subjectat school with “when”
T: Show the Ly's timetable and ask ss to practice asking and answering about her with a friend
E.g:S1:When does Ly have English?
S2:She has E on Monday and Friday
T: Call on some pairs to practice
T: Ask Ssto retell Adverbs of frequency
T: Call on some pairs to practice to class
Ask ss to work in pairs and practice asking and answering about their habits
E.g:S1:How often do you help your mom?
S2:I often help my mom
T: Call on some ss to practice in front of the class
And ask ss to say again the way of offering and giving advice
Ss: Practice in pairs
T: Ask Ss to retell modal verbs
Ss: Retell
T: Ask ss to give some countble and uncountable nouns
T: Revise the way of using a/an/some/any/a few/a little,a lot/lots of
Ss: Retell
10’
8’
5’’
5’
8’
4’
I. Present simple tense ( Thì hiện tại đơn)
1. Grammar
(+) S + V / Vs, es + O.
(-) S + do/ does + not + O…
(?) Do / Does + S + V…?
Yes, S + Do/does
No, S + Don’t/doesn’t
2. Practice
Do you like noodles?
Yes, I do
Ec…
II. Days of the week
Monday; Tuesday; Wednesday; Thursday; Friday; Saturday; Sunday
Form:
When do we have + subject?
We’ve it on + day in the week.
Does/ do + S + on + ....
Eg : When do we have english ?
We have english on Tuesday, Thursday and Saturday
III. Adverbs of frequency
Always,usually, often Etc…
IV. Would/want/need
S+Would+Like+O
E.g: What do you want/need?
I'd like an apple
V. Modal verbs: can/must/should
Can/must/should + V + O
Giving advice
S+Should/shouldn't+V+O
VI. Indefinite quantifiers
A/an/some/any/a few/a little,a lot/lots of
E.g:apple,banana,orange, meat, rice…
c. Summary: 2’
T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
Date of planning: ………… Date of teaching: 6a:……………………
6b: ……………………
6c: ……………………Period 104: REVISION
1. Objectives:
a. knowledge:
• By the end of the lesson, students will be able to :
further practice in the present progressive tense;preposition;adjectives;comparative and superlative forms;expressing a future action;weather and the seasons
b. skill:
Listening, writing, speaking and reading.
c . Behavior:
Student like studying the subject and use English correctly. Ss have feeling that It's easy to learn the subject
2. Preparations:
a. T: Teaching aids, syllabus, textbook, cassette, board, picture, chalk
b. Ss: Old lesson, learning aids.
3. Steps of teaching:
a. Oral test: 2’
* Warm up
T: Ask Ss to retell some prepositions
Ss: Retell: in/on /next to/etc…
c. New lesson: 40’
Teacher and students’s actives.
Contents.
T: Ask Ss to retell the present progressive tense
Ss: Retell
T: Ask ss to give examples
T: Guide ss to read part 15 and 27
Ss: Read
T: Ask ss to work in pairs and practice the Qs about themselves. Call on some pairs to practice to class
Ss: Practice
Ask ss to say again the way of expressing
a future action
-Ask them to give examples
E.g:?What are you going to do?
I'm going to visit Hue
T: Ask ss to play Noughts and Crosses
Ss: Play game
T: Ask ss some Qs
1.Which season do you like best?
2.Why?
T: Ask ss the question:What's the weather like in the[spring]?
T: Request ss to write a short paragraph about the season they like best
T: Ask Ss to retell the adjs
Ss: Retell
T: Ask Ss to give ex
Ss: Give ex
Ex: He is tall
T: Use the picture and ask ss to compare the house and the store
E.g:The house is taller than the store
-Ask them to say again the superlative and comparative form of adjs
-Request ss to make 5sentences using these forms to compare their friends E.g:Hoa is taller than Lan
Hung is the tallest person
10’
8’
8’
6’
8’
I. Present progressive tense
1. Grammar
(+) S + tobe + V-ing
(-) S + tobe + not + V-ing
(?) tobe + S + V-ing?
Yes, S + tobe / No, S + tobe + not
I am + V-ing
She/he/it + is + V-ing
You/we/they + are + V-ing
E.g(+)We are learning English now
(-)I'm not reading book
(?)What is he doing?
2. Practice
What are you doing?
I'm reading an English book Ec…
II. Going to
What + is /are /am + S + going to + do?
( S + is /are /am + going to + V
E.g:?What are you going to do?
+I'm going to visit Hue
III. Weather and seasons
Hot; warm; cool; cold; summer etc…
E.g:I like spring.It's warm.I often go
fishing and go camping with my friends
IV. Adjectives
Big; sall; etc…
V. Comparative and superlative forms
1. Comparative: short adj+er
big→bigger
small→smaller
S1 +be +short adj-er +than +S2
E.g: Hoa is taller than Nga
2. superlative: short adj + est
big→bigest/small→smallest
S + tobe + the + adj-est
E.g: Hoa is the tallest
c. Summary: 2’
T: retells the content of the lesson.
d. Guide to do Homework: 1’
- Learn the lesson.
- Do exercise
- Prepare for the next period
PAGE
5

X-Powered-By: PHP

Pragma: public